Imaging Expertise in Custom and OEM Product Development. In-House Design and Manufacturing Capabilities

Transcription

1 Thorlabs Imaging group is a world-wide team dedicated to the development of Optical Coherence Tomography,, and. The group is comprised of highly skilled engineers with expertise in optical systems design, mechanical and electrical systems integration, and software development. Through close collaboration with leading researchers, the group develops imaging systems and components to help advance the research endeavors of our customers. Many of our systems are customizable to meet various application needs. We encourage you to start a dialog about how we can best help fulfill your imaging needs. Expertise in Custom and OEM Product Development In-House Design and Manufacturing Capabilities Advanced Optical and Imaging Software Development Modular System Designs are Easily Customizable Custom and OEM Opportunities On-Site Demos, Loans, and Leasing Options Available Precision Testing of a Custom Fast Steering Mirror ThorImageLS TM Software Interface for Thorlabsʼ Optical Coherence Tomography Research Lab 1652

2 Selection Guide LASER SCANNING MICROSCOPY MICROSCOPY COMPONENTS OCT IMAGING SYSTEMS OCT COMPONENTS ADAPTIVE OPTICS Pages Pages Pages Pages Pages Selection Guide Tutorial Pages Pages Accessories Pages Essentials Kit Pages Confocal Pages Essentials Kit Page

3 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Tutorial (Page 1 of 6) Introduction Laser scanning microscopy (LSM) is an indispensible imaging technique in the biological sciences. In this tutorial, we will be discussing confocal fluorescence imaging, multiphoton excitation fluorescence imaging, and second and third harmonic generation imaging modalities. We will limit our discussion to point scanning of biological samples with a focus on the technology behind the imaging tools offered in this section of our catalog. The goal of any microscope is to generate high contrast, high resolution images. In much the same way that a telescope allows scientists to discern the finest details of the universe, a microscope allows us to observe biological functioning at the nanometer scale. Modern laser scanning microscopes are capable of generating multidimensional data (X, Y, Z, τ, λ), leading to a plethora of high resolution imaging capabilities furthering the understanding of underlying biological processes. In conventional widefield microscopy, high-quality images can only be obtained when using thin specimens (on the order of one to two cell layers thick). However, many applications require imaging Figure 1 - Widefield Epi-Fluorescence Schematic of Wide Field Epi-Fluorescence of thick samples, where volume datasets or selection of data from within a specific focal plane is desired. Conventional widefield Detector microscopes are unable to address these needs. LSM, in particular confocal laser scanning microscopy (CLSM) and multiphoton laser scanning microscopy (MPLSM), allows for the visualization of thin planes from within a thick bulk sample, a technique known as optical sectioning. In CLSM signal generated by the sample outside of the optical focus is physically blocked by an aperture, preventing its detection. MPLSM, as we will discuss Ocular Emission Filter later, does not generate any appreciable signal outside of the focal Dichroic Mirror plane. By combining optical sectioning with incremented changes in focus (Fig. 2), laser scanning microscopy techniques can recreate 3D representations of thick specimen. Excitation Filter Light Source Contrast Mechanisms in LSM Typically, biological samples do not have very good contrast, which leads to difficulty in observing the boundaries between adjacent Objective structures. A common method for improving contrast in laser scanning microscopes is through the use of fluorescence. In fluorescence, a light emitting molecule is used to distinguish the constituent of interest from the background or neighboring structure. This molecule can already exist within the specimen Sample (endogenous or auto-fluorescence), be applied externally and attached to the constituent (chemically or through antibody Figure 2 - Optical Sections (Visualization of Thin Planes from within a Bulk Sample) Optical Sectioning in Confocal Optical Sectioning in Thick Sample Optical Section Thick Sample Optical Section Signal generated by the sample is shown in green. Optical sections are formed by discretely measuring the signal generated within a specific focal plane. In confocal LSM, out-of-focus light is rejected through the use of a pinhole aperture, thereby leading to higher resolution. Comparatively, in multiphoton microscopy, signal is only generated in the focal volume. Signal collected at each optical section can be reconstructed to create a 3D image. 1654

4 Tutorial (Page 2 of 6) S 1 λ EX Linear λ EM S 0 S 0 One-Photon Excited Fluorescence A S 1 * Figure 3 - Signal Generation in λ EX λ EX λ EM Excited Fluorescence B Nonlinear λ EX λ EX Harmonic Generation C λ SHG,THG Absorptive Process (A, B): The absorption of one or more excitation photons (λ EX ) promotes the molecule from the ground state (S 0 ) to the excited state (S 1 ). Fluorescence (λ EM ) is emitted when the molecule returns to the ground state. Non-Absorptive Process (C): The excitation photons (λ EX ) simultaneously convert into a single photon (λ SHG,THG ) of the sum energy and half (for SHG) or one-third (for THG) the wavelength. Non-Radiative Energy Losses OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit binding), or be transfected (fluorescent proteins) into the cell. In order for the molecule to emit light (fluoresce), it must first absorb light (a photon) with the appropriate amount of energy to promote the molecule from the ground state to the excited state as seen in Fig. 3A. Fluorescence is emitted when the molecule returns back down to the ground state. The amount of fluorescence is proportional to the intensity (I ) of the incident laser; hence CLSM is often referred to as a linear imaging technique. Natural losses within this relaxation process require that the emitted photon have lower energy (i.e., longer wavelength) than the absorbed photon. excitation (MPE, Fig. 3B) of the molecule occurs when two or more photons arrive simultaneously whose sum energy satisfies the transition energy. Consequently, the two arriving photons will be of lower energy than the emitted fluorescence photon. MPLSM techniques are also capable of contrast mechanisms using non absorptive processes. Under conditions in which harmonic generation (HG) is allowed, the incident photons are simultaneously annihilated and a new photon of the summed energy is created as illustrated in Fig. 3C. Further constituent discrimination can be obtained by observing the physical order of the harmonic generation. In the case of second harmonic generation (SHG), signal is only generated in constituents that are highly ordered and lacking inversion symmetry. Third harmonic generation (THG) is observed at boundary interfaces where there is a refractive index change. Two-photon excitation and SHG are nonlinear processes and the signal generated is dependent on the square of the intensity (I 2 ). The nonlinear nature of signal generation in multiphoton microscopy requires high photon densities in order to be observed. In order to accomplish this, while maintaining relatively low average power on the sample, modelocked femtosecond pulsed lasers, in particular Ti:Sapphire lasers, have become the standard. Another consideration to be made in nonlinear microscopy is the excitation wavelength for a particular fluorophore. Convention would indicate that the ideal excitation wavelength is twice the one photon absorption peak. For most fluorophores, the excited state selection rules are different for one- and two-photon absorption. This leads to two-photon absorption spectra that are quite different from their one-photon counterparts. Two-photon absorption spectra are often significantly broader (can be >100 nm) and do not follow smooth semi-gaussian curves. The broad two-photon absorption spectrum of many fluorophores facilitates excitation of several fluorescent molecules with a single laser, allowing the observation of several constituents of interest simultaneously. All of the fluorophores being excited do not need to have the same excitation peak but should overlap each other and have a common excitation range. Multiple fluorophore excitation is typically accomplished by choosing a compromising wavelength that excites all fluorophores with acceptable levels of efficiency. Image Formation In a point scanning LSM, the single plane image is created by a point illumination source imaged to a diffraction-limited spot at the sample, which is then imaged to a point detector. Two dimensional en face images are created by scanning the diffractionlimited spot across the specimen point by point to form a line, then line by line in a raster fashion. The illuminated volume emits a signal that is then imaged to a single element detector. The most common single element detector used is a photomultiplier tube (PMT); however, in certain cases APDs can be used. CCD cameras are not typically utilized in point scanning microscopes, although they are the detector of choice in multifocal (i.e., spinning disk confocal) applications. The signal from the detector is then passed to a computer that constructs a two-dimensional image as an array of intensities for each spot scanned across the sample. Consequently, LSM is referred to as a digital imaging technique, as no true image is formed. A clear advantage of single point scanning and single point detection is that the displayed image resolution, optical resolution, and scan field can be set to match a particular experimental requirement and are not predefined by the imaging optics of the system. Image Formation continued on next page 1655

5 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Tutorial (Page 3 of 6) Point illumination, typically from a single mode, optical fiber-coupled CW laser, is the critical feature that allows optical sectioning. The light emitted from the core of the single mode optical fiber is collimated and used as the illumination beam for scanning. The scan system is then imaged to the back aperture of the objective lens, which focuses the scanned beam to the diffraction-limited spots on the sample. The signal generated by the focused illumination beam is collected back through the objective and passed through the scan system. After the scan system, the signal is separated from the illumination beam by a dichroic mirror and brought to a focus. The confocal pinhole is located at this focus. In this configuration, signal generated above or below the focal plane is blocked from passing through the pinhole, creating the optically sectioned image (see Fig. 2). The detector is placed after the confocal pinhole, as illustrated in Figure 4A. It can be inferred that the size of the pinhole has direct consequences on the imaging Detector Illumination Beam Illumination Aperture Scan System capabilities (particularly contrast, resolution, and optical section thickness) of the confocal microscope. In the case of MPLSM, the short-pulsed free-space laser introduction supplies the collimated illumination beam that passes through the scanning system and is focused by the objective. The very low probability of a multiphoton absorption event occurring, due to the I 2 dependence of the signal on incident power, ensures signal is confined to the focal plane of the objective lens. Therefore, very little signal is generated outside the region above and below the focal plane. This effective elimination of out-of-focus signal provides inherent optical sectioning capabilities (see Fig. 2) without the need for a confocal pinhole. This also means that the collected signal does not have to go back through the scanning system, allowing the detector to be placed Figure 4 - Optical Path in the Microscope Detection Aperture A. Confocal Optical Path Dichroic Mirror Scan Lens Scan Lens Tube Lens Tube Lens B. Optical Path Detector Objective Dichroic Mirror Objective as close to the objective as possible to maximize collection efficiency. This is illustrated in Figure 4B. A detector collecting signal before it travels back through the scan system is referred to as a non-descanned detector. The lateral resolution of a confocal microscope is determined by the ability of the system to create a diffraction-limited spot at the sample. Forming a diffraction-limited spot depends on both the quality of the laser beam as well as that of the scan optics and objective lens. The beam quality is typically ensured by using a single mode optical fiber to deliver the excitation laser light, as a Gaussian point source, which is then collimated into a diffractionlimited beam. In an aberration-free imaging system, obtained by using the highest quality optical elements, the size of this focus spot, assuming uniform illumination, is a function of excitation Confocal Images A 250 µm x 210 µm image showing the top view projection of a rabbit artery slice. This pseudo-colored confocal fluorescent image was taken using Thorlabs Confocal System and a 60X objective. Mammalian Smooth Muscle Laser: 488 nm and 642 nm Objective: 20X, 0.75 NA 1656

6 Tutorial (Page 4 of 6) wavelength and numerical aperture (NA) of the objective lens as seen in Eq. 1: Equation 1 In actuality, the beam isn t focused to a true point but rather to a bullseye-like shape called an Airy disk. The spot size is the distance between the first zero s of the Airy disk (diameter across the middle of the first ring around the center of the bullseye) and is termed one Airy Unit (AU). This will become important again later when we discuss pinhole sizes. The lateral resolution of the imaging system is determined by the distance required to observe two points as two distinct entities. According to the Rayleigh criterion, these two points are said to be resolvable when the maximum of one point falls no closer than the first zero of the Airy pattern of the adjacent point (i.e., the center of one bullseye falls on the middle of the first ring around the center of the second bullseye). Lateral resolution is therefore Equation 2 It is interesting to note that in a confocal microscope, the lateral resolution is solely determined by the excitation wavelength. This is in contrast to widefield microscopy where lateral resolution is determined only by emission wavelength. The axial resolution of a confocal microscope is given as Equation 3 R SpotSize = axial λ ex NA 0.88 λex = 2 n n NA where n is the refractive index of the immersion medium. To determine the appropriate size of the confocal pinhole, we must multiply the excitation spot size by the total magnification of the microscope: Equation 4 D R lat pinhole = λex AU = 2 NA = M objective M As an example, the appropriately sized pinhole for a 60X objective with a NA = 1.0 using 488 nm excitation (M scanhead = 1.07 for the Thorlabs Confocal Scanhead) would be 38.2 µm and is termed a 2 scanhead. SpotSize. pinhole of 1AU diameter. If we used the same objective parameters but changed the magnification to 40X, the appropriate pinhole size would be 25.5 µm and would also be termed a pinhole of 1AU diameter. Therefore, defining a pinhole diameter in terms of AU is a means of normalizing pinhole diameter, even though one would have to change the pinhole selection for the two different objectives. Theoretically, the total resolution of a confocal microscope is a function of the excitation illumination spot size and the detection pinhole size. This means that the resolution of the optical system can be improved by reducing the size of the pinhole. Practically speaking, as the pinhole diameter is restricted, resolution and confocality will improve but less signal will reach the detector. A pinhole of 1 AU is a good balance between signal, resolution, and confocality. The longer wavelength used for excitation would lead one to believe (from Eq. 2) that the resolution in nonlinear microscopy would be reduced by a factor of two. Indeed, for an ideal point object (i.e., a sub-resolution size fluorescent. bead) the I 2 signal dependence reduces the effective focal volume more than offsetting the factor of two increase in the focused illumination spot size. The lateral resolution of a nonlinear microscope is Equation 5 R lat and the axial resolution is Equation 6 R axial = 2 ln λ 2 NA () λ = 2 n 1 2 n NA We should note that the lateral and axial resolutions display an intensity dependence. As laser power is increased, there is a corresponding increase in the probability of signal being generated within the diffraction-limited focal volume. In practice, the lateral resolution in a multiphoton microscope is limited by how small the illumination be can be focused and is well approximated by the Rayleigh criterion (Eq. 2) at moderate intensities. Axial resolution will continue to degrade as excitation power is increased. Live Cell Imaging on next page 2. OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Microscope Objectives RMS10X Wide Range of Magnifications from 4X to 100X Air or Oil Immersion Designs Available Chromatic and Spherical Aberration Correction For more details, see pages RMS100X-PFOD N100X-PFO 1657

7 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Tutorial (Page 5 of 6) Image Display Although we are not directly rendering an image, it is still important to consider the size of the image field, number of pixels in which we are displaying our image (capture resolution) on the screen, and the lateral resolution of the imaging system. We use the lateral resolution because we are rendering an en face image. In order to faithfully display the finest features the optical system is capable of resolving, we must appropriately match resolution (capture and lateral) with the scan field. Our capture resolution must, therefore, appropriately sample the optical resolution. In LSM, we typically rely on Nyquist sampling rules, which state that the pixel size should be the lateral resolution divided by 2.3. This means that if we take our 60X objective from earlier as an example, the lateral resolution is 297 nm (Eq. 2) and the pixel size in the displayed image should be ~129 nm. Therefore, for a 1024 x 1024 capture resolution, the scan field on the specimen would be ~132 x 132 µm. It should be noted that the 40X objective from our previous example would yield the exact same scan field (both objectives have the same NA) in the sample. The only difference between the two Applications of images is the angle at which the scanners are tilted to acquire the image. It may not always be necessary to render images with such high resolution. We can always make the tradeoff of image resolution, scan field, and capture resolution to create a balance of signal, sample longevity, and resolution in our images. Considerations In Live Cell Imaging One of LSM s greatest attributes is the ability to image living cells and tissues. Unfortunately, some of the by-products of fluorescence can be cytotoxic. As such, there is a delicate balancing act between generating high-quality images and keeping cells alive. One important consideration is fluorophore saturation. Saturation occurs when an increase in laser power does not provide an expected concurrent increase in the fluorescence signal. This can occur when as few as 10% of the fluorophores are in the excited state. The reason behind saturation is the amount of time a fluorophore requires to relax back down to the ground state once excited. While the fluorescence pathways are relatively fast (hundreds of ps to few ns), this represents only one relaxation mechanism. Triplet state conversion and nonradiative decay require significantly longer Broadly speaking, LSM has applications in the biomedical sciences (biology, biochemistry, biophysics, and clinical medicine), material processing, and industrial inspection. In the following section, we will briefly discuss some of the applications of LSM in the biological sciences. Neuroscience For Neuroscience, LSM allows one to view structural (synaptic plasticity) and functional (optical recording of action potentials) properties with very high spatial and temporal resolution. Action potentials can be monitored through the use of calcium-sensitive or voltage-sensitive dyes. Information gathered aids in the understanding of learning and memory to neurological and neurodegenerative diseases. Cancer LSM can provide great insight into many aspects of cancer research. In much the same way histology is used to diagnose cancerous cells based on morphological changes, LSM can observe the same changes in vivo. Additionally, LSM is sensitive to immunolabeling and fluorescent protein labeling of cancer markers. LSM can also be used to monitor drug delivery and tumor vasculature (particularly vascular leakage). Thorlabs Confocal Scan System mounted on an inverted microscope equipped with an MLS203-1 microscopy stage. Tissue Engineering Among some of the primary considerations in tissue engineering is understanding the mutually complimentary interactions of cells with other cells and the surrounding extracellular matrix. LSM is sensitive to a wealth of signals to better elucidate the biological, mechanical, and chemical interactions for the characterization and evaluation of tissue microstructure. Developmental Biology The ability of LSM to image living and developing specimen (from cell to embryo to tissue) opens up a wide range of experiments. Imaging of developing systems, particularly in the post-genomic era, enables stem cell tracking and differentiation, genetic expression, and response to injury. Molecular Imaging The continual refinement of fluorescent proteins has allowed a new range of molecular imaging experiments. Fluorescent proteins can be transfected into any cellular constituent. The true advantage here is that the fluorescent protein is only expressed when the protein of interest is transcribed. Molecular imaging allows the dynamic tracking of intracellular protein interactions in cell signaling and transport from the sub-cellular to whole animal level. 1658

8 Tutorial (Page 6 of 6) relaxation times. Furthermore, re-exciting a fluorophore before it has relaxed back down to the ground state can lead to irreversible bleaching of the fluorophore. Cells have their own intrinsic mechanisms for dealing with the cytotoxicity associated with fluorescence when it occurs slowly. One method to reduce photobleaching and the associated cytotoxicity is through fast scanning. While reducing the amount of time the laser spends on a single point in the image will proportionally decrease the amount of detected signal, it also reduces some of the bleaching mechanisms by allowing the fluorophore to completely relax back to the ground state before the laser is scanned back to that point. If the utmost in speed is not a Applications of critical issue, one can average several lines or complete frames and build up the signal lost from the shorter integration time. The longer excitation wavelength and non-descanned detection ability of MPLSM give the ability to image deeper within biological tissues. Longer wavelengths are less susceptible to scattering by the sample due to the inverse fourth power dependence of scattering and wavelength. Typical depth penetration is ~ µm; however, imaging as deep as 1 mm has been reported in the literature compared to ~100 µm for confocal. OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Two-photon fluorescence of DAPI (blue), AlexaFluor488 (green), and AlexaFluor568 (red) in a mouse kidney. Image obtained using Thorlabs Microscope with an Olympus 20X, 1.0 NA objective. Second Harmonic Generation image of collagen in chicken skin. Image obtained using Thorlabs Microscope and an Olympus 20X, 1.0 NA objective. Confocal Essentials Kit Two-photon image of mouse neurons expressing GFP (780 nm excitation). Image obtained using Thorlabs Microscope with an Olympus 20X, 1.0 NA objective. Two-channel confocal image of a mouse kidney expressing DAPI (cell nuclei, blue) excited at 405 nm and AlexaFluor488 (convoluted tubules and glomeruli, green) excited at 488 nm. Image taken with 60X objective. ScienceDesk Workstations Thorlabs ScienceDesk is a modular workstation with a versatile selection of frames and optional accessories that allows you to build a customized, ergonomic work space for your specific application. New to the line is an active-air frame and 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) breadboard designed to accommodate a multiphoton imaging setup. SDA Frame and PerfomancePlus Breadboard shown with Thorlabs MPM200 System Rigid, Passive, and Active-Air Welded Steel Frames Stainless Steel Tabletop (With or Without Holes; Nonmagnetic Options also Available) Modular System of Accessories For more details, see pages

9 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Confocal Accessories (Page 1 of 6) offers several advantages over other laser scanning techniques, particularly the ability to image deeper into a sample. The modular design of Thorlabs is flexible enough to suit both researchers looking to bring standard turnkey multiphoton technology into their laboratories as well as those desiring to build customized multiphoton systems from scratch. Three systems, which include both 2-channel and 4-channel variations, are detailed below. The diverse product portfolio of Thorlabs gives us the unique ability to provide all the necessary pieces to create a turnkey multimodal imaging workstation. This includes the complete multiphoton imaging system, beam conditioner, physiology stage, ultrafast laser source, dispersion compensation, epifluorescence illuminator, fluorescence filters and filter cubes, anti-vibration tables, and beam diagnostics equipment. Features Broadband Excitation Path: nm High Speed: 30 Frames per Second (at 512 x 512 Pixel Resolution) Full Field-of View Non-Descanned Detectors Two-Channel, Four-Channel, and Four-Channel-Ready Available MPM200-2 Two-Channel Mulitphoton System Mounted on PHYS24M Physiology Stage with Motorized Microscope Translator Two-Channel System Thorlabs MPM200-2 Two-Channel System is well suited for a variety of biomedical imaging applications. The fast scanning of the MPM200 series allows for more data to be collected in less time, maintaining specimen viability over the course of the experiment. The two highsensitivity, non-descanned detectors maximize signal collection efficiency to image deeper and with less damage. An easy-to-change filter cube allows the user to select which wavelengths are directed to each detector. Maximum resolution is ensured by using high-numerical-aperture objective lenses. The dedicated multiphoton optical path allows high NA objectives from a variety of manufacturers to be used with the system. In particular, low magnification, high-na water dipping physiology objectives are well supported. The included ThorImageLS acquisition software controls all the necessary functions for capturing three-dimensional data. Thorlabs aims to offer the most versatile multiphoton microscope system on the market. We encourage customers to contact us at ImagingSales@thorlabs.com to discuss alternative upgrades or modifications to our systems. System Accessories Thorlabs offers a range of accessories for use with our multiphoton imaging systems, including physiology stages, a beam conditioner, and a dispersion compensation unit. Please see pages for details. PHYS24 Physiology Stage Shown with Manual Microscope Translator (See Pages for System Accessories) Label-Free Imaging systems can also be used for label-free imaging of biological tissues with an ordered structure. Some samples, like collagen-based samples, are naturally suited for two-photon microscopy because they can absorb two photons from the multiphoton system s excitation laser and spontaneously re-emit a photon with double the frequency (Second Harmonic Generation, SHG). Due to this natural phenomenon, labeling dyes do not need to be used when imaging these samples. Included with MPM200-2 Nikon FN1 Microscope Two High-Sensitivity GaAsP PMTs Beam Delivery Periscope Z-Focus Motor Two-Channel Electronics and Computer with 24" Monitor ThorImageLS Acquisition Software (See Page 1666 for Details) Installation Included Cross-section of a chicken tibia. The green pseudo color indicates second harmonic generation from collagenous fibers within the bone, while the blue pseudo color is autofluorescence of chondrocytes within the trabeculae. This technique is used in a growing number of applications involving cellular membranes and intact tissue imaging, as well as material science applications. SHG created by myelin and collagen yields excellent extracellular structure determination without the need for an externally applied fluorophore. SHG microscopy has been used extensively in studies of the cornea and lamina cribrosa, structures that consist mostly of collagen. 1660

10 (Page 2 of 6) Four-Channel System Thorlabs Four-Channel System, an extension of our MPM200-2 Two-Channel System presented on the previous two pages, includes an additional transmitted light detection module (TLDM). This system provides a total of four detection channels, making it ideal for monitoring fluorescence resulting from multiphoton excitation as well as photons attributed to second and third harmonic generation.* The TLDM allows the MPM200-4 to acquire four fluorescence channels simultaneously by using the sub-stage condenser lens as an opposing objective. If the same filter cube is placed in the back scattered detector as the TLDM, the forward propagating signal can be Included with MPM200-4 Nikon FN1 Microscope Four High-Sensitivity GaAsP PMTs Transmitted Light Detection Module (See Next Page for Details) Beam Delivery Periscope Z-Focus Motor Four-Channel Electronics and Dual Quad-Core (64-Bit) Computer with 24" Monitor ThorImageLS Acquisition Software (See Page 1666 for Details) Installation Included summed with the backscattered signal, in software, effectively increasing the signal-to-noise ratio of the resultant image. Alternatively, the backscattered detectors can detect two fluorescence signals, and the forward detectors can collect the signals that arise from second and third harmonic generation. When not needed, the TLDM can slide forward and allows sample observation using the white-light wide-field illuminator. MPM200-4 Four-Channel Mulitphoton System shown on a PHYS24M Physiology Stage with MPM-BCU Beam Conditioner and COMP6300 Dispersion Pre-Compensation Units, all placed on a 5' x 6' SDA ScienceDesk. OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit *Third harmonic generation requires a laser excitation wavelength greater than 1.2 µm, which is well supported by the broad excitation wavelength range of the MPM200 series of multiphoton systems. MPM-TLDM Transmitted Light Detection Module Deep Tissue Imaging TRITC Alexa 488 Deep Tissue Imaging Imaging depth is primarily limited by the scattering of both excitation laser light into the sample and subsequent signal emitted from the sample. In multiphoton microscopy, longer excitation wavelengths from a pulsed laser are used, which leads to less scatter and deeper penetration into the specimen. Both the excitation laser and emission signal are spatially limited to the focal plane, and hence, the emitted signal is only from this focal plane. Positioning the GaAsP PMTs directly behind the objective ensures that more photons reach the detector. DAPI 20X 1.0 NA W Phalloidin DNA Merged γ Tubulin Mouse Embryo Section. Sample Courtesy of Dr. Rieko Ajima, National Cancer Institute, Center for Cancer Research. 1661

11 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit (Page 3 of 6) MPM200-4R Shown with MPM-TLDM Upgrade Included with MPM200-4R All Standard Features of the MPM200-2 ThorImageLS Acquisition Software (See Page 1666 for Details) Dual Quad-Core Computer with 64-Bit Operating System and 24" Monitor Upgraded 4-Channel PCIExpress Digitizer Installation Included Confocal Confocal Accessories Four-Channel-Ready System Thorlabs recognizes that some customers may wish to have the option to upgrade their multiphoton system at a later time. To enable this level of flexibility, we offer our MPM200-2 Two-Channel System in a format that is ready for upgrade to a four-channel system at a future time. The MPM200-4R Four-Channel-Ready System provides all the same imaging capabilities as our MPM200-2 but includes the appropriate acquisition software and hardware to accomodate two additional channels of detection. Transmitted Light Detection Module Upgrade for MPM200-4R The Transmitted Light Detection Module (TLDM) is a modular upgrade for Thorlabs MPM200-4R Four-Channel-Ready System. This module converts the two-channel MPM200-4R into our four-channel MPM By adding two extra detection channels, the TLDM enables collection of additional information; the two existing channels of the MPM200-4R measure backscattered signal while the two additional channels from the TLDM measure forward scattering signal. The two additional detection channels consist of two high-sensitivity GaAsP PMTs with full field-of-view collection optics similar to the backscattered detection module. The sub-stage condenser lens acts as an opposing objective (0.78 NA) to efficiently collect the forwardpropagating signal. In addition to collecting fluorescence signals, the In combination with the MPM-TLDM (see below for details), the MPM200-4R is converted from the two-channel MPM200-2 to our MPM200-4 Four-Channel System. The MPM200-4R includes four-channel-ready high-performance data acquisition and is controlled by our ThorImageLS software. This system is compatible with all of our MPM200 Series Accessories detailed on pages Features Provides Two-Channel Forward Propagating Signal Collection Converts MPM200-4R into a Four-Channel Detection System Includes Two High-Sensitivity GaAsP PMTs and Easy Access Filter Cube Compatible with Existing Software and Control Electronics in the MPM200-4R System Mounts Directly onto Nikon FN1 Base TLDM can be used for collecting second and third harmonic signals. An easy access filter cube, shown in the image below, allows the user to appropriately select which signal is going to each detector. This Transmitted Light Detection Module (MPM-TLDM) mounts directly onto the Nikon FN1 base and conveniently slides forward when white-light wide-field visualization is required. The MPM-TLDM interfaces with the existing ThorImageLS software and data acquisition electronics that are built into the MPM200-4R System. The TLDM provides easy access and exchange of filter sets for forward signal detection. MPM-TLDM 1662

12 (Page 4 of 6) MPM200 Optical Path The MPM200 Series of multiphoton systems is specially designed to operate in the near-infrared wavelength range from nm. Through optimization in this region, these systems are well-suited for use with Ti:Sapphire excitation laser sources. A diagram of the optical beam path in a typical MPM200 series system is shown below. The excitation light (red) is directed through a beam periscope to the multiphoton scanning system. High-speed XY scanning is achieved using a galvo-resonant scanner pair. The scanning beam passes through a customized scan lens and tube lens system that has been designed for aberration correction and antireflection in the NIR. Careful attention was also paid to minimize Group Delay Dispersion of the excitation path as much as possible. The multiphoton emission signal from the sample (green) is coupled back through the imaging microscope objective and redirected to the PMT detector module in a non-descanned detection scheme. By minimizing the emission beam path from the sample to the detector, the detection efficiency is greatly improved. Furthermore, the PMTs are placed immediately behind the objective to minimize light loss in the microscope body itself. An NIR blocking filter placed ahead of the secondary dichroic mirror prevents any scattered excitation laser light from reaching the detector. The fluorescence filter cube consists of the secondary dichroic and two emission filters placed in front of each PMT. This cube is easily accessed through the front panel and changed by the user to suit experimental conditions. Galvanometer OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit GaAsP PMT Emission Filters Tube Lens Scan Lens Internal Periscope Resonant Scanner Z-Travel Confocal Essentials Kit Prism Mirror GaAsP PMT NIR Blocking Filter Secondary Dichroic Primary Dichroic Periscope PMT Collection Lenses Sample N20X-PFH N16XLWD-PF Thorlabs now offers a selection of physiology objectives especially suited for multiphoton imaging. These water immersion objectives have a high numerical aperture (NA) as well as a long working distance (WD). Additionally, they are designed to have a wide transmission and color correction range. Please visit our website,, for additional information on each objective. ITEM # M NA WD DESCRIPTION $ RMB N16XLWD-PF 16X mm Nikon CFI LWD 16X Plan Fluor Objective $ 5, , ,82 44, N20X-PFH 20X mm Olympus XLUMPLFLN 20X $ 6, , ,00 49, N40XLWD-NIR 40X mm Nikon CFI APO 40XW LWD Objective $ 12, , ,51 103, N40X-NIR 40X mm Nikon CFI APO 40XW NIR Objective $ 2, , ,80 18, N60X-NIR 60X mm Nikon CFI APO 60X NIR Objective $ 3, , ,23 29,

13 OCT (Page 5 of 6) CCD Camera Microscope Tube Lens CCD Camera Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Confocal Accessories Epi-Fluorescence Illuminator Prism Mirror Pull Primary Dichroic Sub-Stage Condenser NIR Tube Lens Epi-Fluorescence Transmitted Light MPM200 Cross-Section The light path of the MPM-200 is optically separate from the wide-field light path of the FN1 microscope. This allows the multiphoton scanning and detection optics to be specifically designed to perform multiphoton imaging without compromise. By keeping the existing optical path of the FN1 intact, the traditional brightfield and epi-fluorescence capabilities of the microscope remain unaffected, further enhancing the experimental flexibility of the MPM-200 series of multiphoton imaging systems. MPM 4' x 6' Table Schematic 72" (2 m) Fluorescence Imaging Filters and Sets " (1.25 m) 4 Ø25 mm Excitation and Emission Filters 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm Dichroic Beamsplitter Available Fluorescence Filter Sets YFP CY3.5 TXRED CFP TRITC WGFP GFP FITC BFP See pages Ti:Sapphire Laser 2. COMP6300 Dispersion Compensating Unit (See Page 1671) 6 3. MPM-BCU Beam Conditioner Unit (See Page 1669) 4. MPM200 System 5 5. PHYS24M Manual Physiology Stage (See Page 1673) 6. Optical Table 1664

14 (Page 6 of 6) SPECIFICATIONS Microscope Stand Recommended Objectives Upright Nikon FN1 Nikon CFI LWD 16XW, 0.80 NA,WD = 3.0 mm; Nikon CFI Apo 25XW, 1.10 NA,WD = 2.0 mm; Nikon CFI Apo NIR 40XW, 0.80 NA, WD = 3.5 mm; Nikon CFI Apo NIR 60XW, 1.0 NA, WD = 2.8 mm; Nikon CFI Apo Lambda S LWD 40XW, 1.15 NA,WD = 0.61 mm; Nikon CFI Apo Lambda S 40XW, 1.25 NA,WD = 0.18 mm; Nikon CFI Plan Apochromat 60XW, 1.20 NA,WD = 0.27 mm; Olympus XLUMPLFLN 20XW, 1.0 NA,WD = 2.0 mm; Z-Drive Minimum Step Size: 0.1 µm XY Stage (Optional) FN1 XY Rectangular Stage (Manual); XY Physiology Stage (Manual or Motorized, See Page 1673) Excitation Beam Conditioner (Optional, See Page 1669) Dispersion Pre-Compensation (Optional, See Pages ) Wavelength Range Objective Pupil Diameter Field of View Scanner Scan Speed Variable Beam Expander (1X - 4X); Motorized Beam Attenuation (λ/2 Wave Plate and Polarizer); fs nm 20 mm (Max) 16 mm Diagonal Square (Max) at the Intermediate Plane 700 µm x 700 µm with Nikon 16X Objective at Sample X: 7.8 khz Resonant Scanner Y: Galvanometric Scan Mirror x 512 Pixels OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Scan Zoom Scan Resolution Scan Mode Primary Dichroic 1X to ~8X (Approximate) Up to 2048 x 2048 Bi-Directional Acquisition Up to 4096 x 4096 Uni-Directional Acquisition Point XY Scan nm Longpass Detection Non-Descanned (NDD) Detectors PMT Sensitivity Wavelength Range Filter Cube Two High-Sensitivity GaAsP PMTs Positioned Directly Behind the Objective nm Single, User-Changeable 23.77" ( mm) 20.00" ( mm) 24.4" ( mm) 20.49" ( mm) 4.97" ( mm) 4.50" ( mm) 8.70" ( mm) 7.73" ( mm) 7.18" ( mm) Top View Left Side View Front View Right Side View MPM200-2 CALL CALL CALL CALL Two-Channel System MPM200-4 CALL CALL CALL CALL Four-Channel System MPM200-4R CALL CALL CALL CALL Four-Channel-Ready System MPM-TLDM CALL CALL CALL CALL Transmitted Light Detection Module (MPM200-4R Upgrade) 1665

15 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Confocal Accessories ThorImageLS Software All Thorlabs and Confocal Imaging are controlled using the ThorImageLS software application. The easy-to-use ThorImageLS graphical interface enables users to quickly gather and review their data. The software coordinates the peripheral control and image acquisition for optimal data collection. Captured experiments can then be played back and converted into movies for publishing and sharing. Capture Setup Flexible Framework of Peripheral Control and Confocal Scan Head Control Z-Stepper Motor Control Automated Pinhole Adjustment Photomultiplier Gain Control Excitation Laser Control (Power & Wavelength) Beam Size Control Real-Time Background and Flat Field Correction User Control of Detection Channels Flexible Image Size and Location Adjustment Save and Recall Experimental Settings in XML Format User-Selectable Color Assignments for Detection Channels For Windows XP and Windows 7 (32 & 64) Operating Contact ImagingSales@thorlabs.com for more details. Capture Review Experiment Playback Image Histograms Region of Interest (ROI) Measurements Line Profile Measurements AVI Movie Creator Compresses Image Sequences into an Easy-to-Share and Publish Format Selectable Color Channels Up to Four Simultaneous Channels Real-Time Capture 30 Frames per Second (512 x 512 Pixels) Streaming to Disk Z Volume Capture User-Defined Timelapse Up to Five Dimensional Data Collection X, Y, Z, Time, and Color Hardware Triggering for Experiment Initiation Image Formats: JPEG, TIFF, and AVI Movies Software Development Kit* Develop Custom Software for Full Control of Thorlabs and Confocal Imaging Example Code Included to Simplify Application Development Libraries Provided for C++ and LabVIEW Languages * Available Upon Request 1666

16 Octavius-2P: 10 fs Laser for 2P- microscopy requires a high-peak-power, pulsed laser source to provide high fluorescence signal intensity with minimal photodamage to the sample. The two-photon signal intensity can be increased by either increasing the average power of the femtosecond laser or by reducing the pulse length. Increasing the average power requires a high-power pump laser, which is expensive to buy and exhibits a high cost of ownership. IdestaQE, a strategic partner of Thorlabs, has designed the Octavius-2P, which offers a cost-effective alternative. Rather than building a multi-watt average output power system, we reduced the pulse width to 10 fs. The shortened pulse duration increases the peak power tenfold compared to 100 fs systems with the same average power. In addition, the reduced average power decreases the probability of photodamage. The Octavius-2P is pumped using newly developed Optically Pumped Semiconductor Laser (OPSL) technology. These next-generation pump sources allow for high compactness and low cost of ownership. OCTAVIUS-2P The ultra-high output power of over 500 kw, compared with other commercially available 300 kw lasers, provides the ability to probe deeper into biological tissue. Additionally, the spectral bandwidth of the 10 fs laser pulse from the Octavius-2P stretches over 100 nm, which allows the user to efficiently excite multiple fluorophores simultaneously. Features SPECIFICATIONS Ultra-High Peak Power (>500 kw) for Deep Imaging Peak Power >500 kw >100 nm Wide Spectrum Allows Multiple Fluorophores Average Power 500 mw to be Excited Simultaneously Pulse Width 10 fs 10 Femtosecond Pulse Provides More Signal and Less Repetition Rate 85 MHz Photodamage Power Stability 0.5% Small Footprint Conserves Lab Bench Space Beam Height 3.0" Laser Head Dimensions 533 mm x 394 mm x 132 mm (21.0" x 15.5" x 5.2") Power Supply Dimensions 432 mm x 279 mm x 381 mm (17.0" x 11.0" x 15.0") Chiller Dimensions 267 mm x 203 mm x 406 mm (10.5" x 8.0" x 16.0") Mouse Intestine OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Common Fluorophores Excited by the Octavius-2P Fura-2 Oregon Green DAPI e and w Type GFP Fluo-3 and Fluo-5F Cy2 and Cy3 Alexa Dyes CPF Mouse intestine. Photos taken with a two-photon microscope using the Octavius-2P as the laser source. The sample was labeled with Alexa 350 and Alexa 568 dyes. These two dyes have fairly-well separated excitation bands. Exciting these two dyes simultaneously with a traditional 100 fs laser source is difficult, since the bandwidth of the source is too narrow. The 10 fs Octavius-2P is able to excite both fluorophores simultaneously due to its larger bandwidth of over 100 nm. OCTAVIUS-2P CALL CALL CALL CALL 10 Femtosecond Pulsed Laser, 85 MHz Repetition Rate, >500 kw Peak Power Fluorescence Filter Cubes DFM Compatible with 30 mm Cage and SM1 Lens Tube Easily Switch Between Filter Sets Repeatable Alignment Post-Mountable Design Space for Labeling Filter Information For more details, see page

17 ScienceDesk Frame for Applications OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit 5' x 6' Working Surface is Ideal for This solution combines our active, self-leveling ScienceDesk frame with either our 1/4"-20 or M6 tapped PerformancePlus series work surface (optical breadboard). The large, 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) work surface area is ideal for multiphoton applications, as it allows sufficient room for both the laser and microscope to sit on the tabletop. Features SDA Frame with PerfomancePlus Breadboard Active, Self Leveling Vibration, Isolation Large 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) Work Surface Ideal for and Confocal Laser and Microscope Sit Side By Side, Increasing System Stability Modular Design Allows for Customization of Your Work Space Range of Accessories Available (See Pages 35 45) The ScienceDesk frame melds function and form to produce an industry-leading vibration-isolation platform. ScienceDesk frames feature a durable welded steel construction and provide a variety of shelving and solutions for equipment, storage, monitor mounting, etc. The work surface is inset in the ScienceDesk frame so that it is protected from accidental contact. Please refer to pages to view our accessory options. The active ScienceDesk frame utilizes four compact vibration isolators with a transmissibility ratio of 0.04 at 10 Hz, which is the highest level of isolation available in this line of portable, ergonomic ScienceDesk workstations (see pages 27 34). The active isolation system requires that a constant source of pressurized air (such as that provided by our PTA511 air compressor featured on page 72) be supplied to the pneumatic isolators. The system adjusts the pressure in each isolator to keep the optical breadboard surface level, even when the distribution of weight on the optical breadboard is changed. Thorlabs MPM200 System Shown on a 5' x 6' ScienceDesk Specifications* Load Capacity (Including Breadboard): 1540 lbs (700 kg) Frame Size: 1695 mm x 1995 mm (5.5' x 6.5') Air Pressure Required: 80 psi (551 kpa) Maximum Height Adjustment Range: Leveling Feet: ±0.59" (±15 mm) Finish: Dark Gray Self-Leveling Repeatability: ±0.02" (±0.5 mm) Isolation Type: Active Resonant Frequency Vertical: 1.5 Hz PTA511 Horizontal: 1.4 Hz Transmissibility (at Resonance) Vertical: 13 db Horizontal: 21 db Transmissibility Vertical (@10 Hz): -29 db (0.035 Transmissibilty Ratio) Horizontal (@10 Hz): -27 db (0.043 Transmissibilty Ratio) Ergonomics: In Accordance with BS EN 527 and BS EN 1335 *Frames rated at full load capacity 5' x 6' ScienceDesk Frame and Breadboards for SDA $ 4, , ,07 33, Frame Accepts 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) Breadboard PBI12129 $ 4, , ,76 33, ' x 6' PerformancePlus Breadboard, 1/4"-20 Taps PBI52529 $ 4, , ,13 32, mm x 1800 mm PerformancePlus Breadboard, M6 Taps 1668

18 Beam Conditioner MPM-BCU Power Controller Included The Beam Conditioner (MPM-BCU), which optimizes a laser beam for use in a multiphoton imaging system, is designed to be seamlessly integrated into the MPM200 Series of Imaging. The beam conditioner automates both the attenuation and expansion of the laser beam. Thus, the user can optimize these parameters directly from the ThorImageLS graphical user interface (GUI). The diameter of the laser beam output from the beam conditioner can be continuously varied from 1 to 4 times the diameter of the input laser beam to match the back focal aperture of the objective selected. After setup, getting the correct beam diameter is as simple as selecting the objective lens being used from a drop-down menu in the ThorImageLS GUI. The power of the laser at the sample can be adjusted to be any value between 0 and 100% (the purity of the input polarization state limits the minimum power value). Power adjustment is achieved either through the software interface (pictured below) or through the top panel controls on the external controller (included) for the variable attenuator. The software reads the variable attenuator controller, so it updates the GUI no matter which method of control is used. The software also provides a power ramping function (see the screen shot) that allows the user to increase the laser power as the system images deeper into a sample. This is done to compensate for scattering losses and intensity reductions from PSF (point spread function) degradation as the image depth increases. The power ramp works in conjunction with the Z-stack function. To create an image, set the top plane of the Z-stack and the power in the top plane with the attenuator tab. Then focus through the sample and define the bottom plane and the power required at the bottom plane so that both the top and bottom planes produce similar signal levels. The software then applies an exponential fit of the power ramp to the Z-stack when the image is acquired. When ordering the MPM-BCU, please specify the input beam height (4.25" or 4.75"). When the beam conditioner is used in an imaging system with a femtosecond laser source, both the attenuation optics and the beam expander will broaden the pulse due to dispersion. Therefore, we recommend using this conditioner in combination with the Dispersion Compensation Unit (COMP6300) featured on the next page. Both units are equipped with 1.035"-40 input and output apertures, allowing the beam paths to be easily enclosed using Thorlabs SM1 lens tubes (see page 134). SPECIFICATIONS Wavelength Range nm Beam Expansion 1X 4X Attenuation* 0 to 100% at Sample Input Beam Height 4.25" or 4.75" (Please Specify when Placing an Order) Output Beam Height 4.5" Dimensions (L x W x H) 21.25" x 10.75" x 7" *The purity of the laser source polarization state limits the minimum power. OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Features Automated Control of Laser Power and Beam Diameter Fully Integrated into the ThorImageLS Software Automated Power Ramp Function for Creating Z-Stacks 1/4" (M6) Holes in Base Allow Mounting to a Standard Optical Table Variable Attenuator Beam Conditioner Light Path Beam Expander By Selecting the Objective Lens, the MPM-BCU Automatically Adjusts the Beam Diameter (Setup Required). ThorImageLS software interface for the MPM- BCU Beam Conditioner Beam Input Beam Output MPM-BCU $ 15, , ,00 119, Beam Conditioner Unit for MPM

19 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Dispersion Compensation Unit for MPM200 (Page 1 of 2) Femtosecond pulses broaden as they pass through any optical element of the imaging system. This pulse-broadening phenomenon, a result of Group Delay Dispersion (GDD), results from the wavelength dependence of the refractive index of the various optical elements and acts to broaden the femtosecond pulses. Consequently, the peak power of the pulse is reduced. These effects can result in negative effects on both imaging depth and overall image quality (signal to noise ratio). Thorlabs Dispersion Compensation Units consist of dielectric mirror pairs that have specialized coatings designed to delay the phase of longer wavelengths more than the phase of shorter wavelengths, thus cancelling pulse broadening at the focus of the objective. Two versions are available. The full compensation unit (COMP6300) consists of two dielectric mirror pairs (see page 1717), designed to match and compensate for the GDD associated with Thorlabs MPM200 Microscope. The half compensation unit (COMP3150) consists of a single pair of dielectric mirrors and a single pair of silver mirrors. The figure at the top of the next page illustrates the benefits of using the COMP6300 in multiphoton imaging applications. Confocal Essentials Kit COMP6300 Specifications ITEM # COMP6300 COMP nm fs fs 2 Wavelength Range nm Input Beam Diameter (Max) 4 mm Beam Height 4.25" or 4.75" (Please Specify When Placing an Order) Vertical Input Polarization >80% Throughput Features Compensates Group Delay of Ultra-Short Laser Pulses Easy Drop-In Integration Collinear Input/Output Enclose Input and Output Beams Using SM1 Lens Tubes (See Page 134) 1/4" (M6) Holes in Base Allow Mounting to Standard Optical Tables Dimensions (L x W x H) Input/Output 10.0" x 4.1" x 6.5" (254 mm x 104 mm x 165 mm) SM1 (1.035"-40) Threaded Group Delay vs Wavelength 2500 Dispersion Compensation Unit (COMP6300) Light Path Dispersion Compensation Mirrors (DCOMP175) Dispersion Compensation Mirrors (DCOMP175) Group Delay (fs) COMP6300 COMP Input Beam Output Beam Wavelength (µm) Dispersion Compensating Mirror Set Bounces Between Each Mirror Pair 18 Bounces Between Each Mirror Pair % Reflectance P-Polarization (AOI = 8 ) Wavelength (nm) 1670

20 Dispersion Compensation Unit for MPM200 (Page 2 of 2) Compensation of Group Delay Dispersion (GDD) Ultra-fast laser pulses experience group delay dispersion as they propagate through components of an optical system. OCT Pulse at Sample (Due to Dispersion) Laser Pulse Time Optical System Without Dispersion Compensation Pulse broadening results in the phase of longer wavelengths being advanced ahead of shorter wavelengths. Pulse peak power is also reduced as a result of group delay dispersion. Time Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Laser Pulse Time Time Time DC Unit Optical System Pulse at Sample With Dispersion Compensation A dispersion compensating unit negates GDD by advancing the phase of shorter wavelengths relative to the longer wavelengths. As the pulse propagates through the optical system of the microscope, negative pulse broadening of the DCU is cancelled by the positive pulse broadening of the microscope. The optical system then recompresses the pulse to reconstruct the original pulse from the laser at the sample. Without Dispersion Compensation With Dispersion Compensation The two-photon images of a mouse intestine shown above demonstrate the benefits of using dispersion compensation to increase image quality. The image on the left was taken without the use of dispersion compensation, whereas the image on the right was acquired after adding a dispersion compensation unit to the setup. In the mouse intestine specimen, the goblet cell mucus and cell nuclei are labeled with Alexa Fluor 350 (blue) and SYTOX Green (green), respectively. These pseudocolor images were obtained using Thorlabs multiphoton microscope equipped with a 40X Olympus objective (NA = 0.75). Two-photon excitation was provided by IdestaQE s Octavius-1G, a Ti:Sapphire oscillator that provides a repetition rate of 1 GHz and ultra short (<6 fs) pulses. Dispersion Compensation Mirrors Also Sold Separately See page 1717 DCMP175 COMP6300 $ 11, , ,00 91, Dispersion Compensation Unit for Thorlabs MPM200 System (-6300 fs 2 ) COMP3150 $ 6, , ,00 54, Half Dispersion Compensation Unit (-3150 fs 2 ) 1671

21 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Physiology Stages (Page 1 of 2) Modern imaging technology enables the study of physiological processes in living cells and animals. Image quality depends not only on state-of-the-art technology but also on the preparation of the specimen to be imaged. Imaging of live cells, tissues, and animals often requires the ability to position the specimens so that they remain stationary during image acquisition. To address these needs, Thorlabs has developed physiology stages that provide manual or motorized movement of the microscope about a stationary specimen. These Physiology Stages consist of a rigid, mechanically and thermally stable U-shaped breadboard that provides more than two hundred 1/4"-20 (M6) tapped holes over a full 270, which PHYS24 makes it easy to mount patch clamps or other experimental accessories. The breadboard has a removable Ø110 mm insert with an inset that can accommodate a standard microscope slide or 35 mm Petri dish. The upper U-shaped breadboard is supported by four adjustable-height support columns (PHYS12P or PHYS12P/M), each of which can be adjusted from 8" to 12" (203 mm to 305 mm) and locked into place using a knurled ring locking collar. The base of each column is attached to a 1/2" (12.7 mm) thick solid aluminum breadboard measuring 24" x 24" (600 mm x 600 mm) with 1/4"-20 (M6) taps on 1.0" (25 mm) centers. Each physiology stage comes with either a manual or motorized 2" (50 mm) XY Travel Microscope Translator that is mounted to the base breadboard and provides smooth, repeatable movement in the XY direction while maintaining a stable platform for the microscope. The manual versions come with our LNR50M/M TravelMax Translation Stage, which incorporates micrometer drives that have a graduated scale. The Manual Microscope Translator can be easily configured into left- or right-handed XY systems. Features Adjustable-Height U-Shaped Breadboard Provides 270 Access to Samples Includes Microscope Translator (Three Versions Available) Manual Translation Motorized Translation Encoded Motorized Translation U-Shaped UltraLight Series Breadboard with Sealed Holes to Contain Spills Imperial and Metric Versions Ships Fully Assembled Motorized Physiology Stages The motorized versions of these microscope translators are available either with or without encoders. The linear optical encoder mounts to the moving platform of the stage and provides feedback to the drive electronics to ensure a bi-directional repeatability. A repeatability of 0.3 µm is achievable with encoders versus 0.5 µm without, which an absolute positioning accuracy of 3 µm over the full travel range is possible with encoders versus 10 µm without. Our motorized translators come with two TST001 T-Cube Stepper Motors for automated control, while the encoded versions come with our BSC102 Two-Channel apt Benchtop Stepper Motor; ordering information is shown on the bottom of the next page. Thorlabs PHYS24 Series of Physiology Stages offers state-of-the-art workstations that are directly compatible with the Nikon Eclipse FN1 upright microscope. Please ImagingSales@thorlabs.com to inquire about adapter plates that are compatible with other common microscopes. PHYS24 Shown with Nikon FN1 Microscope Details on Stage ITEM # DESCRIPTION PAGE LNR50M LNR50S LNR50SE Manual Linear Translation Stage Included with PHYS24(/M) Motorized Linear Translation Stage Without Encoder Included with PHYS24M(/M) Motorized Linear Translation Stage With Encoder Included with PHYS24ME(/M) TST001 Compact Stepper Motor Controller 630 BSC102 Two-Channel Stepper Motor Controller 632 MB2424* Base Breadboard 3 *MB3030/M Provided with Metric Items

22 Physiology Stages (Page 2 of 2) SPECIFICATIONS Platform* Support Posts* (4) 24.0" (610 mm) 4.7" (119 mm) 24.0" (610 mm) 7.1" (180 mm) 13.4" U-Shaped Breadboard UltraLight Series Ø4.3" (Ø110 mm) Adjustable-Height Support Column 650 mm x 450 mm 1/4"- 20 (M6) Tapped Holes on 1.0" (25 mm) Centers 8" to 12" Continuously Adjustable Height 1/4"- 20 (M6) Tap (Top-Located) 300 lbs/post (136 kg/post) Base** 24" x 24" Solid Aluminum Breadboard 1/4"- 20 (M6) Tapped Holes on 1.0" (25 mm) Centers * Available Separately. See the Following Pages. ** See Page 3 Microscope Translator Specifications Manual* XY Travel: 2" (50 mm) Adjustment: Micrometer Vernier Graduations: 10 µm Load Capacity: 110 lbs (50 kg) Motorized* XY Travel: 2" (50 mm) Adjustment: Stepper Motor Velocity (Max.): 1 mm/s Acceleration (Max.): 0.5 mm/s 2 On-Axis Accuracy: 10 µm Bi-Directional Repeatability: 0.5 µm Load Capacity: 110 lbs (50 kg) * available separately, see following pages. Motorized-Encoded* XY Travel: 2" (50 mm) Adjustment: Stepper Motor Velocity (Max.): 4 mm/s Acceleration (Max.): 3 mm/s 2 On-Axis Accuracy: 3 µm Over the Full Travel Bi-Directional Repeatability: 0.3 µm Velocity Stability: ±0.4 mm/s Encoder: Optical Grating Incremental Encoder Encoder Resolution: 0.1 µm Load Capacity: 110 lbs (50 kg) OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit 23.6" (600 mm) 17.7" (450 mm) 11.5" (292 mm) 8.7" (221 mm) 10.0" [8.5" - 12"] (254 mm) 15.5" (394 mm) 4.2" (106 mm) 24.0" (610 mm) 2.8" (70 mm) PHYS24ME (Nikon FN1 Microscope Not Included) Physiology Stage Options MPM-XYRS Nikon FN1 XY Stage TST001 Two Controllers Included with the PHYS24M (PHYS24M/M) BSC102 Two-Channel Controller Included with the PHYS24ME (PHYS24ME/M) TAPPED HOLES PHYS24 $ 7, , ,00 59, Manual Physiology Stage 1/4"-20 on 1.0" Centers PHYS24/M $ 7, , ,00 59, Manual Physiology Stage (Metric) M6 on 25 mm Centers PHYS24M $ 10, , ,00 79, Motorized Physiology Stage 1/4"-20 on 1.0" Centers PHYS24M/M $ 10, , ,00 79, Motorized Physiology Stage (Metric) M6 on 25 mm Centers PHYS24ME $ 14, , ,00 115, Motorized-Encoded Physiology Stage 1/4"-20 on 1.0" Centers PHYS24ME/M $ 14, , ,00 115, Motorized-Encoded Physiology Stage (Metric) M6 on 25 mm Centers MPM-XYRS $ 2, , ,15 22, Nikon FN1 XY Stage M6 on 25 mm Centers 1673

23 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Microscope Translators (Page 1 of 2) Thorlabs offers precision Microscope Translators to position a microscope about a stationary specimen. This method of positioning the FOV of the microscope enables viewing of a large area of a sample without moving the specimen. The Microscope Translators provide travel of the microscope in both the X and Y directions while maintaining a rigid, mechanically and thermally stable platform for the microscope. These translators are constructed of solid stainless steel and consist of four LNR50 stages (one master and one slave for each axis) mounted on a baseplate and connected by a top plate for mounting the microscope. The array of counterbored holes in the baseplate allows the Translator to be secured to an imperial or metric tapped breadboard or optical table. Manual Microscope Translator The manual Microscope Translator (MT-FN1) can be easily configured in either a left- or right-handed XY orientation. The MT-FN1 manual Microscope Translator utilizes micrometer drives with a graduated scale to provide smooth translation and repeatable positioning, which enables the microscopist to return to a previously viewed location. Features Manual, Motorized, and Motorized-Encoded Versions 2" (50 mm) XY Travel Range 110 lbs (50 kg) Capacity (XY Travel Platform) Rugged, Thermally-Stable Aluminum Mounting and Spacer Plates Heavy-Duty Cross-Roller Stainless-Steel Bearings Thorlabs standard Microscope Translators have a top plate that is specific to the Nikon Eclipse FN1 upright microscope. Please ImagingSales@thorlabs.com to inquire about top plates that are compatible with other common upright microscopes. MT-FN1 Specifications 2" (50 mm) XY Travel Range 50 µm/rev 10 µm/graduation MT-FN1 MT-FN1 $ 4, , ,00 31, Manual Microscope Translator Motorized Microscope Translator The motorized version of the Microscope Translator (MTM-FN1) includes high-quality stepper-motor-based actuators (DRV014) to provide automated high-resolution XY positioning and repeatability. Each stepper-motor-based actuator utilizes a trapezoidal-shaped 1 mm/rev pitch leadscrew that provides high load carrying capability. Coupled with stepper motor controllers (two TST001 controllers included), the Motorized Microscope Translator provides smooth automated-controlled movement in increments of 0.05 µm/step. ITEM # Travel Range MTM-FN1 2" (50 mm) Max Acceleration 0.5 mm/s 2 Max Velocity Max Load Capacity Incremental Movement 1.0 mm/s 110 lbs (50 kg) 0.05 µm (Min Achievable) Bidirectional Repeatability 0.5 µm Percent Positional Accuracy 0.02% (Max) Absolute Accuracy 10 µm Home Location Accuracy ±1.0 µm Drive Runout (Over Full Range) Leadscrew Pitch Limit Switches Included Controllers* Controller Interface DRV014 ±0.0004" (±10 µm) 1 mm Ceramic-Tipped Electro-Mechanical Switches TST001 USB Bearings Crossed Roller *Specifications for the TST001 Controller can be found on pages MTM-FN1 Controller Features Single-Channel Controller High-Resolution Microstepping Compact Footprint USB Plug-and-Play PC-Controlled Operation Easy-to-Use Manual Controls with Velocity Slider and Jog Buttons Full Software Control Suite Supplied Extensive ActiveX Programming Interfaces Software Integrated with Other apt Family Controllers The T-Cube USB apt Stepper Motor Controller (TST001) is a very compact, single-channel controller for easy manual and TST001 automated control of small, 2-phase, bipolar stepper motors. USB connectivity provides easy plug-and-play PC-controlled operation. Multiple units can be connected to a single PC via standard USB technology or by using the T-Cube Controller Hub (TCH002) for multi-axis motion control applications (see page 621). See Pages for More Details MTM-FN1 $ 7, , ,00 55, Motorized Microscope Translator with Controllers 1674

24 Microscope Translators (Page 2 of 2) Motorized Microscope Translator with Encoder The performance of the Motorized Microscope Translator is further enhanced by utilizing XY stages with high-resolution integrated linear optical encoders in combination with Thorlabs two-channel closed-loop stepper motor controller (BSC102). The linear optical encoder provides feedback to the drive electronics to ensure accurate positioning and allows a direct readout of the absolute position of the stage. With a resolution of 0.1 µm, the bi-directional position accuracy is greater than 0.3 µm (compared to 0.5 µm without the encoders) over the full 50 mm of travel. The motorized microscope translator with optical encoders allows the user to return to a previous position within the specimen and is the ideal solution for applications where stability, long microscope travel, and high-load capacity need to be achieved with absolute position accuracy. Specifications ITEM # MTME-FN1 Travel Range 2" (50 mm) Max Acceleration 3.0 mm/s 2 Max Velocity 4.0 mm/s Max Load Capacity 110 lbs (50 kg) Incremental Movement 0.05 µm (Min Achievable) Bidirectional Repeatability 0.3 µm Percent Accuracy 0.02% (Max) Absolute Accuracy 3 µm Over the Full Travel Home Location Accuracy ±1.0 µm Drive DRV014 Runout (Over Full Range) ±0.0004" (±10 µm) Leadscrew Pitch 1 mm Limit Switches Ceramic-Tipped Electro-Mechanical Switches Included Controllers* BSC102 Controller Interface USB Encoder Optical Grating Incremental Encoder Encoder Resolution 0.1 µm Bearings Crossed Roller MTME-FN1 BSC102 Two-Channel Model Thorlabs PHYS24ME includes the MTME-FN1 as shown here with a Nikon FN1 Microscope (Not Included) OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit *Specifications for the BSC102 Controller can be found on pages Controller Features Two-Channel Models Available Supports 2-Phase Bipolar Steppers up to 50 W Differential Encoder Feedback (QEP) Inputs for Closed-Loop Positioning USB Plug-and-Play Plus Multi-Axis Expansion Motor Control I/O Port (Jogging, Interlocks) Full Software GUI Control Suite High-Resolution Microstepping Control (For Very Fine Positioning Applications) Stable and Predictable Low-Speed Operation (For Velocity-Sensitive Applications) ActiveX Programming Interfaces Seamless Software Integration with apt Family See Pages MTME-FN1 $ 11, , ,00 91, Motorized-Encoded Microscope Translator 1675

25 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit U-Shaped Breadboard The PHY24BB(/M) breadboard is designed to be used as a microscopy stage; the U-shape surrounds the microscope providing 270 of workspace with over 200 1/4"-20 (M6) tapped mounting holes. Its lightweight aluminum construction makes it portable while the thermally stable honeycomb construction provides excellent dynamic rigidity PHYS24BB with a high strength-to-weight ratio. In addition, tapped mounting holes are individually sealed in order to contain spills. The dimensions of the U-shaped breadboard are ideal for the Nikon Eclipse FN1 upright microscope. The Ø110 mm insert seen in the picture above can be removed entirely or it can be used to hold a standard microscope slide or 35 mm Petri dish. Larger specimens, patch clamps, and other accessories can be easily secured to the working surface using the 1/4"-20 (M6) tapped holes. Features UltraLight Series Breadboard with Sealed Holes to Contain Spills Imperial and Metric Versions Available Full 270 Array of 1/4"-20 (M6) Taps Mechanically and Thermally Stable 7.1" (180 mm) Breadboard Shown with Insert Removed SPECIFICATIONS 4.7" (119 mm) Dimensions Weight 17.72" x 23.62" (650 mm x 450 mm) 15.5 lbs (7 kg) 17.7" (450 mm) Ø4.3" (Ø110 mm) Load Capacity Tapped Hole Matrix 110 lbs (50 kg) 1/4"- 20 (M6) Tapped Holes over 270 Surface 1/4"-20 (M6) Hole Matrix U-Shaped Breadboards* 13.4" (340 mm) PHYS24BB $ 2, , ,00 19, U-Shaped Breadboard for Physiology Stage, 1/4"-20 Taps PHYS24BB/M $ 2, , ,00 19, U-Shaped Breadboard for Physiology Stage, M6 Taps *One breadboard is included with the Physiology Stages sold on page Adjustable-Height Support Columns The PHYS12P(/M) Adjustable-Height Support Columns are designed to support a breadboard or microscope stage. Each post has a top-located 1/4"- 20 (M6 x 1.0) tap and a universal base that has four 1/4" (M6) counterbored holes on 2" (50 mm) centers for mounting it to an optical table or breadboard. The height of the post is continuously adjustable from 8" to 12", and its position can be locked using a knurled ring locking collar. To secure the columns to an optical table is as simple as loosening the locking collar and raising the red housing. This will provide access to the four counterbored 1/4" (M6) mounting holes. Features Continuously Adjustable Height from 8" to 12" Lockable Design Top-Located 1/4"-20 (M6 x 1.0) Tap Universal Base for Mounting to Work Surfaces with Imperial or Metric Taps Load Capacity/Post: 300 lbs (136 kg) PHYS12P Height can be Adjusted from 8" to 12". PHYS12P $ ,50 3, Adjustable-Height Support Columns, 8" to 12" PHYS12P/M $ ,50 3, Adjustable-Height Support Columns 8" to 12" (Metric) 1676

26 High-Power White Light Sources Lumen Maintenance (%) HPLS243 LIFI Plasma Light Source vs Xe Bulb Lifetime Hours of Operation LIFI Plasma Light Source 300 W Xe Bulb The lifetime of the LIFI Plasma Light Sources exceeds many Xenon and Mercury vapor arc lamp light sources, as illustrated in the plot above. Liquid Light Guide The HPLS200 Series of light sources can be integrated with popular microscopes. Microscope Adapter Collimating Lens Please contact us for details Thorlabs High-Power Light Sources are solid-state, plasma light sources (LIFI ) that combine the best features of solidstate electronics and full-spectrum plasma emitters. These sources incorporate a dielectric resonant cavity to efficiently couple power from a solid-state power amplifier into a highintensity discharge vessel, resulting in a light source with a long lifetime and a complete color spectrum. They are ideal for applications such as endoscopy, fluorescence microscopy, reflectance microscopy, and other medical lighting and inspection applications. Arbitrary Intensity Typical HPLS200 Spectrum After LLG Wavelength (nm) The output port of a HPLS200 Series Light Source features a Liquid Light Guide (LLG) mount that accepts Thorlabs Ø3 mm or Ø5 mm LLGs. The HPLS200 series design enables airflow and monitoring of the LLG tip temperature, which prevents overheating. To further protect the LLG, a hot mirror is placed just before the LLG tip. The HPLS200 s high-intensity output can be mated to the illumination port of many popular microscopes using a collimation adapter. Please contact us for details on these microscope adapters. Each light source is packaged in a compact housing that incorporates both the power supply and lamp assembly. A three-digit display, controls, and power switch are located on the front of the unit. The lamp can be enabled, and its intensity can be adjusted using the front panel. Alternatively, the lamp can be controlled via computer software using a USB connection. The rear of the unit features a connections for a USB cable, an AC power cable, and a liquid light guide. ITEM # HPLS243 HPLS245 Spectral Range nm Color Rendering Index* 94 Numerical Aperture (NA) 0.66 Lifetime >80% Power After 10,000 Hours Dimming Range % Electrical AC Line Voltage Power Consumption 85 VAC to 264 VAC 310 W Optical LLG Tip 2.5 W 6.0 W *Prior to LLG Imaging OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Liquid Light Guides See page 1366 HPLS243 $ 3, , ,00 30, Solid State Plasma Light Source (Ø3 mm, 1.2 m Long LLG Included) HPLS245 $ 3, , ,00 31, Solid State Plasma Light Source (Ø5 mm, 1.2 m Long LLG Included) 1677

27 OCT Essentials Kit (Page 1 of 2) MPM-2PKIT Shown Mounted on an XT66 Series Rail (See Page 228) and MB1218 Aluminum Breadboard (See Page 3). Rail and Breadboard are Not Included. Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Physiology Objectives N16XLWD-PF N20X-PFH See page 1663 The MPM-2PKIT Essentials Kit is Thorlabs solution for researchers who desire to build their own multiphoton imaging system without sacrificing performance. This kit contains the core components necessary to easily configure a modular multiphoton imaging system for a specific application. Additionally, the microscope-less design enables imaging of large samples, such as whole animals, and reduces the overall footprint occupied on a workbench. The MPM-2PKIT Essentials Kit is derived from the optical system of our MPM200-2 Imaging System but made available in component form. The kit includes a scan head, a near infrared (NIR) scan and tube lens assembly, a primary dichroic mirror block, a filter block that holds a secondary dichroic as well as emission filters, two high-sensitivity GaAsP PMTs, and image acquisition electronics and software. The scan head houses a resonant scannergalvanometer pair for high-speed imaging (30 frames per second at 512 x 512 pixel resolution). The scan and tube lenses are designed for optimal performance in the NIR ( nm). Access is provided to the primary dichroic and filter cube, thereby enabling easy exchange of these components during an experiment. The system is designed for nondescanned detection, which positions two highsensitivity PMTs behind the user-supplied imaging objective. For customers who have their own detection system, we offer the MPM-SCAN Essentials Kit, which includes the Scan Head, Scan/Tube Lenses (MPM- SL), control electronics, and computer (with software and monitor) for two-channel detection. Features Includes Core to Build a Imaging System Scan Head with Galvo-Resonant Scanner Pair Near Infrared Scan and Tube Lens Dichroic Mirrors/Emission Filter Blocks Dual High-Sensitivity PMTs Computer (with 24" Monitor) and ThorImageLS Acquisition Software Non-Descanned Design Directly Compatible with Thorlabs Cage System Microscope-Less Design Enables Imaging of Large Samples Schematic Diagram and Beam Path of Essentials Kit Non-Descanned Detection Module GaAsP PMT GaAsP PMT Secondary Dichroic Mirror/Emission Filters Cube Emission Filter Dichroic Beamsplitter NIR Blocking Filter Scan Head Resonant Scanner Galvo Scanner Scan Lens Tube Lens Primary Dichroic Mirror Cube Microscope Objective Sample fs Laser In 1678

28 Essentials Kit (Page 2 of 2) SPECIFICATIONS Excitation Wavelength Range nm MPM-2PKIT Taps for 30 mm Cage System Imaging Objective Pupil Diameter Field of View 20 mm (Max) 16 mm Diagonal Square (Max) at the Intermediate Plane Galvo-Resonant Scan Head OCT Scanner Scan Speed X: 7.8 khz Resonant Scanner Y: Galvanometer Scan Mirror x 512 pixels NIR Scan and Tube Lens Optical System Tutorial Scan Zoom 1X - 8X (Approximately) Scan Resolution Scan Mode Primary Dichroic Up to 2048 x 2048 Bi-Directional Acquisition Up to 4096 x 4096 Uni-Directional Acquisition Point XY Scan nm (Longpass) Dual PMTs Primary Dichroic Mirror Block Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Detection M32 Objective Thread Essentials Kit Non-Descanned Detectors 2 High-Sensitivity GaAsP PMTs (Coupled to Primary Dichroic Block and Secondary Dichroic/Emission Filter Block) Secondary Dichroic and Emission Filter Block PMT Sensitivity Wavelength Range Filter Cube nm Single, User-Changeable; Dichroic: 480LP; EM1: 445/45; EM2: 530/43 The back of the scan head features four 4-40 taps that are directly compatible with our 30 mm cage components (see diagram above). In addition, for users who desire to build custom non-descanned detection systems, adapters enabling 30 mm cage and SM1 (1.035"-40) lens tube compatibility or 60 mm cage and SM2 (2.035"-40) lens tube compatibility are available upon request. These adapters attach to the primary dichroic mirror block. Please contact us for details. Adaptive Optics Application Thorlabs Essentials Kit includes computer (with 24" monitor) and ThorImageLS user software (see page 1666 for details). Two-Photon Microscope with See page 1802 MPM-2PKIT CALL CALL CALL CALL Essentials Kit MPM-SCAN CALL CALL CALL CALL Mulitphoton Essentials Kit without PMT Detectors MPM-SL $ 6, , ,00 51, Scan/Tube Lenses for Imaging, nm 1679

29 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Confocal Fluorescence (Page 1 of 4) CLS-UVSS Two-Channel Fluorescence Confocal System and MLS203 Stage Mounted on an Olympus IX51 Microscope (Stage and Microscope Not Included) Features Confocal Imaging Module for Inverted and Upright Microscopes Complete Image Acquisition Software Package Included Video-Rate Image Acquisition (512 x fps) Capture Resolution 2048 x 2048 Pixels (Bi-Directional) 4096 x 4096 Pixels (Uni-Directional) Two- and Four-Channel Options Choice of Standard Multialkali PMTs or High-Sensitivity GaAsP PMTs Optimized for nm Thorlabs Confocal (CLS) are comprised of compact, purpose built, imaging modules for infinity-corrected, compound microscopes. They add the ability to acquire high-resolution optical sections within a thick sample or to reduce background fluorescence from a thin culture. The CLS systems offer turnkey integration to almost any upright or inverted microscope with access to an intermediate image plane (e.g., a camera port) via a C-Mount thread. The included software has an intuitive graphical interface that allows data to be quickly recorded and reviewed while providing sophisticated peripheral controls for image acquisition. All CLS systems are user installable; however, on site installation is available. All hardware components are directly controlled through the ThorImageLS software, including automated Z stepping control for optical sectioning (via piezo or stepper motor) and automatic calculation of Airy disk units based on objective magnification and pinhole size combination. Our intuitive interface allows novice and experienced users alike to obtain high-resolution microscopic images quickly and easily. C. elegans motor neurons and muscle arms. The figure shows the C. elegans strain, tris30, expressing YFP in body wall muscles (green) and DsRED2 in the ventral nerve cord and motor neurons (red) Courtesy of Dr. William Ryu, University of Toronto. All CLS complete systems include a multi-channel fiber-coupled laser source, control electronics, Scan Head, pinhole wheel, detectors, and all fibers and cables needed to interconnect the system. Additionally, each system includes a Windows computer with a 24" monitor, data acquisition, and control boards as well as ThorImageLS software. A comprehensive installation and operation manual is also included with basic preventative maintenance instructions to ensure that your system performs optimally for years to come. Also available are complete systems that combine the Thorlabs Confocal package with third-party upright and inverted microscopes. For further details on this convenient option, please contact us at ImagingSales@thorlabs.com. Scanner At the heart of our systems is an efficiently designed Scan Head that incorporates a resonant scanner and a galvanometer for fast image acquisition. This allows for high imaging speeds up to 100 frames per second (at 128 x 128 pixel resolution) or high spatial resolution images (4096 x 4096 pixel resolution at 2 fps). At either extreme, or anywhere in between, the control and acquisition system creates highquality, jitter-free images (see inset at left). Located within the Scan Head is our new, kinematic fluorescence filter cube (DFMT1) for quick and repeatable exchange of the primary dichroic mirror. Our complete systems come standard with a primary dichroic that reflects Scan Head four laser lines (405, 488, 532, and 642 nm). Other primary dichroics for use with other wavelengths are available upon request. Optics The scan lens assembly has been designed for superior imaging performance and is color corrected from nm. This broad range adds to the functionality of the system, enabling the use of laser sources down to 400 nm while color correcting fluorescence emissions from even the deepest of red-emitting fluorophores. Coupled with ultra-sensitive, low-noise detectors and control electronics, we are able to provide systems that redefine the boundaries of contrast, resolution, and imaging speed at an affordable cost. 1680

30 SELECT SOURCE WAVELENGTH POWER Imaging Confocal Fluorescence (Page 2 of 4) Emission Pinhole: An automated 16-aperture pinhole assembly with apertures ranging from Ø25 µm to Ø2 mm, enables the ultimate balance between resolution and signal (for further details, see the Tutorial on page 1654). The pinhole is conveniently powered and controlled through USB. Additionally, the motorized, encoded control of the pinhole ensures perfect alignment and vibration-free movement. The emission light is focused on the pinhole and then collected by a large-core multimode fiber for transmission to the PMT detector system. Detector: Our systems provide two different detector options. The standard sensitivity multi-alkali PMTs provide a low-noise, highdynamic-range image that is appropriate for most life-science and industrial applications. If needed for weak or highly photosensitive samples, we also offer an option with highsensitivity, TEC-cooled GaAsP PMTs. With DETECTORS STANDARD SENSITIVITY HIGH-SENSITIVITY Photocathode Multi-Alkali PMTs Gallium Arsenide Phosphide (GaAsP) PMTs either choice, the gain of the detector as well Sensitivity 105 ma/w 176 ma/w as the dynamic range of the digitizer is Detection Wavelength Range nm nm controlled within the ThorImage software. Confocal LSM Images of Bovine Pulmonary Artery Endothelial Cells Bovine pulmonary artery endothelial cells visualized with BODIPY FL goat anti-mouse IgG. The nuclei were counterstained with DAPI. Scanned Area Size: 600 µm x 600 µm. Laser Source: 405 nm and 488 nm. OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Expandable PMT Modules are designed for multi-channel laser scanning microscopy applications. Excitation One of the great challenges in laser scanning microscopy has been keeping the lasers in a multi-channel source aligned and therefore at peak power. We have overcome this problem by creating a four-channel laser source based on four service-free fiber-pigtailed laser sources. Three of the four wavelengths are combined into a single fiber using an advanced, fully integrated fiber optic device. This solid state coupling method provides lifetime, adjustment-free service from our laser source. The combined visible output is contained in a single mode fiber with an FC/PC connector. The optional 405 nm laser output, which is delivered on its own single mode fiber, is combined after the beam expander in the Scan Head module. This allows the UV light to be coupled into the lightpath with a 4 mm beam diameter, thereby increases stability and maintaining the color correction of the system. We offer four standard wavelengths in our laser source (405, 488, 532, and 642 nm); others are available upon request. The entire laser source is controlled by a single USB connection, which allows the user to turn each laser on and off as well as to control its intensity. Bovine pulmonary artery endothelial cells stained with a combination of fluorescent dyes. Mitochondria were labeled with red-fluorescent MitoTracker Red CMXPos, F-actin was stained using green-fluorescent Alexa Fluor 488 phalloidin. Scanned Area Size: 600 µm x 600 µm. Single Laser Source: 488 nm. Schematic Diagram of Confocal Microscope Laser Input Single Mode Fiber Scan Head Resonant Scanner Galvo Scanner Scan Lens Filter Block Intermediate Image Plane Multimode Fiber Pinhole Wheel PMT Module Schematic Diagram of Four-Channel CLS Laser Source 405 nm 488 nm 532 nm 642 nm Pigtailed Lasers Microscope Tube Lens Fiber Collimator Emission Filter CH 1 ENABLE CH 2 ENABLE CH 3 ENABLE CH 4 ENABLE Fiber Coupler SYSTEM ENABLE Z Stage Infinity-Corrected Objective Sample Primary Beamsplitter Emission Dichroic 1681

31 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Confocal Fluorescence (Page 3 of 4) ITEM# CLS-2SS CLS-2HS CLS-4SS CLS-4HS CLS-UV Excitation 405 nm Laser Wavelengths - Additional 488 nm Wavelengths Available Upon Request 532 nm 642 nm Primary Dichroic Mirror Quad Band Dichroic Beamsplitter Scanning Scanning Resolution x 128 pixels (Max); x 4096 pixels (Min) Scanner X: 7.8 khz Resonant Scanner; Y: Galvanometer Scan Mirror Scan Zoom 1X - 8X (Approximately) Capture Resolution Up to 2048 x 2048 Bi-Directional Acquisition; Up to 4096 x 4096 Uni-Directional Acquisition Diffraction-Limited Field of View (FOV) FN25* = 442 µm x 442 µm 40X; FN23* = 407 µm x 407 µm 40X Emission Number of Standard Sensitivity PMTs Included High Sensitivity nm/60 nm Bandpass 514 nm/30 nm Bandpass Emission Filters - CWL/FWHM 525 nm/50 nm Bandpass 559 nm/34 nm Bandpass 645 nm/longpass 495 nm Secondary Dichroic - CWL 562 nm 605 nm *Field Number (FN) is the diameter of the image, formed at the intermediate image plane: FN = FOV * Magnification Scan Head and Optics Assembly (CLS-UV) 1.82" (46.1 mm) 4.48" (113.9 mm) 12.89" (327.3 mm) 11.38" (289.0 mm) CONFOCAL LASER SCANNER UV Laser In Top View 9.93" (252.2 mm) VIS Laser In Front View Scan Lens Scan Head 5.07" (128.8 mm) To Detectors Motorized Pinhole Wheel Z-Axis Options for Recording Optical Sections Analog Control: All of our CLS scan control modules include a 0 10 Volt analog output that can be controlled digitally from within the ThorImageLS software. The graphic interface allows the scaling of the output to be calibrated to the step size of any externally controlled focus device such as a piezo objective mover. Z-Focus Motor: We have designed a universal focus motor (MFC1) that mounts to the fine focus knob of a commercially available microscope. Please see the specifications on the next page for more information. Piezo Z-Stage: The MZS500-E 500 µm piezo z-stage can also be controlled from within the ThorImageLS application to provide high-resolution Z sectioning of samples. The MZS500-E offers 500 µm of travel with a minimum step size of 25 nm. Please see page 1690 for more information. Right Side View We offer a variety of standard system configurations to address the application-specific needs and budgetary constraints of our customers. Aside from the standard configurations outlined above, we are also able to utilize our broad resources and breadth of knowledge to provide fully customized systems that address your specific requirements. Our strength lies in the fact that we are a vertically integrated organization, able to leverage the knowledge and technologies of other Thorlabs divisions to provide a fully integrated system at an unparalleled price. The DFM Series of filter cubes is compatible with Thorlabs products as well as SM1 and 30 mm cage systems. 1682

32 Confocal Fluorescence (Page 4 of 4) Thorlabs CLS on Assorted Microscopes Inverted Microscope Configuration Upright Microscope Configuration Thorlabs T-Scope Configuration OCT CLS-FS CLS-UV CLS-UV Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit All Thorlabs CLS Confocal can be mounted on inverted and upright commercial microscopes on a standard C-mount camera port. For applications that do not require a commercial microscope, these systems are also compatible with Thorlabs T-Scopes. Thorlabs is able to offer a complete confocal imaging solution with motorized control and synchronization for Z stack image reconstruction with the use of the Motorized T-Scope. See page 1738 for details. CLS-2SS CALL CALL CALL CALL Two-Channel Fluorescence Confocal System with Standard Sensitivity PMTs CLS-2HS CALL CALL CALL CALL Two-Channel Fluorescence Confocal System with High-Sensitivity PMTs CLS-4HS CALL CALL CALL CALL Four-Channel Fluorescence Confocal System with High-Sensitivity PMTs CLS-4SS CALL CALL CALL CALL Four-Channel Fluorescence Confocal System with Standard Sensitivity PMTs CLS-UV CALL CALL CALL CALL Two-Channel UV Confocal System with Standard Sensitivity PMTs Motorized Microscope Focus Controller MFC1 Posts and Post Holders Included Features 100 µm Minimum Incremental Step USB Controlled Encoded Stepper Motor Drive Controlled Through ThorImageLS Software The MFC1 Motorized Microscope Focus Controller is a compact module enabling motorized focus control of commercial optical microscopes. An encoded stepper motor drive ensures repeatable positioning through the fine focus drive of the microscope and provides positional information, even if the fine adjustment is done manually. The unit is controlled via USB with our ThorImageLS software, instantly improving the functionality of your equipment. Please see page 3 to order a threaded breadboard to fit your application. MFC1 Mounted on an Inverted Microscope MFC1 $ 1, , ,50 14, Motorized Microscope Focus Controller 1683

33 OCT Tutorial Accessories Essentials Kit Confocal Essentials Kit Essentials Kits LSKIT-VIS The Essentials Kit is Thorlabs solution for researchers who desire to build their own laser scanning microscope. Two versions of kit are available: LSKIT- VIS for the nm transmission range and LSKIT-IR for the nm range. This kit contains the components necessary to construct a modular laser scanning imaging system. The design provides the flexibility necessary to integrate a custom system to meet individual imaging needs. The scan head contains a high-speed resonant scanner galvanometer pair, which uses single point illumination to scan across the sample for fast image acquisition (30 fps at 512 x 512 pixel resolution). The scan head also houses filter and beam steering cubes that have drop-in designs, enabling quick exchange of mirror sets. Along with the scan head, these kits include scan and tube lenses, an electronic control unit, a computer with 24" monitor, and ThorImageLS software. The electronic control unit for the LSKIT-VIS and LSKIT-IR is designed for two-channel detection with multi-alkaline, standard-sensitivity PMTs (sold separately, see page 1729). The included scan and tube lenses for these systems can also be purchased separately (see pages ). The LSKIT-VIS utilizes the CLS-SL scan lens and ITL200 tube lens, whereas the LSKIT-IR utilizes the MPM-SL scan/tube lens combo. Upon request, these kits can be upgraded to four channels and for use with highsensitivity, GaAsP PMTs. Features Includes Core to Build a Imaging System Scan Head with Galvo-Resonant Scanner Pair Scan and Tube Lenses Two-Channel Electronics Control and Computer with 24" Monitor ThorImageLS Software 4-Channel and High-Sensitivity Upgrades Available Upon Request Visible (LSKIT-VIS) and IR (LSKIT-IR) Versions Schematic Diagram and Beam Path of Essentials Kit Scan Head Resonant Scanner Galvo Scanner Beam Path Scan Lens Intermediate Image Plane Tube Lens SPECIFICATIONS Excitation Transmission Range LSKIT-VIS: nm LSKIT-IR: nm Diffraction- Limited FOV Imaging Speed Scanner LSKIT-VIS: FN25 ( nm); FN23 ( nm) LSKIT-IR: 16 mm Diagonal Square (Max) at the Intermediate Plane x 512 Pixels x 128 Pixels x 4000 pixels (Bi-Directional Scan) X: Resonant Scanner Y: Galvanometer Scanner Thorlabs Kits include ThorImageLS user software for high-speed acquisition and control (see page 1666 for details). LSKIT-VIS $ 48, , ,00 386, Visible Essentials Kit, nm LSKIT-IR CALL CALL CALL CALL IR Essentials Kit, nm 1684

34 Selection Guide LASER SCANNING MICROSCOPY MICROSCOPY COMPONENTS OCT IMAGING SYSTEMS OCT COMPONENTS ADAPTIVE OPTICS Pages Pages Pages Pages Pages Selection Guide Stages Pages Pages ScienceDesk Pages LEDs Pages Light Sources Pages Objectives/ Scan Lenses Pages Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Page 1717 Fluorescence Imaging Filters Pages Filter Cubes Pages Photomultiplier Modules Pages Microscope Adapters Pages Cuvette Holder Pages FiberPorts Page 1735 Test Targets/ Reticles Pages Microscopes Page 1738 Focus Blocks Page

35 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles ThorScopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel XY Stages Thorlabs MLS203 series of stages have been designed for use with select microscopes from Olympus, Nikon, and Zeiss. Various slide and multiwell plate adapters are available separately, as is a joystick for remote operation. We recommend driving this stage with our BBD102 Dual-Channel Brushless DC Servo Controller presented on the next page. SPECIFICATIONS Travel 110 mm x 75 mm (4.3" x 2.95") Speed 250 mm/s (Max) Acceleration 2000 mm/s 2 (Max) Bidirectional Repeatability 0.25 µm Unidirectional Repeatability 0.25 µm Horizontal Load Capacity (Max) 1.0 kg (2.2 lbs) Achievable Incremental Movement (Min) 0.1 µm Home Location Accuracy 0.25 µm Absolute On-Axis Accuracy <3 µm Max Percentage Accuracy X-Axis: % Y-Axis: 0.004% Settling Time within 1 µm (600 g Load) 0.1 s Settling Time within 0.1 µm (600 g Load) 0.6 s Weight (Including Cables) 3.2 kg (7.0 lbs) Bearing Type Precision Linear Bearing Motor Type Brushless DC Linear Motor Dimensions (Mid Travel) 250 mm x mm x 31 mm (9.84" x 9.03" x 1.22") Recommended Controller BBD102 Thorlabs High-Speed Motorized Stage systems have been designed as drop-in replacements for the manual stages on a variety of upright and inverted microscopes from Olympus, Nikon, and Zeiss to provide motorized XY positioning of microscopy samples. The internally integrated brushless DC servo motors with optical linear encoders enable scanning speeds up to 250 mm/s. This stage features an innovative low-profile design that eliminates the use of external motor housings, which are known to create mechanical clash points that impede access to the sample. The closed-loop, active feedback ensures positioning with a resolution of 0.1 µm and a bidirectional repeatability of 0.25 µm, while configurable S-curve acceleration/deceleration profiles allow fast, smooth positioning without vibration or shock to delicate biological samples under investigation. The MLS203-2 stage is directly compatible with Zeiss Axiovert 40 and Axio Observer microscopes. The MLS203-1 stage is also compatible with Olympus and Nikon microscopes when purchased with the appropriate adapter on page 530. Please contact technical support concerning possible compatibility with other microscopes. Characterized by high-speed scanning capabilities and high positional accuracy, this stage is ideal for manually or automatically positioning a wide range of samples. Precise control at the cellular level is easily achieved through the combination of the stable closed-loop control system and associated joystick option. MLS203 Stage with MLS203P2 Slide/Petri Dish Holder and Slide (Total Thickness: 31 mm) Features Compatible with Select Microscopes from Olympus, Nikon, and Zeiss Low-Profile, Compact Footprint High-Speed Travel Up to 250 mm/s Linear Optical Encoders High Repeatability (0.25 µm) and Positional Accuracy (<3 µm) Range of Sample Holders Available (See Page 531) Joystick Console for Remote Operation Also Available MLS203-1 Stage Shown on an Inverted Olympus Microscope on a ScienceDesk. BBD102 Controller and MJC001 Joystick are also shown. Other microscopes are supported as well. More information is presented on the following pages. XY Stages (Requires Driver BBD102 Presented on the Next Page) MLS203-1 $ 6, , ,13 54, Fast XY Scanning Stage* MLS203-2 $ 6, , ,13 54, Fast XY Scanning Stage for Zeiss Microscopes *Currently compatible with Olympus and Nikon microscopes when purchased with the appropriate bracket/adapter on page

36 Controller for MLS203 Stages The BBD102 2-Channel Benchtop DC Servo Controller provides user-configurable, S-curve acceleration/deceleration profiles that enable fast, smooth positioning without vibration or shock. It is ideal for motion control applications demanding operation at high speeds (hundreds of mm/s) and with high encoder resolution (<100 nm). With the latest digital and analog techniques and highbandwidth, high-power servo control circuitry, the BBD102 controller is designed to drive the MLS203 series of stages, allowing users to gain the full benefit of the DC servo motors used in these stages. This controller is equipped with Thorlabs standard apt control and programming interface, enabling easy integration into automated motion control applications. It is capable of being reprogrammed in-field and can be upgraded with future firmware releases. For greater flexibility, communication with a PC is supported using either a USB or RS232 serial interface. The controller comes with a software development kit (SDK) in order to support automated PC control of the stage. This is useful to system integrators and other automation specialists who need to coordinate operation of the stage with other microscopy automation accessories. The fully documented SDK supports all major development languages running on Windows and comes in the form of ActiveX libraries or a conventional dynamic link library (DLL). USB connectivity provides easy plug-and-play PC operation. Multiple units can be connected to a single PC via standard USB hub technology for multi-axis motion control applications. Combining this feature with the user-friendly apt software allows the user to program and carry out complex move sequences in a short period of time. See below for specifications and page 628 for more technical details on the controller. Specifications Drive Connector: 8-Pin DIN, Round, Female Feedback Connector: 15-Pin D-Type AUX Connector: 15-Pin D-Type Continuous Drive Output: 5 A PWM Frequency: 40 khz Operating Modes: Position and Velocity Control Algorithm: 16-Bit Digital PID Servo Loop with Velocity and Acceleration Feed Forward Velocity Profile: Trapezoidal or S-Curve Position Count: 32-Bit Position Feedback: Incremental Encoder Encoder Bandwidth: 2.5 MHz, 10 M Counts/s Encoder Power Supply: 5 V Input Power Requirements Voltage: VAC Power: 250 VA Fuse: 3.15 A Housing Dimensions (W x D x H): 240 mm x mm x mm (9.5" x 13.3" x 4.9") Weight: 6.1 kg (13.42 lbs) Controller for MLS203 Series Stages BBD102 Dual-Channel Controller OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles ThorScopes Focus Blocks XY Stage Controller BBD102 $ 2, , ,87 23, Channel Benchtop, 3-Phase Brushless DC Servo Controller Pinhole Wheel Joystick Console for MLS203 Stages Thorlabs MJC001 joystick console is designed for microscope users and enables intuitive, tactile, manual positioning of a stage. This highly reliable, Hall effect joystick features XY control, a speed adjustment for fast or high precision movement, and a high-quality, anodized aluminum casing. MJC001 Joystick Joystick Console MJC001 $ ,65 7, Axis Joystick Console 1687

37 OCT Stages ScienceDesk Mounting Brackets/Adapters for XY Stages These mounting brackets and adapters allow the MLS203-1 XY Stage to be mounted to various upright and inverted microscopes from Nikon and Olympus. Please refer to the table below for specific information on compatibility. The MLS203-2 XY microscopy stage is directly compatible with Zeiss Axio Observer and Axiovert 40 microscopes and does not require the purchase of additional mounting brackets. MLSA02 MLSA05 LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors M5 x 12 Bolt (8 Places) MLSA03 MLSA06 Fluorescence Imaging Filters MICROSCOPE TYPE UPRIGHT/ INVERTED MOUNTING BRACKET Filter Cubes Olympus IX71 and IX81 Inverted MLSA02 PMT Modules Microscope Adapters The mounting brackets attach to the MLS203 stage using M5 x 12 bolts. Mounting of the MLSA02 is shown above. Olympus BX51 and BX61 Upright MLSA05 Nikon TE2000 and Eclipse Ti Inverted MLSA03 Nikon 80i and 90i Upright MLSA06 Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles ThorScopes Focus Blocks Mounting Brackets for the MLS203-1 Series Stage MLSA02 $ , Olympus IX71/IX81 Mounting Bracket for MLS203-1 Stage MLSA03 $ ,23 1, Nikon TE2000/Eclipse Ti Mounting Bracket for MLS203-1 Stage MLSA05 $ ,50 2, Olympus BX51/61 Adapter for MLS203-1 Stage MLSA06 $ ,50 2, Nikon 50/80/90i Adapter for MLS203-1 Stage Breadboard Mounting Brackets Pinhole Wheel MLS203 Stage shown with MLSA01 Work Surface Adapters The MLSA01 Brackets enable the MLS203-1 XY Stage to be bolted to an optical table or breadboard, thereby facilitating the use of this stage in custom-built microscope setups or general photonics applications. The brackets, which are sold as a set of two, fit both imperial and metric mounting surfaces. Please note that these brackets are not compatible with the MLS203-2 Stage. Breadboard Mounting Brackets MLSA01 Breadboard Mounting Brackets MLSA01 $ ,85 1, Breadboard/Optical Table Mounting Brackets 1688

38 Accessory Plates for XY Stages A range of accessory plates is available for use with our MLS203-1 or MLS203-2 XY Stages featured on page 531. They allow the positioning of standard microscope slides, multiwell plates, Petri dishes, and mounted metallurgical specimens. Multiwell Plate Adapter Close Up of Clip Slide/Petri Dish Holder OCT Stages ScienceDesk MLS203P2 LEDs Compatible with Standard Well Plates Clip Holder to Secure Well Plates in Place Blank Adapter Plate MLS203P1 Compatible with Standard Microscope Slides and Ø30 mm to Ø60 mm Petri Dishes Can be used with Imperial or Metric Accessories Breadboard Plates Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder MLS203P3 Ideal for Custom or Non-Standard Applications Easily Drilled and Tapped MLS203P4 35 Imperial or Metric Taps MLS203P4: M6 x 1.0 Taps on 25 mm Centers MLS203P5: 1/4"-20 Taps on 1" Centers FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles ThorScopes Focus Blocks MLS203 Stage Shown with MLS203P1 Multiwell Plate Adapter MLS203 Stage Shown with MLS203P2 Slide/Petri Dish Holder Pinhole Wheel Optional Accessories MLS203P1 $ ,00 3, Multiwell Plate Adapter MLS203P2 $ ,50 3, Slide/Petri Dish Holder MLS203P3 $ ,50 1, Blank Adapter Plate MLS203P4 $ ,00 1, Breadboard Plate, M6 x 1.0 Taps MLS203P5 $ ,00 1, Breadboard Plate, 1/4"-20 Taps 1689

39 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes Z-Axis Piezo Scanning Stage with Controller MZS500-E Z-Axis Piezo Scanning Stage Kit Including BPC301 Controller MZS500 Features Provides XYZ Control when Paired with an MLS203 XY Travel Stage Directly Compatible with Multiwell Plates (Other Adapters on Facing Page) Thorlabs MZS500-E Low-Profile, Piezo-Driven Stage provides 500 µm of travel in the Z direction for visualizing samples in applications such as confocal microscopy and 3D imaging. The MZS500-E stage includes the BPC301 single-channel, closed-loop, piezo controller and everything needed for computer-controlled, Z-axis positioning and active location feedback. The MZS500-E stage is fully compatible with the MLS203 series of XY stage systems (see page 1686). By combining an XY Stage with this Z-Axis Stage, one obtains a versatile 3D solution for translating samples over a long travel range or scanning across a sample with high precision. The closed-loop, active feedback ensures correct positioning with submicron repeatability and 25 nm resolution, making this stage ideal for applications that require highly accurate focus control. LabVIEW Compatible Capacitive Closed-Loop Feedback Accurate Sample Positioning Can be Operated On or Off Microscope Includes Controller MZS500 Specifications Travel: 500 µm Resolution (Closed Loop): 25 nm Load Capacity: 0.25 kg (0.5 lb) Settling Time: 30 ms (for 25 µm Step) Resonant Frequency: 100 Hz (±10%), 0.25 kg Load Dimensions: 226 mm x 150 mm x 25 mm (8.9" x 5.9" x 0.98") Controller: BPC301 (Included) PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles ThorScopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Controller Features High Current Output Closed-Loop PID Position or Capacitive Feedback Circuit Quiet High-Resolution Position Control Voltage Ramp/Waveform Generation Capability Open-Loop High Bandwidth Piezo Positioning Full Software Control Suite Supplied Extensive ActiveX Programming Interfaces 3 m (9.75') Cable Included The BPC301 Piezo Controller, supplied with the MZS500-E Piezo Stage, is a one-channel, high-power benchtop piezo controller for open- and closed-loop nanometer position control. It features switchable voltage outputs and supports capacitive as well as strain gauge feedback. Flexible software settings make this unit highly configurable and therefore suitable for driving a wide range of piezo elements in third-party products. A waveform generation capability, combined with triggering outputs, makes this unit particularly well suited for piezo scanning applications. Controls on the front face of the unit allow manual adjustment of the piezo position. The display can be set to show either applied voltage or position in microns. Open- or closed-loop control and zeroing of the piezo can also be selected from the front panel. By coupling these features with user-friendly apt software, the user is able to get up and running in a short period of time. Advanced custom motion control applications and sequences are also possible using the extensive ActiveX programming environment. 1-Axis Piezo Stage with Controller and Software Controller Specifications* Piezoelectric Output: SMC Male Voltage (Software Control): 0 75 V, V or V Voltage (External Input): 0 to 10 VDC Current: 500 ma (Max) Continuous Stability: 100 ppm Over 24 Hours (After 30 Min. Warm-up Time) Noise: <3 mv RMS Typical Piezo Capacitance: 1 10 µf Bandwidth: 10 khz (1 µf Load, 1 V p-p ) Housing Dimensions (W x D x H): 152 mm x 244 mm x 104 mm (6.0" x 9.6" x 4.1") MZS500-E CALL CALL CALL CALL Z-Axis Piezo Stage with Controller MLS203/MZS500 XYZ Stage System shown with an Olympus Inverted Microscope * This product was still under development at the time of print, and thus, all specifications are subject to change; please refer to our website for up-to-date specifications. 1690

40 Accessory Plates for Z-Axis Piezo Scanning Stage Thorlabs offers a range of accessory adapters that can be used with our MZS500-E 2-Axis Piezo Stage and Controller. They allow positioning of standard microscope slides, Petri dishes, and mounted metallurgical specimens. Slide/Petri Dish Holder Blank Adapter Plate OCT MZS500P2 MZS500P3 Stages ScienceDesk Compatible with Standard Microscope Slides and Ø30 mm to Ø60 mm Petri Dishes Can be used with Imperial or Metric Accessories Breadboard Plates Ideal for Custom or Non-Standard Applications Easily Drilled and Tapped LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters 15 Imperial or Metric Taps MLS203P4: M6 x 1.0 Taps on 25 mm Centers MLS203P5: 1/4"-20 Taps on 1" Centers A multiwell plate can be fitted directly into the stage, without the need for an adapter plate as shown above. Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles Remote Console ThorScopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Thorlabs MZF001 remote console is designed for microscope users to provide intuitive, tactile, manual positioning of an MZS500 stage. It is used in conjunction with the BPC301 single-channel controller included with the MZS500 stage. MZF001 Joystick (Available Separately) 1-Axis Piezo Stage Accessories MZS500P2 CALL CALL CALL CALL Slide/Petri Dish Holder MZS500P3 CALL CALL CALL CALL Blank Adapter Plate MZS500P4 CALL CALL CALL CALL Breadboard Plate, M6 x 1.0 Taps MZS500P5 CALL CALL CALL CALL Breadboard Plate, 1/4"-20 Taps MZF001 CALL CALL CALL CALL Joystick Console for MZS500 Stage 1691

41 OCT Stages ScienceDesk Overview (Page 1 of 2) Equipment Shelves A variety of shelving options are available, including overhead shelves, side shelves, under shelves, and shelving for mounting test instrumentation and computers. The modular design of the ScienceDesk allows the shelving to be mounted in various locations. Breadboards Our breadboards have a high strength-to-weight ratio, a honeycomb core, and steel top and bottom plates. They offer excellent thermal stability and maximum rigidity. Our PerformancePlus range features enhanced internal damping to improve dynamic performance, which is required for more demanding applications. ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Monitor Mounts Multidirectional clamp supports most types of flat screen monitors. A version with an articulating arm is also available. Keyboard Holders The frame-mounted keyboard and mouse holder rotates 360º allowing it to be moved to various positions. Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel U.S. Patent: D455,300S GB Patent: GB B PC Shelf This specialized equipment shelf is designed to support a computer tower case. ScienceDesk Frames The ScienceDesk frame fully encloses the breadboard, protecting it from accidental knocks and allowing the placement of accessories. We offer three frame designs in different sizes to suit a range of applications. Rigid: Suitable for applications in which vibration isolation is not required. Passive: Non-leveling air mounts absorb vibrations from the floor and keep them from reaching the table top. Active: A pneumatic self-leveling design provides both horizontal and vertical vibration isolation of the tabletop and effectively attenuates low frequency vibrations. Mobility Heavy-duty casters can be included to allow smooth movement of the desk within the lab. Alternatively, the leveling feet can be adjusted to various fixed-position heights. Custom Sizes Available Call for Assistance (See the Back Cover for Contact Information) 1692

42 ScienceDesk Overview (Page 2 of 2) The ScienceDesk series is a modular system designed to provide an ergonomic alternative to conventional workstations. This highquality, modular workstation is ideally suited for a range of vibration-sensitive applications, such as those found in the fields of confocal microscopy, laser scanning microscopy, biotechnology, electrophysiology, and telecommunications. See Page 1696 for Product Details and Pricing Information Imaging OCT ScienceDesk is a modular system designed to provide an ergonomic alternative to conventional workstations. Frame Specifications SERIES RIGID PASSIVE ACTIVE Isolation Performance Vertical Transmissibility* N/A -16 db (0.15 Transmissibility Ratio) at 10 Hz -29 db (0.035 Transmissibility Ratio) at 10 Hz Horizontal Transmissibility* N/A -27 db (0.043 Transmissibility Ratio) at 10 Hz Vertical Resonant Frequency N/A 3.5 Hz 1.5 Hz Load Capacity N/A lbs ( kg)** 1,545 lbs (700 kg) Frame Size Frame Height *Frames rated at full load capacity **Higher load version is also available. 7.7" (195 mm) Deeper and Wider than the Work Surface Size 31.5" ± 0.6" (800 mm ± 15 mm) Self Leveling Repeatability N/A ±0.02" (0.5 mm) Finish Dark Gray Tabletop Specifications SERIES PERFORMANCE PERFORMANCEPLUS Flatness Over any 1.0 ft 2 (0.3 m 2 ) Area ±0.006" (0.15 mm) ±0.004" (0.10 mm) Damping Nominal Enhanced Thickness 2.4" (60 mm) & 4.3" (110 mm) Versions 2.4" (60 mm) & 4.3" (110 mm) Versions Construction Top and Bottom Plates Core Top Surface Finish *Nonmagnetic version is available Double-Plate, Single-Honeycomb Core, Athermalized Design Triple-Plate, Double-Honeycomb Core, Athermalized Design Magnetic Stainless Steel, 5 mm (3/16") Thick* High-Density, Plated-Steel Honeycomb High-Density, Plated-Steel Honeycomb with Intermediate Plated-Steel Sealing Cup Brushed Finish, Solid Stainless Steel, Optional Array of Mounting Holes Available Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console Fiber and Free Space Applications Over 25 Compatible Sensors Measurement Capabilities from 100 pw to 250 W and 185 nm to 25 µm Power and Energy Measurements 5.7" Auto-Rotating, Color Touch Screen USB Stick Data Storage Optional Plug-In Fiber Inspection Camera For more details, see page

43 ScienceDesk Faraday Cage Enclosure OCT Stages Monitor Mount Attached with Post Adapter (See Next Page) Cable Port Kit (See Next Page) ScienceDesk LEDs Side Shelf Adapter (See Next Page) Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel FAR05F Free-Standing Faraday Cage Experiments in electrophysiology, confocal microscopy, and other sensitive applications must often be shielded from external interferences such as electrostatic fields and highfrequency electromagnetic waves. Such disturbances can be caused by AM/FM radio waves, CRT oscilloscopes, and fluorescent light strips. Faraday cages minimize the electromagnetic waves that interfere with an object placed within them. Waves that are significantly longer than the mesh spacing will be blocked. Thorlabs offers two models of its Faraday cages. The first, FAR01, is compatible with our 750 mm x 900 mm ScienceDesk frame (see page 32). All post-mountable ScienceDesk accessories (i.e., shelving) can be mounted within the cage. The second option, FAR05F, is a freestanding version that can be placed on a table and is compatible with Thorlabs XE25 Rail System. Accessories can be seen on page For both models, the 16 count copper mesh has a shielding effectiveness of 55 db (at 10 MHz). Experiments within the cage can be easily accessed since the cage s panels are magnetically secured to the frame and can be lifted away as shown in the photo to the right. Two feed-through ports on the back panel offer Ø1.75" (Ø44.4 mm) clearance. Additional ports can be added by purchasing one or more of the PSY405 Cable Port Kits featured on the next page. To further enhance the usability of a ScienceDesk outfitted with a Faraday Cage, additional accessories are available. These are featured on the facing page. FAR01 Shown on ScienceDesk with Optional Accessories Features Isolates Experiments from Disruptive Electromagnetic Waves Shielding Effectiveness of 55 db at 10 MHz Removable Magnetic Panels for Quick Access to Experiment Post-Mounted ScienceDesk Accessories Fit Inside Versions Available for Mounting on a Table or 750 mm x 900 mm ScienceDesk Frame Panels are secured to the cage frame using magnets. FAR01 $ 2, , ,00 19, Faraday Enclosure for 750 mm x 900 mm ScienceDesk Frames FAR05F $ 2, , ,00 18, Free-Standing Faraday Enclosure 1694

44 Faraday Enclosure External Post Adapter PSY403 Adapter with PSY161 Post and PSY121 Monitor Mount (Not Included) The PSY403 external post adapter allows the Faraday Cage to be used with our ScienceDesk post-mounted accessories. The adapter bolts to the upper rails of a ScienceDesk frame and provides a single post-mounting through hole. Common applications of this adapter are for mounting a monitor support structure available on page 38. Additional applications include allowing our keyboard support system as well as our full line of ScienceDesk accessories to be attached to any ScienceDesk that has a Faraday Cage installed. PSY403 $ , Faraday Enclosure Single External Post Adapter Faraday Enclosure Post and Side Shelf Adapter PSY401 The PSY401 adapter maximizes the mounting capabilities when using a ScienceDesk with a Faraday cage. It offers seven through holes for post-mounted ScienceDesk accessories. Accessory Page Side Shelf 36 Single Shelf 36 Keyboard Support 38 Monitor Support 38 Post Assembly 38 PSY403 PSY401 Adapter with PSY350 Side Shelf OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PSY401 $ ,10 1, Faraday Enclosure Post and Side Shelf Adapter Faraday Enclosure XE25 Rail Adapter Kit PSY404 Adapters used to Build Structure within Faraday Cage Customized mounting solutions within a Faraday cage enclosure are made possible with the PSY404 adapter kit. By attaching one of the adapter plates included in the PSY404 kit to each end of a user-supplied XE25 series rail (see page 218 for details), the rail can be mounted perpendicular to a segment of the Faraday cage s XE25-compatible frame as shown in the photo to the left. PSY404 Includes Two Adapter Plates, Two 1/4"-20 Flat Head Screws, and Two M6 Flat Head Screws PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel PSY404 $ , Faraday Enclosure XE25 Rail Adapter Kit Faraday Enclosure Cable Port Kit PSY405 While the Faraday cage offers two cable ports on its rear panel, additional ports can be added to any Faraday Cage panel using this cable port kit. Each PSY405 kit enables the creation of an additional port with a clearance of Ø1.75" (Ø44.4 mm). PSY405 $ , Faraday Enclosure Cable Port Kit 1695

45 ScienceDesk for Applications OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs 5' x 6' Surface is Ideal for SDA Frame with PerfomancePlus Breadboard Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel This solution combines our active, self-leveling ScienceDesk frame with either our 1/4"-20 or M6 tapped PerformancePlus series breadboard. The large, 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) work surface area is ideal for multiphoton applications, as it allows sufficient room for both the laser and microscope to sit on the tabletop, thereby increasing laser stability and preventing vibrations from being transmitted through the cables. The ScienceDesk frame melds function and form to produce a portable, industry-leading vibration-isolation platform. ScienceDesk frames feature a durable welded steel construction and provide a variety of solutions for equipment storage and rigging. The optical breadboard (work surface) is inset in the ScienceDesk frame so that it is protected from accidental contact. A range of shelving options is also available for this ScienceDesk. Please refer to pages to view our accessory options. The active ScienceDesk frame incorporated into this multiphoton microscopy solution features a transmissibility ratio of 0.04 at 10 Hz and provides the highest level of isolation available in this line of portable, ergonomic workstations. The active isolation system requires that a constant source of pressurized air (such as that provided by our PTA511 air compressor featured on page 72) be supplied to the pneumatic isolators. The system will adjust the pressure in each isolator to keep the optical breadboard surface level, even when the distribution of weight on the optical breadboard is changed. Specifications* Thorlabs MPM200 System Shown on a 5' x 6' ScienceDesk Features Load Capacity (Including Breadboard): 1540 lbs (700 kg) Frame Size: 1695 mm x 1995 mm (5.5' x 6.5') Air Pressure Required: 80 psi (551 kpa) Maximum Height Adjustment Range: Leveling Feet: ±0.59" (±15 mm) Finish: Dark Gray Self-Leveling Repeatability: ±0.02" (±0.5 mm) Isolation Type: Active Active, Self-Leveling Vibration Isolation Large 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) Work Surface Ideal for and Confocal Laser and Microscope Sit Side By Side, Increasing System Stability Reduced Vibration from Connecting Cables Modular Design Allows for Customization of Your Work Space Range of Accessories Available (See Pages 35 45) PTA511 Resonant Frequency Vertical: 1.5 Hz Horizontal: 1.4 Hz Transmissibility (at Resonance) Vertical: 13 db Horizontal: 21 db Transmissibility Vertical (@10 Hz): -29 db (0.035 Transmissibility Ratio) Horizontal (@10 Hz): -27 db (0.043 Transmissibility Ratio) Ergonomics: In Accordance with BS EN 527 and BS EN 1335 *Frames rated at full load capacity SDA $ 4, , ,07 33, Frame Accepts 5' x 6' (1500 mm x 1800 mm) Breadboard PBI12129 $ 4, , ,76 33, ' x 6' PerformancePlus Breadboard, 1/4"-20 Taps PBI52529 $ 4, , ,13 32, mm x 1800 mm PerformancePlus Breadboard, M6 Taps 1696

46 Collimated LEDs for Commercially Available Microscopes Thorlabs collimated LED assemblies can be easily connected to standard and epi-illumination ports on most commercial microscopes. Each collimated LED consists of a high-power mounted LED and a lamphouse-port-compatible housing that contains an aspheric collimation optic. Collimation of the beam can be adjusted by changing the position of the aspheric lens with respect to the LED. The collimation optic has been chosen to offer superior aberration correction and a low f-number for higher light gathering efficiency. The coated aspheric lenses are ground and polished on the plano side and precision molded on the aspheric side. Interchanging LEDs is easy; simply unscrew one LED from the housing and replace it with a different mounted LED (purchased separately). Collimated LED Mounted on an Olympus IX71 Microscope Features Mounted LED with Adjustable Collimation Optic Compatible with Epi-Illumination Port on Several Commercially Available Microscopes Available in 15 Wavelengths Ranging from 365 to 940 nm, Including White Light Custom Housings Available OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Normalized Intensity Wavelength (nm) M365L2 M385L2 M405L2 M455L2 M470L2 M530L2 M590L2 M617L2 M625L2 M660L2 M735L2 M780L2 M850L2 M940L2 MCWHL2 Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Driver Options Thorlabs offers three drivers for use with these fiber-coupled LEDs: LEDD1B (see page 1703), DC2100 (see page 1703), and DC4100 (see page 1702, please note this option requires the DC4100-HUB). The LEDD1B is capable of providing LED modulation frequencies up to 5 khz, while DC2100 and DC4100 can modulate the LED at a rate up to 100 khz. In addition, the DC2100 and DC4100 drivers are capable of reading the current limit from the EEPROM chip of the connected LED and automatically adjusting the maximum current setting to protect the LED. Compatible LED Drivers DC4100 FEATURE LEDD1B DC2100 DC4100 LED Driver Current Output 1.2 A (Max) 2.0 A (Max) 1.0 A Per Channel Pinhole Wheel Modulation Frequency Using External Input (Max) 5 khz 100 khz 100 khz (Simultaneous Across all Channels) Interface Analog USB 2.0 USB 2.0 Main Driver Features Very Compact Footprint Individual Pulse Width Control Four Channels EEPROM Compatible: Reads Out LED Data for LED Settings Yes Yes LCD Display Yes Yes 1697

47 Collimated LED Light Sources (Page 1 of 2) Collimated LED Light Sources for Olympus BX and IX Microscopes Approximate Beam Diameter: 50 mm Approximate Beam Area: 1960 mm² OCT Ø30.5 mm (1.2") Stages ScienceDesk MxxxL2-C1 *Adjustable from -6 to +1 mm 33.9 mm* (1.33") 115 mm (4.53") 50 mm (1.97") Ø58.9 mm (2.32") LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters M365L2-C1 $ ,50 6, UV (365 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 700 ma M385L2-C1 $ ,50 6, UV (385 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 700 ma M405L2-C1 $ ,50 6, UV (405 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1000 ma M455L2-C1 $ ,40 4, Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma M470L2-C1 $ ,40 4, Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma M530L2-C1 $ ,40 4, Green (530 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma M590L2-C1 $ ,61 3, Amber (594 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma M617L2-C1 $ ,61 3, Red Orange (617nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma M625L2-C1 $ ,61 3, Red (625 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma M660L2-C1 $ ,85 3, Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1500 ma M735L2-C1 $ ,85 3, IR (735 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1500 ma M780L2-C1 $ ,85 3, IR (780 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1000 ma M850L2-C1 $ ,85 3, IR (850 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1000 ma M940L2-C1 $ ,85 3, IR (940 nm) Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1000 ma MCWHL2-C1 $ ,61 3, Cold White Collimated LED for Olympus BX & IX, 1600 ma Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles Collimated LED Light Sources for Leica DMI Microscopes Approximate Beam Diameter: 37 mm Approximate Beam Area: 1080 mm² T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Ø30.5 mm (1.2") 28.2 mm (1.11") MxxxL2-C2 *Adjustable from -6 to +1 mm 33.9 mm* (1.33") 115 mm (4.53") 50 mm (1.97") Ø71.0 mm (2.8") M365L2-C2 $ ,50 6, UV (365 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 700 ma M385L2-C2 $ ,50 6, UV (385 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 700 ma M405L2-C2 $ ,50 6, UV (405 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1000 ma M455L2-C2 $ ,40 4, Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma M470L2-C2 $ ,40 4, Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma M530L2-C2 $ ,40 4, Green (530 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma M590L2-C2 $ ,61 3, Amber (594 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma M617L2-C2 $ ,61 3, Red Orange (617nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma M625L2-C2 $ ,61 3, Red (625 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma M660L2-C2 $ ,85 3, Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1500 ma M735L2-C2 $ ,85 3, IR (735 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1500 ma M780L2-C2 $ ,85 3, IR (780 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1000 ma M850L2-C2 $ ,85 3, IR (850 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1000 ma M940L2-C2 $ ,85 3, IR (940 nm) Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1000 ma MCWHL2-C2 $ ,61 3, Cold White Collimated LED for Leica DMI, 1600 ma 1698

48 Collimated LED Light Sources (Page 2 of 2) Collimated LED Light Sources for Nikon Eclipse (Bayonet Mount) Microscopes Approximate Beam Diameter: 43 mm Approximate Beam Area: 1450 mm² Ø30.5 mm (1.2") OCT MxxxL2-C3 *Adjustable from -6 to +1 mm 33.9 mm* (1.33") 115 mm (4.53") 50 mm (1.97") Ø60.8 mm (2.39") Stages ScienceDesk M365L2-C3 $ ,50 6, UV (365 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 700 ma M385L2-C3 $ ,50 6, UV (385 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 700 ma M405L2-C3 $ ,50 6, UV (405 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1000 ma M455L2-C3 $ ,40 4, Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma M470L2-C3 $ ,40 4, Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma M530L2-C3 $ ,40 4, Green (530 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma M590L2-C3 $ ,61 3, Amber (594 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma M617L2-C3 $ ,61 3, Red Orange (617nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma M625L2-C3 $ ,61 3, Red (625 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma M660L2-C3 $ ,85 3, Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1500 ma M735L2-C3 $ ,85 3, IR (735 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1500 ma M780L2-C3 $ ,85 3, IR (780 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1000 ma M850L2-C3 $ ,85 3, IR (850 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1000 ma M940L2-C3 $ ,85 3, IR (940 nm) Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1000 ma MCWHL2-C3 $ ,61 3, Cold White Collimated LED for Nikon Eclipse, 1600 ma LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Collimated LED Light Sources for Zeiss Axioskop Microscopes Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Approximate Beam Diameter: 44 mm Approximate Beam Area: 1520 mm² Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Ø30.5 mm (1.2") Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel MxxxL2-C4 *Adjustable from -6 to +1 mm 33.9 mm* (1.33") 115 mm (4.53") 50 mm (1.97") Ø65.0 mm (2.56") M365L2-C4 $ ,50 6, UV (365 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 700 ma M385L2-C4 $ ,50 6, UV (385 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 700 ma M405L2-C4 $ ,50 6, UV (405 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1000 ma M455L2-C4 $ ,40 4, Royal Blue (455 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma M470L2-C4 $ ,40 4, Blue (470 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma M530L2-C4 $ ,40 4, Green (530 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma M590L2-C4 $ ,61 3, Amber (594 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma M617L2-C4 $ ,61 3, Red Orange (617nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma M625L2-C4 $ ,61 3, Red (625 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma M660L2-C4 $ ,85 3, Deep Red (660 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1500 ma M735L2-C4 $ ,85 3, IR (735 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1500 ma M780L2-C4 $ ,85 3, IR (780 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1000 ma M850L2-C4 $ ,85 3, IR (850 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1000 ma M940L2-C4 $ ,85 3, IR (940 nm) Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1000 ma MCWHL2-C4 $ ,61 3, Cold White Collimated LED for Zeiss Axioskop, 1600 ma 1699

49 OCT Stages 4-Wavelength High-Power LED Sources (Page 1 of 2) LED4C Series 4-Wavelength LED Source Features Rapid Switching and Intensity Adjustments via LED Current Settings Compatible with DC4100 Driver (See Next Page) Light Port Adapters Available for Most Commercial Microscopes ±0.1 nm Wavelength Stability, ±1.5% Power Stability Ten Available Wavelengths with 46 Available Configurations ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes Thorlabs 4-Wavelength customizable LED Source combines four user-chosen LED beams into a single collimated emission beam (see chart on next page for available combinations). Together with the DC Channel Driver presented on page 1328, the LED4C provides a versatile light source with rapid switching and modulation of individual LEDs. Compared to non-led sources, the LED4C provides a higher signal-to-noise ratio due to narrow bandwidth emission, simple operation without maintenance cycles, and no active cooling requirements. Microscope adapters are available and listed at the bottom of the next page. PMT Modules Microscope Adapters 4-Wavelength LED Source (LED4C) with Driver (DC4100) Mounted on Olympus Microscope Cuvette Holder nm FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Normalized Intensity nm 455 nm 470 nm 505 nm 530 nm 590 nm 617 nm 627 nm 660 nm Wavelength (nm) Available Wavelengths for 4-Wavelength LED Source COLOR CENTER WAVELENGTH SPECTRAL RANGE POWER LIFETIME UV 385 nm nm 10 mw >10,000 Hours UV 405 nm nm 130 mw Royal Blue 455 nm nm 40 mw Blue 470 nm nm 25 mw Cyan 505 nm nm 20 mw Green 530 nm nm 15 mw >100,000 Hours Amber 590 nm nm 25 mw Orange 617 nm nm 30 mw Red 627 nm nm 40 mw Deep Red 660 nm nm 10 mw 1700

50 4-Wavelength High-Power LED Sources (Page 2 of 2) Make-to-Order 4-Wavelength Combinations ITEM # 385 nm 405 nm 455 nm 470 nm 505 nm 530 nm 590 nm 617 nm 627 nm 660 nm LED4C01 LED4C02 LED4C03 LED4C04 LED4C05 LED4C06 LED4C07 LED4C08 LED4C09 LED4C10 LED4C11 LED4C12 LED4C13 LED4C14 LED4C15 LED4C16 LED4C17 LED4C18 LED4C19 LED4C20 LED4C21 LED4C22 LED4C23 LED4C24 LED4C25 LED4C26 LED4C27 LED4C28 LED4C29 LED4C30 LED4C31 LED4C32 LED4C33 LED4C34 LED4C35 LED4C36 LED4C37 LED4C38 LED4C39 LED4C40 LED4C41 LED4C42 LED4C43 LED4C44 LED4C45 LED4C46 Choose a Make-to-Order Combination Above LED4Cxx $ 2, , ,65 19, Color LED Head, Source* *Price includes the cost of the 4 LEDs. Not all combinations are possible. Please speak to a technical support representative for details. LED4C Series of Microscope Adapters These adapters mate the LED4C Series of 4-Wavelength, High-Power LED Sources (featured above) to the illumination port of common commercially available microscopes. OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel SM2A13 SM2A14 SM2A15 SM2A16 SM2A17 SM2A13 $ , LED4C Source Adapter, SM2 Thread to Olympus IX or BX SM2A14 $ , LED4C Source Adapter, SM2 Thread to Leica DMI SM2A15 $ , LED4C Source Adapter, SM2 Thread to Nikon Eclipse (Without Spring) SM2A16 $ , LED4C Source Adapter, SM2 Thread to Zeiss Axioscop SM2A17 $ , LED4C Source Adapter, SM2 Thread to Nikon Eclipse Ti (With Spring) 1701

51 OCT Stages 4-Channel LED Driver Features Controls Thorlabs 4-Wavelength LED4C Source or 4 Individual LEDs (Using DC4100-HUB) Ideal for Multi-Wavelength Imaging Applications Drives LED Currents up to 1 A with Modulation up to 100 khz, Sine Wave Three Modes of Operation Constant Current Brightness External Control ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks DC Channel LED Driver (Power Supply Included) Thorlabs DC4100 is designed to drive our 4-Wavelength LED Source (LED4C, see page 1700) or four individual high-power LEDs (MxxxL2 series). The LED current of each channel can be adjusted independently from 0 ma to 1000 ma or modulated simultaneously via an external voltage. The DC4100 controller is ideal for microscopy applications to drive up to four LEDs with adjustable intensity. The DC4100 has a compact housing with an easy-to-read backlit LCD display. It can operate in three modes: Constant Current Mode - the LED current is kept constant at a preset current value. This mode is ideal for general illumination applications. LED current can be individually set for each LED. Brightness Mode - Controls the LED current at a set percentage of the maximum current. This mode is optimal for multi-wavelength microscopy applications. LED current percentage can be individually set for each LED. External Control Mode - Enables control of all LED currents via a single external trigger voltage (0 to 10 V). 1 V corresponds to an LED current of 100 ma. This mode allows customers to set custom modulation settings of the LED current. All activated LEDs are simultaneously controlled, but individual LEDs can be deactivated. Back View DC4100-HUB ITEM # DC4100 Constant Current Mode LED Current Range ma LED Current Resolution 1 ma LED Current Accuracy ±10 ma LED Forward Voltage 5 V Brightness Mode LED Current Range 1 100% Pinhole Wheel LED Current Resolution LED Current Accuracy LED Forward Voltage External Control Mode Modulation Trigger Input General 0.1% (1 ma Min) ±10 ma 5 V khz, Sine Wave 0 10 V 1 V Corresponds to 100 ma Operating Temperature* 0 to +40 C Storage Temperature -40 to +70 C Dimensions (W x H x D) 160 mm x 80 mm x 168 mm Warm-Up Time for Rated Accuracy 10 Minutes 4-Wavelength LED Source (LED4C) with Driver (DC4100) Mounted on Olympus Microscope Weight <1 kg *Non-Condensing DC4100* $ 2, , ,65 19, Channel LED Driver, 1 A, 5 V DC4100-HUB $ ,00 2, Single LED Connector Hub for DC4100 *The DC4100 connects directly to the LED4C without the use of a DC4100-HUB 1702

52 High-Power LED Driver with Pulse Width Modulation Features Ideal for LED Currents up to 2 A and Voltages up to 24 V Modulation Frequency up to 100 khz, Sine Wave Three Modes of Operation Constant Current Pulse Modulation External Control USB2.0 Interface for PC Control OCT ITEM # Constant Current Mode LED Current Range DC A (1 ma Resolution) Stages DC2100 High-Power Driver (Power Supply Included) LED Current Resolution LED Current Accuracy LED Forward Voltage 1 ma ±20 ma 24 V ScienceDesk LEDs The DC2100 is ultra stable and designed for applications that are sensitive to even small high frequency brightness fluctuations. If connected to our mounted LEDs (see pages ), the DC2100 automatically reads the stored LED data from the EEPROM and adjusts the controller s settings accordingly; for example, the maximum current can be set to avoid LED damage. The DC2100 can operate in three modes: Constant Current Mode: For visual inspection, the LED current is adjustable from 0 2 A in 1 ma increments. Pulse Width Modulation Mode: Enables control for single LED pulses with adjustable LED current (0 2 A), pulse frequency (1 Hz 10 khz), duty cycle (1% - 100%), and number of pulses (1-100 or continuous pulse emission). External Control Mode: Customizable external trigger with adjustable modulation frequency up to 100 khz, input voltage from 0 V 10 V (1 V corresponds to 200 ma LED current). The DC2100 can be connected to a PC using a USB2.0 interface. The unit comes with a GUI interface and drivers. Pulse Width Modulation Mode PWM Frequency Range PWM Frequency Resolution 1 Hz 10 khz 1 Hz (for Frequencies <1 khz) 100 Hz (for Frequencies >1 khz) Duty Cycle 1 100% Duty Cycle Resolution 1% External Control Mode Modulation khz, Sine Wave Trigger Input 0 10 V 1 V Corresponds to 200 ma General Operating Temperature* 0 to 40 C Storage Temperature Range -40 to 70 C Dimensions (W x H x D) 160 mm x 80 mm x 168 mm Warm-Up Time for Rated Accuracy <10 Minutes Weight <1 kg *Non-Condensing Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes DC2100 $ 1, , ,20 14, High-Power, 1-Channel LED Driver with Pulse Modulation, 2 A, 24 V LED Controller Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Features 3 Operation Modes Constant Current Modulation Trigger Compact T-Cube Footprint (60 mm x 47 mm x 60 mm) Pulse Width and Frequency Controllable via External 0 5 V Signal Adjustable LED Current Limit LEDD1B (15 VDC Power Supply Sold Separately) The T-Cube LEDD1B driver is a variable intensity, compact LED driver designed to drive high-power LEDs with currents up to 1200 ma, such as the ones on pages SPECIFICATIONS Output Current Forward Voltage Modulation Mode Trigger Frequency* Power Supply Required ma 11 V (Min), 12 V (Typical) 0 5 khz, Sine Wave 0 1 khz 15 VDC Operating Temperature 0 to 40 C Storage Temperature -40 to 70 C Physical Size Physical Size with Baseplate 60 mm x 47 mm x 60 mm (2.36" x 1.85" x 2.36") 60 mm x 73 mm x 104 mm (2.36" x 2.87" x 4.09") *Dependent on Forward Voltage and Capacitance of Connected LED LEDD1B $ ,08 2, T-Cube LED Driver, 1200 ma Drive Current (Max) 1703

53 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters LED Source: 10 MHz to 100 MHz Modulation (Page 1 of 2) High-Power DC3100 Series Driver (Power Supply Included) LED Head (Includes LED) 3 Operation Modes Internal Modulation Mode up to 100 MHz External Trigger Mode Constant Current Mode Thorlabs DC3100 series of Modulated LED Sources are designed for applications that benefit from modulated, highbrightness LED sources. These compact LED sources include a high-current, high-power LED driver with three operation modes, an LED head with modulating electronics that are designed for high-brightness LEDs with high thermal dissipation, and the LED itself. There are four standard wavelengths available: 365 nm, 405 nm, 470 nm, and 630 nm. Other wavelengths are available upon request. The DC3100 can be remotely operated via USB2.0 by the included software package with an intuitive GUI and an extensive driver set. Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel LED Head shown with a Zeiss Axioskop Collimation Adapter (Collimation Adapter Sold Separately on the next page) SPECIFICATIONS LED Current Internal Modulation Mode Modulation Frequency 0 to 1 A MHz in 0.1 MHz Steps* Ø0.26" (Ø6.5 mm) 2.34" (59.5 mm) SM2 Thread (Ø2.035"-40) 4.02" (102.5 mm) 4.98" (126.5 mm) Modulation Depth 0 to 100% Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. Trigger Output Sine Wave External Modulation Mode Drive Voltage Modulation Modulation Frequency Mechanical LED Mounting** 0 to 10 V (1 V/100 ma) Arbitrary 0 to 100 khz (Sine Wave) Compatible with Standard Star-Shaped PCB- Packaged LEDs ITEM # CENTER PEAK I (MAX) CUTOFF FREQUENCY DC nm 700 ma 90 MHz DC nm 1000 ma 95 MHz DC nm 1000 ma 80 MHz DC nm 1000 ma 70 MHz *LED dependent **LED is delivered mounted in housing. DC $ 2, , ,00 19, Modulated LED Source with Head, 365 nm DC $ 2, , ,00 17, Modulated LED Source with Head, 405 nm DC $ 2, , ,00 17, Modulated LED Source with Head, 470 nm DC $ 2, , ,00 17, Modulated LED Source with Head, 630 nm 1704

54 Microscope Adapters for Collimation of DC3100 Series LEDs LED Head Shown with COP1-A Collimation Adapter Five collimating lens housings are offered that adapt our DC3100 series of LED mounting heads directly to the illumination ports on the Olympus IX/BX (COP1-A or COP1-B), Leica DMI (COP2-A or COP2-B), Zeiss Axioskop (COP4-A or COP4-B), Nikon Eclipse (COP3-A or COP3-B), or Nikon Eclipse Ti (COP5-A or COP5-B) microscopes. They collimate the light emitted by the LED modules. To switch between LED sources, simply unscrew the LED housing and replace it with an alternative housing. OCT COMPATIBLE MICROSCOPES OLYMPUS BX & IX MICROSCOPES LEICA DMI MICROSCOPES ZEISS AXIOSKOP MICROSCOPES NIKON ECLIPSE MICROSCOPES NIKON ECLIPSE TI MICROSCOPES* Stages ScienceDesk AR-Coating LEDs Light Sources A-Coated: nm COP1-A COP2-A COP4-A COP3-A* COP5-A* B-Coated: nm COP1-B COP2-B COP4-B COP3-B* COP5-B* *The Nikon Eclipse Ti bayonet adapter is the same as the Nikon Eclipse adapter except that it incorporates an additional spring. Whether or not you need an adapter with a spring will depend on the compatibility requirements of the light port on your Nikon microscope. Collimation Adapters, AR Coating: nm COP1-A $ ,86 1, Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX COP2-A $ ,86 1, Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI COP4-A $ ,86 1, Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop COP3-A* $ ,86 1, Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse COP5-A* $ ,87 1, Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse Ti * The Nikon Eclipse Ti bayonet adapter is the same as the Nikon Eclipse adapter except that it incorporates an additional spring. Whether or not you need an adapter with a spring will depend on the compatibility requirements of the light port on your Nikon microscope. Collimation Adapters, AR Coating: nm COP1-B $ ,35 1, Collimation Adapter for Olympus BX & IX COP2-B $ ,35 1, Collimation Adapter for Leica DMI COP4-B $ ,35 1, Collimation Adapter for Zeiss Axioskop COP3-B $ ,35 1, Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse COP5-B* $ ,19 1, Collimation Adapter for Nikon Eclipse Ti *The Nikon Eclipse Ti bayonet adapter is the same as the Nikon Eclipse adapter except that it incorporates an additional spring. Whether or not you need an adapter with a spring will depend on the compatibility requirements of the light port on your Nikon microscope. Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Thread Adapters SM1A2 $ , Adapter with External SM1 Threads and Internal SM2 Threads SM2T2 $ , SM2 (Ø2.035"-40) Coupler, External Threads Compact CCD Spectrometers 4 Models for the nm Wavelength Range Resolution: <0.5 to <2.0 nm FWHM Integration Time: 10 µs to 60 s Czerny-Turner Spectrometer High-Speed USB 2.0 Connection External Trigger Synchronization Thorlabs offers three models of CCD Spectrometers for use from the UV (200 nm) to the IR (1000 nm). They are an ideal product for educational applications or for general fiber-based systems. The unit shares features with larger, more expensive spectrometers such as the ability to be synchronized via a TTL trigger input up to 100 Hz and automatic compensation for noise created by dark current. For more details, see page

55 OCT Stages ScienceDesk 4-Channel, Fiber-Coupled Laser Source (Page 1 of 2) MCLS1 Features Four Laser Output Channels with FC/PC Connectors 24 Available Source Wavelengths from nm Independent Temperature Control Leads to High Temperature Stability Low Noise Output USB Interface Low-Profile Package LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Thorlabs 4-Channel, Fiber-Coupled, Customizable Laser Source consists of four independently controlled laser diodes, which can be chosen from the chart on the facing page. The laser source is configured to accept a wide range of fiber-pigtailed laser diodes. There are 24 different power/wavelength combinations currently available (see the next page). As new wavelength/power combinations become available, they will be posted on our website. Each laser diode is operated from an independent, high-precision, low-noise, constant-current source and temperature control unit. An intuitive LCD interface allows the user to view and set the laser current and temperature control independently for each laser. The display indicates the channel number selected, the output wavelength of the source, the operating power calculated from the laser diode monitor diode, and the actual temperature to which the laser is set. This device includes a microcontroller to fully control the laser s optical power, its temperature, and to monitor the system for fault conditions. The laser source includes a USB connection that allows remote adjustment of power, temperature, and enabling. On the rear panel, analog inputs are available to modulate the lasers with an external signal. To prevent damage, the microcontroller will disable the output if the analog input plus the internal setpoint exceeds the laser limits. SPECIFICATIONS Connections and Controls Interface Control Enable and Laser Select nm <50 mw Power On Fiber Ports Display Input Power Connection Modulation Input Connector Interlock Communications Thorlabs extensive line of patch cables and connectors includes standard and COM Connection custom lengths with FC/PC or USB Cable Included FC/APC terminations. General Specifications AC Input Input Power Fuse Ratings Fuse Type Fuse Size Dimensions (W x H x D) Single Mode and Polarization- Maintaining Fiber Weight See page 1005 View of Back Panel MCLS1 Optical Encoder with Push Button Keypad Switch Enable with LED Indication Key Switch FC / PC LCD, 16 x 2 Alphanumeric Characters IEC Connector BNC (Referenced to Chassis) 2.5 mm Mono Phono Jack Communications Port USB 2.0 USB Type B Connector 2 m USB Type A to Type B Cable (Replacement Part Number USB-A-79) VAC, Hz 35 W (Max) 250 ma IEC /III, (250 V, Slow Blow Type T ) 5 mm x 20 mm 12.6" x 2.5" x 10.6" (320 mm x 64 mm x 269 mm) 8.5 lbs (3.9 kg) Operating Temperature 15 to 35 C Storage Temperature 0 to 50 C 1706

56 4-Channel, Fiber-Coupled Laser Source (Page 2 of 2) Safety While most output sources fall within the class 3R laser rating, this system has been fully designed to meet 3B laser class requirements. There is an interlock located on the rear panel that must be shorted in order for any laser output to be enabled. This can easily be configured to be triggered by doors to disable the laser in unsafe conditions. The power switch is a keylock system to prevent accidental or unwanted use. Each source has its own enable button, allowing the user to choose the light source or sources activated, as well as a master enable, which must also be set. Each channel includes a green LED indicator to easily PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Display Power Accuracy Current Setpoint Resolution Temperature Adjust Range Temperature Setpoint Resolution Noise Rise/Fall Time Modulation Input Modulation Bandwidth ±10% 0.01 ma to C ±0.01 C <0.5% Typical (Source Dependent) <5 µs 0 5 V = 0 - Full Power 80 khz Full Depth of Modulation determine its current state. There is a 3 second delay before the lasers turns on, and the user is warned by the LED rapidly blinking. In the Box The MCLS includes a universal power supply allowing operation over 100 to 240 VAC nm <50 mw without the need for selecting the line voltage. The fuse access is conveniently located on the rear panel. This unit is supplied with a US line cord as well as a standard European line cord, the pre-configured MCLS1 with all selected lasers installed, a USB cable, and the manual. Configuring a 4-Channel Source The table below lists the 24 available output wavelengths for our 4-Channel Source. Choose any combination and add the individual source cost to the MCLS1 base unit price. Example: MCLS1 with fiber-pigtailed laser diodes providing output at 635 nm, 658 nm, 670 nm, and 705 nm costs $3, $ $ $ $ = $ 5, MINIMUM LASER ITEM # λ POWER TYPE FIBER $ RMB MCLS * 405 nm 24 mw Fabry-Perot S405-HP CALL CALL CALL CALL MCLS1-406* 406 nm 4.0 mw Fabry-Perot S405-HP CALL CALL CALL CALL MCLS1-473* 473 nm 5.5 mw Fabry-Perot S460-HP CALL CALL CALL CALL MCLS1-488* 488 nm 18 mw Fabry-Perot S460-HP CALL CALL CALL CALL MCLS nm 2.5 mw Fabry-Perot SM600 $ ,70 3, MCLS nm 10 mw Fabry-Perot SM600 $ ,20 3, MCLS nm 15 mw Fabry-Perot SM600 $ ,50 5, MCLS nm 9.5 mw Fabry-Perot SM600 $ ,22 2, MCLS nm 1.5 mw Fabry-Perot SM600 $ ,54 2, MCLS nm 10 mw Fabry-Perot SM600 $ ,20 6, MCLS nm 6 mw Fabry-Perot 780HP $ ,40 2, MCLS nm 20 mw Fabry-Perot 780HP $ ,25 4, MCLS nm 5 mw Fabry-Perot SM $ ,20 2, MCLS nm 20 mw Fabry-Perot SM $ ,50 3, MCLS nm 7.5 mw Fabry-Perot SM $ ,95 3, MCLS nm 20 mw Fabry-Perot SM $ ,90 3, MCLS nm 6 mw Fabry-Perot SM $ ,03 2, MCLS nm 6 mw Fabry-Perot 980HP $ ,60 3, MCLS nm 20 mw Fabry-Perot 980HP $ ,65 3, MCLS nm 20 mw Fabry-Perot HI1060 $ 1, ,30 8, MCLS nm 2.5 mw Fabry-Perot SMF-28e+ $ ,35 2, MCLS1-1310DFB 1310 nm 1.5 mw DFB SMF-28e+ $ ,90 6, MCLS nm 1.5 mw Fabry-Perot SMF-28e+ $ ,40 2, MCLS1-1550DFB 1550 nm 1.5 mw DFB SMF-28e+ $ ,96 7, *Due to the variation in pricing for these laser diodes, which changes frequently, please see or call for current pricing. OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Order the MCLS1 and Lasers Separately ITEM # $* * * RMB* DESCRIPTION MCLS1 $ 3, , ,00 28, Channel Laser Source, TEC Stabilized, USB, Controller Only * Price listed is for base system, excluding sources 1707

57 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel TEC-Cooled, Benchtop, Fiber-Coupled Laser Diode Sources The S3FC Series of Fiber-Coupled Laser Sources feature an integrated TEC element that is used to stabilize the temperature of a Fabry-Perot laser diode, which in turn stabilizes the output power and wavelength of the laser diode for a given drive current. The Fabry-Perot laser diode inside each unit is pigtailed to a single mode fiber that is terminated at an FC/PC bulkhead connector (wide 2.1 mm key compatible) on the front panel. Features Standard Available Wavelengths: 405, 473, and 488 nm Thermoelectric Temperature Stabilization Low Noise, Stable Output Adjustable Temperature Setpoint: 20 to 30 C Adjustable Power (0 to Full Power) The back panel includes an input that allows the laser diode drive current to be controlled via an external voltage source and a remote interlock input. All of our fiber-pigtailed lasers utilize an angled fiber ferrule at the internal laser/fiber launch point to minimize reflections back into the laser diode, thereby increasing the stability of the laser diode s output. ITEM # S3FC405 S3FC473 S3FC488 Center Wavelength 405 nm 473 nm 488 nm Wavelength Range nm nm nm Output Power (Min) >1 mw >5 mw >5 mw Specifications Power Stability 15 min: ±0.05 db, 24 hrs: ±0.1 db (After 1 hr Warm-Up at 25 ± 10 C Ambient) Display Accuracy (mw): ±10% of Actual TEC Stability*: ±0.005 C TEC Setpoint Accuracy: ±0.25 C TEC Adjustment Range: 20 to 30 C Modulation Input 0 5 V = 0 - Full Power, DC or Sine Wave Input Only Modulation Bandwidth 5 khz Full Depth of Modulation 30 khz Small Signal Modulation *Variation from the setpoint temperature for a 1 o C change in ambient temperature S3FC405 Actively Stabilized Power and Temperature Confocal Imaging at 405 nm Below are pseudo-colored 2D projection and 3D confocal fluorescent images of pollen grains taken with the CLS Imaging System. Pollen grains were excited with 405 nm light, and the emission signal was selected using a dichroic mirror with a cutoff wavelength of 505 ± 15 nm. Stacks of optically sectioned images were recombined in post-processing to recreate 3D volume images of the grains. Due to the variation in pricing for these laser diodes, which changes frequently, please see or call for current pricing. (Image Size: 150 µm x 110 µm, Z-Scan Depth: 80 µm) Benchtop Laser Sources, SM Fiber *,** S3FC405 CALL CALL CALL CALL FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 405 nm, 1 mw, Class 3B S3FC473 CALL CALL CALL CALL FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 473 nm, 5 mw, Class 3 S3FC488 CALL CALL CALL CALL FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 488 nm, 5 mw, Class 3B *Nominal wavelength, actual wavelength may vary by ±15 nm **Minimum power available at the output connector, the actual power may be greater 1708

58 Benchtop, Fiber-Coupled Laser Diode Sources S1FC635 Adjustable Power FC/PC Connector See Facing Page for 405, 473, and 488 nm Options Features Single Mode FC/PC Fiber Interface Low Noise, Highly Stable Output 635, 675, and 780 nm Output Wavelengths (See Page 1264 for Additional Wavelengths) 2.5 mw Output Power Angle-Cleaved Fiber Minimizes Back Reflections at the Laser Thorlabs Fiber-Coupled Laser Sources utilize internally pigtailed laser diodes that are connected to the front panel FC feedthrough via a single mode fiber. By providing a fiber-to-fiber connection at the output, these devices offer more optical power than systems that use a receptacle with embedded optics. All of our fiber-pigtailed lasers utilize an angled fiber ferrule at the internal laser/fiber launch point to minimize reflections back into the laser diode, thereby increasing the overall stability. ITEM # S1FC635(PM) S1FC675 S1FC780(PM) Wavelength 635 nm 675 nm 780 nm Full Output Power (Min) 2.5 mw Extinction Ratio (PM Versions) >20 db >20 db Stability 15 min: ±0.05 db, 24 hr: ±0.1 db, (After 1 hr Warm-up at 25 ± 10 C Ambient) Display Accuracy ±10% Setpoint Resolution 0.01 mw Adjustment Range ~0 mw to Full Power Operating Temperature 15 to 35 C Storage Temperature 0 to 50 C AC Input 115 VAC / 230 VAC (Switch Selectable) Hz Modulation Input 0 5 V = 0 - Full Power, DC or Sine Wave Input Only Modulation Bandwidth 5 khz Full Depth of Modulation, 30 khz Small Signal Modulation Output Fiber Connector FC/PC, Wide 2.1 mm Key Compatible Benchtop Laser Sources, SM Fiber *, ** S1FC635 $ 1, ,14 9, FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 635 nm, 2.5 mw, Class 3B S1FC675 $ 1, ,14 9, FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 675 nm, 2.5 mw, Class 3R S1FC780 $ 1, ,75 9, FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 780 nm, 2.5 mw, Class 3B *Nominal wavelength, actual wavelength may vary by ±15 nm **Minimum power available at the output connector, the actual power may be greater Benchtop Laser Sources, PM Fiber *, ** S1FC635PM $ 1, , ,20 12, FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source 635 nm, 10 mw, PM, Class 3B S1FC780PM $ 1, , ,00 12, FC/PC Fiber-Coupled Laser Source, 780 nm, 2.5 mw, PM, Class 3B *Nominal wavelength, actual wavelength may vary by ±15 nm **Minimum power available at the output connector, the actual power may be greater OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Complete Fiber Optic Cleaning Kit This kit includes everything needed to easily clean connectorized fiber without damaging the AR coating. 3 oz Can of Fiber Connector Cleaner (FCS3) Connector Cleaning Sticks (MCC25) Tub of Lint-Free Wipes (LFW90) Handheld Connector Cleaner (FCC-7020) Replacement Reel for Handheld Connector Cleaner (FCC-7021) 1709

59 OCT Stages ScienceDesk High-Power White Light Sources Thorlabs High-Power Light Sources are solid-state, plasma light sources (LIFI ) that combine the best features of solidstate electronics and full-spectrum plasma emitters. These sources incorporate a dielectric resonant cavity to efficiently couple power from a solid-state power amplifier into a highintensity discharge vessel, resulting in a light source with a long lifetime and a complete color spectrum. They are ideal for applications such as endoscopy, fluorescence microscopy, reflectance microscopy, and other medical lighting and inspection applications. Typical HPLS200 Spectrum After LLG 1.0 LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Lumen Maintenance (%) HPLS243 LIFI Plasma Light Source vs Xe Bulb Lifetime Hours of Operation LIFI Plasma Light Source 300 W Xe Bulb The lifetime of the LIFI Plasma Light Sources exceeds many Xenon and Mercury vapor arc lamp light sources, as illustrated in the plot above. Arbitrary Intensity Wavelength (nm) The output port of a HPLS200 Series Light Source features a Liquid Light Guide (LLG) mount that accepts Thorlabs Ø3 mm or Ø5 mm LLGs. The HPLS200 series design enables airflow and monitoring of the LLG tip temperature, which prevents overheating. To further protect the LLG, a hot mirror is placed just before the LLG tip. The HPLS200 s high-intensity output can be mated to the illumination port of many popular microscopes using a collimation adapter. Please contact us for details on these microscope adapters. Each light source is packaged in a compact housing that incorporates both the power supply and lamp assembly. A three-digit display, controls, and power switch are located on the front of the unit. The lamp can be enabled, and its intensity can be adjusted using the front panel. Alternatively, the lamp can be controlled via computer software using a USB connection. The rear of the unit features a connections for a USB cable, an AC power cable, and a liquid light guide. Liquid Light Guide Microscope Adapter Collimating Lens The HPLS200 Series of light sources can be integrated with popular microscopes. Please contact us for details ITEM # HPLS243 HPLS245 Spectral Range 350 to 700 nm Color Rendering Index* 94 Numerical Aperture (NA) 0.66 Lifetime >80% Power After 10,000 Hours Dimming Range % Electrical AC Line Voltage 85 VAC to 264 VAC Power Consumption 310 W Optical LLG Tip 2.5 W 6.0 W *Prior to LLG HPLS243 $ 3, , ,00 30, Solid State Plasma Light Source (Ø3 mm, 1.2 m Long LLG Included) HPLS245 $ 3, , ,00 31, Solid State Plasma Light Source (Ø5 mm, 1.2 m Long LLG Included) 1710

60 High-Intensity Halogen Lamp Light Source Intensity OSL1 Lamp Emission OCT OSL1 Includes 36" (91cm) Long Fiber Bundle with Ø1/4" Output Port Our 150 W (3200 K Color Temp) Halogen OSL1 Light Source is designed to deliver strong, cool light for microscopy and lab applications. The rugged design with thermal switch and safety cutoff features a 150 W halogen lamp with a 1000:1 variable control and is shipped complete with a lamp, bulb, 36" (91 cm) long Ø1/4" fiber bundle, and fiber adapter chuck. Versions offering either 110 V or 230 V (CE compliant) are available. To mount the fiber, we recommend using our AD8F mounting adapter, which allows easy integration of the fiber bundle into any of our SM1-compatible mounting hardware. OSL1 $ ,18 4, High-Intensity Fiber-Coupled Light Source, VAC OSL1-EC $ ,14 4, High-Intensity Fiber-Coupled Light Source, VAC, CE Approved OSL1B $ , Replacement Bulb for High-Intensity Fiber Light Source AD8F $ , Ø8 mm Smooth Bore to External SM1 (1.035" -40) Thread Liquid Light Guide LLG AD8F Features Excellent Transmission from nm (See Plot Below for Details) Outstanding White Light Illumination Suitable for Rugged Environments -5 to 35 C Long-Term Temperature Range Wavelength (nm) SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage VAC or VAC, 180 W (Max) Light Output 40,000 Foot-Candles Lamp Adjustment Range 1000:1 (0 100%) Color Temperature 3200 K with Standard EKE Lamp at Max Intensity Lamp Life ,000 Hours Operating Temperature 0 40 C Humidity Range 0 80% Non Condensing Weight (Light Source (without Fiber Bundle) 7.5 lbs (3.4 kg) Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Thorlabs Liquid Light Guides, which are available in 4', 6', and 8' lengths with either a Ø3 mm or Ø5 mm core, offer outstanding transmission from nm for white light illumination applications. They provide superior transmission of UV radiation up to 5 W and excellent transmission from the UV to the near IR range. These light guides are recommended for use with the following light sources: tungsten halogen, xenon, and metal halide. The long-term temperature range for the liquid light guides range from -5 to 35 C. % Transmission Transmission of Liquid Light Guides Ø5 mm Core, 6 m Long Ø5 mm Core, 2 m Long Wavelength (nm) Pinhole Wheel Collimated White Light LEDs OD of TIP LLG $ ,15 2, Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 4' (1.2 m) Length 5 mm LLG $ ,35 3, Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 6' (1.8 m) Length 5 mm LLG $ ,55 3, Ø3 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 8' (2.4 m)length 5 mm LLG $ ,15 3, Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 4' (1.2 m)length 7 mm LLG $ ,75 4, Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 6' (1.8 m) Length 7 mm LLG $ ,65 4, Ø5 mm Core Liquid Light Guide, 8' (2.4 m) Length 7 mm See page

61 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Octavius-2P: 10 fs Laser for 2P- microscopy requires a high-peak-power, pulsed laser source to provide high fluorescence signal intensity with minimal photodamage to the sample. The two-photon signal intensity can be increased by either increasing the average power of the femtosecond laser or by reducing the pulse length. Increasing the average power requires a high-power pump laser, which is expensive to buy and exhibits a high cost of ownership. IdestaQE, a strategic partner of Thorlabs, has designed the Octavius-2P, which offers a cost-effective alternative. Rather than building a multi-watt average output power system, we reduced the pulse width to 10 fs. The shortened pulse duration increases the peak power tenfold compared to 100 fs systems with the same average power. In addition, the reduced average power decreases the probability of photodamage. The Octavius-2P is pumped using newly developed Optically Pumped Semiconductor Laser (OPSL) technology. These next-generation pump sources allow for high compactness and low cost of ownership. The ultra-high output power of over 500 kw, compared with other commercially available 300 kw lasers, provides the ability to probe deeper into biological tissue. Additionally, the spectral bandwidth of the 10 fs laser pulse from the Octavius-2P stretches over 100 nm, which allows the user to efficiently excite multiple fluorophores simultaneously. SPECIFICATIONS Peak Power >500 kw Average Power 500 mw Pulse Width 10 fs Repetition Rate 85 MHz Power Stability 0.5% Beam Height 3.0" Laser Head Dimensions 533 mm x 394 mm x 132 mm (21.0" x 15.5" x 5.2") Power Supply Dimensions 432 mm x 279 mm x 381 mm (17.0" x 11.0" x 15.0") Chiller Dimensions 267 mm x 203 mm x 406 mm (10.5" x 8.0" x 16.0") Features Ultra-High Peak Power (>500 kw) for Deep Imaging >100 nm Wide Spectrum Allows Multiple Fluorophores to be Excited Simultaneously 10 Femtosecond Pulse Provides More Signal and Less Photodamage Small Footprint Conserves Lab Bench Space Mouse Intestine OCTAVIUS-2P Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Common Fluorophores Excited by the Octavius-2P Fura-2 Oregon Green DAPI e and w Type GFP Fluo-3 and Fluo-5F Cy2 and Cy3 Alexa Dyes CPF Mouse intestine. Photos taken with a two-photon microscope using the Octavius-2P as the laser source. The sample was labeled with Alexa 350 and Alexa 568 dyes. These two dyes have fairly-well separated excitation bands. Exciting these two dyes simultaneously with a traditional 100 fs laser source is difficult, since the bandwidth of the source is too narrow. The 10 fs Octavius-2P is able to excite both fluorophores simultaneously due to its larger bandwidth of over 100 nm. OCTAVIUS-2P CALL CALL CALL CALL 10 Femtosecond Pulsed Laser, 85 MHz Repetition Rate, >500 kw Peak Power Dispersion Compensating Mirrors These Dispersion-Compensating Mirrors correct for phase distortions that occur when ultrafast pulses travel through an optical system. The highly reflective coating for the nm range is deposited on the surface using ion-beam sputtering (IBS) technology. Advanced Coating Layer Composition Corrects for Dispersive Elements in the Beam Path Improves Image Contrast in Dispersion per Reflection: -175 fs 800 nm λ/10 Surface Flatness (@ 633 nm) Maintains Beam Quality DCMP175 See page

62 Scan Lens for Visible Imaging The LSM03-VIS scan lens has an AR coating designed for visible imaging centered around 633 nm. The lens has less than 0.25% reflectivity across a 130 nm bandwidth and a magnification of 4.6X. The M25 x 0.75 threading can be adapted to Thorlabs standard SM1 (1.035"-40) threading by using an SM1A12 adapter (see page 344). LSM03-VIS Scanning Distance (SD): The SD is the distance between the galvo mirror pivot point and the back mounting plate of the objective. The galvo mirror pivot point must be located at the back focal plane of the objective to maximize image resolution. Pupil Size (EP): The size of the EP determines the ideal 1/e 2 collimated beam diameter to maximize the resolution of the imaging system. Working Distance (WD or LWD): The distance between the tip of the scan lens housing and the front focal plane of the scan lens is defined as the WD. Depth of View (DOV): The DOV corresponds to the distance between the front focal plane and a parallel plane where the beam spot size has increased by a factor of 2. Field of View (FOV): The FOV is the maximum scan area on the sample that can be imaged with a resolution equal to or better than the stated resolution of the LSM scan lenses. Parfocal Distance (PD): The PD is the distance from the scan lens mounting plane to the front focal plane of the LSM scan lenses. Scan Angle (SA): The SA is the maximum allowed angle between the beam and the optical axis of an LSM scan lenses after being reflected off of the galvo mirror. SPECIFICATIONS Magnification 4.6X Design Wavelength 633 nm Wavelength Range nm Effective Focal Length (EFL) 39 mm Lens Working Distance (LWD) 25.1 mm Scanning Distance (SD) (Distance from Pupil Position to Mounting Plane) 29.0 mm Pupil Size (1/e 2 ) (EP) 4.0 mm Depth of View (DOV) 0.58 mm Field of View (FOV) 10.3 mm x 10.3 mm Parfocal Distance (PD) 50.7 mm Mean Spot Size (S) (1/e 2 Beam Diameter in the Field of Focus) 9.9 µm Scan Angle (SA) ±7.5º M25 x 0.75 Threading LSMO3-VIS EFL=39 LWD=25.1 Scanning Distance Objective Length Working Distance Ø34 mm Galvo Mirror Scan Lens LSM03-VIS $ ,10 7, X Visible Scan Lens, EFL=39 mm, Design Wavelength= 633 nm % Reflectance FOV 25.5 mm LSM03DC-VIS AR Coating 30 mm Parfocal Distance Wavelength (nm) OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Dispersion Compensators for LSM Scan Lenses Features Dispersion Compensation up to Second Order AR Coated for nm LSM03DC-VIS Thorlabs LSM03DC-VIS dispersion compensator is a single glass compensation block whose glass type and thickness were chosen to match the dispersion of the LSM03-VIS scan lens. SPECIFICATIONS Material Wavelength Range Diameter Clear Aperture Surface Quality H-ZLAF nm 1" (25.4 mm) 22.8 mm Scratch-Dig Wavefront Error λ/4 Diameter Tolerance +0/-0.2 mm Additional Scan Lenses for OCT See page 1782 LSM03DC-VIS $ , Dispersion Compensating Mirror for LSM03-VIS Scan Lens 1713

63 OCT Stages ScienceDesk Plan Fluorite Objectives RMS100X-PFO Correction Collar Adjustment N100X-PFO Olympus Plan Fluorite Objectives RMS60X-PFOD Thorlabs offers both Olympus and Nikon Plan Fluorite objectives. These infinity-corrected visible and NIR microscope objectives provide 4X, 10X, 20X, 40X, or 60X magnification (M). Plan Fluorite objectives are corrected at three to four colors for spherical aberration and two to four colors for chromatic aberration. They are designed to produce flat images across the field of view and are well suited for use in color laser scanning microscopy applications. With high signal-to-noise ratios, excellent resolution, and high contrast imaging, they are also useful in brightfield and Nomarski DIC observations. The correction collar on the RMS60X-PFC rotates; by rotating the collar, the distance between the objective optical elements is changed, thereby correcting for cover glass thickness. LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel ITEM # M NA WD LENGTH DESCRIPTION $ RMB RMS4X-PF 4X mm mm 4X Plan Fluorite Objective $ ,89 4, RMS10X-PF 10X mm mm 10X Plan Fluorite Objective $ ,73 7, RMS20X-PF 20X mm mm 0X Plan Fluorite Objective $ 1, ,65 8, RMS40X-PF 40X mm mm 40X Plan Fluorite Objective $ 1, ,64 10, RMS60X-PFC 60X mm mm 60X Plan Fluorite Objective w/ Correction Collar $ 3, , ,36 25, Nikon Plan Fluorite Objectives* ITEM # M NA WD DESCRIPTION $ RMB N4X-PF 4X mm 4X Plan Fluorite Objective $ ,05 3, N10X-PF 10X mm 10X Plan Fluorite Objective $ ,98 6, N20X-PF 20X mm 20X Plan Fluorite Objective $ ,32 6, N40X-PF 40X mm 40X Plan Fluorite Objective $ ,24 7, N60X-PF 40X mm 60X Plan Fluorite Objective $ 2, , ,28 17, N100X-PFO 100X mm 100X Oil Immersion Plan Fluorite Objective $ 2, , ,10 16, *Please refer to our website for complete details. Oil Immersion Objectives These objectives, which provide 40X, 60X, or 100X magnification, are designed for use in oil immersion applications. A drop of oil is placed between the objective and the cover glass in order to increase the objective's numerical aperture value to be above 1. Note that if an oil immersion objective is used without oil, the image quality will be degraded. Plan fluorite objectives are coated for both visible and NIR wavelengths. The RMS100X-O is a plan achromat design, which is coated for visible wavelengths. The RMS60-PFOD and RMS100X-FPOD objectives both feature a built-in iris diaphragm, as shown to the right, that should be partially closed during darkfield microscopy applications. For ordinary brightfield observations, the iris should be left completely open. RMS40X-PFO Iris Diaphragm Adjustment RMS60X-PFOD Microscope Immersion Oil Designed for Use with Oil Immersion Objectives Low Auto-Fluorescence for Imaging Contains 30 ml of Microscope Immersion Oil RMS100X-PFOD MOIL-30 $ , Immersion Oil, 30 ml RMS100X-PFO RMS100X-O ITEM # M NA WD LENGTH DESCRIPTION $ RMB RMS40X-PFO 40X mm mm 40X Oil Immersion Objective $ 5, , ,26 46, RMS60X-PFOD 60X mm mm 60X Oil Immersion Objective with Iris $ 3, , ,25 26, RMS100X-PFO 100X mm mm 100X Oil Immersion Objective $ 2, , ,28 21, RMS100X-PFOD 100X mm mm 100X Oil Immersion Objective with Iris $ 3, , ,08 25, RMS100X-O 100X mm mm 100X Oil Immersion Achromat Objective $ 1, ,00 8,

64 Plan Achromat Objectives RMS4X RMS10X Features Infinity-Corrected Microscope Objectives for Visible Light Air or Oil Immersion Designs Available Magnifications Ranging from 4X to 100X OCT Stages RMS20X RMS40X ScienceDesk LEDs These infinity-corrected objectives from Olympus offer ultra-wide broadband AR coatings for the visible spectral region. In addition, they have standard RMS threading for compatibility with many of the microscopy and fiber coupling accessories offered by Thorlabs. These objectives, which are ideal for imaging applications due to their diffraction-limited performance across the entire visible spectrum, provide 4X, 10X, 20X, or 40X magnification. With their high numerical apertures (NA) and large magnifications (M), they are suitable for focusing or collimating laser light. Alternatively, they can be used to focus light to a diffraction-limited spot, thus enabling efficient coupling of monochromatic or broadband light into a waveguide or fiber. Their designation as Plan Achromats indicates that they are flat field and corrected at one color for spherical aberration and two colors for chromatic aberration, leading to better spherical and chromatic corrections and superb field flatness. RMS (Ø0.800" x 36) Objective Thread Parfocal Length mm Length Working Distance (WD) Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles ITEM # M NA WD LENGTH DESCRIPTION $ RMB RMS4X 4X mm mm 4X Plan Achromat Objective $ ,52 1, RMS10X 10X mm mm 10X Plan Achromat Objective $ ,56 3, RMS20X 20X mm mm 20X Plan Achromat Objective $ ,64 3, RMS40X 40X mm mm 40X Plan Achromat Objective $ ,08 6, T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel RMS-Threaded Adapters Many of our objectives are externally RMS-threaded, as this is a popular microscopy threading. Thread adapters allow these objectives to mate to non- RMS-threaded components, making them usable in a variety of applications. Internally RMS-threaded adapters are available with external M25 x 0.75, M26 x 36TPI, M27 x 0.75, C-Mount (1.00"-32), or SM1 (1.035"-40) threads. For more adapters, see page 342. RMSA1 SM1A3 Additional Scan Lenses for OCT ITEM# $ RMB DESCRIPTION RMSA1 $ , External M25 x 0.75 to Internal RMS Adapter RMSA7 $ , External M26 x 36TPI Thread Adapter to Internal RMS Adapter RMSA3 $ , External M27 x 0.75 to Internal RMS Adapter RMSA5 $ , External C-Mount to Internal RMS Adapter SM1A3 $ , External SM1 to Internal RMS Adapter See page

65 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel NIR Scan and Tube Lens for Imaging MPM-SL The MPM-SL is a premounted scan and tube lens combination that is designed to image the scan plane of a laser scanning mirror system onto the back aperture of the objective lens. The MPM-SL was designed for the MPM200 series of multiphoton imaging systems (see pages ) and is now available as a component to support the construction of custom multiphoton or other NIR imaging systems. The scan lens has an effective focal length (EFL) of 40 mm while the tube lens has an EFL of 200 mm. Both lenses are optimized for broadband NIR imaging in the nm wavelength range. MPM-SL $ 6, , ,00 51, NIR Scan and Tube Lens for NIR Imaging ( nm) Visible Scan Lens for SPECIFICATIONS Effective Focal Length 70 mm Design Wavelength Range nm F# 17.5 Entrance Pupil Diameter 4 mm (Max) Diffraction Limited Field of View* 18 mm x nm (FN 25.5) 16 mm x nm (FN 23) F-Theta Distortion <0.05% Axial Color < nm Field Curvature* <700 FN 25; <500 FN 21 Scanning Position 59 ± 5 mm from Mounting Plate Working Distance 54 mm Mounting Thread External SM2 (2.035"-40) on Both Ends SPECIFICATIONS Effective Focal Length Scan Lens: 40 mm Tube Lens: 200 mm Back Focal Length Scan Lens: 33 mm Entrance Pupil Diameter 4 mm Diffraction Limited Field-of-View* FN12 Design Field-of-View* FN16 F-Theta FN16: FN12: <2.25% Optical Path Difference <0.25λ Across All Wavelengths *The Field Number (FN) is given in mm. The Field of View of the imaging system equals the FN divided by the magnification of the objective lens. The CLS-SL scan lens is ideal for point-by-point laser scanning imaging in the visible wavelength range. This scan lens was originally designed for Thorlabs Confocal (see pages ) and is now made CLS-SL available for customers designing their own laser scanning systems. The CLS-SL has a 70 mm effective focal length and is optimized for broadband imaging in the nm wavelength range. It can be used in combination with the ITL200 tube lens presented below. *The Field Number (FN) is given in mm. The Field of View of the imaging system equals the FN divided by the magnification of the objective lens. CLS-SL $ 2, , ,00 19, Scan Lens for LSM ( nm) Infinity-Corrected Tube Lens Image Plane SM2A20 Adapter shown with ITL200 Tube Lens ITL200 The ITL200 is an infinity-corrected tube lens with an effective focal length of 200 mm that is designed for use with Plan Fluorite Objective lenses (see page 1714). The tube lens is used in applications that do not use an eyepiece (e.g., imaging onto a CCD camera). When paired with the CLS-SL scan lens presented above, the scan plane of a laser scanning imaging system can be relayed to the back aperture of the imaging objective. The M38 x 0.5 external thread on the ITL200 can be easily converted to SM2 (2.035"-40) threading using the SM2A20 adapter, which enables the construction of an optical system consisting of a scan lens and a tube lens using Thorlabs standard SM2 lens tube components (starting on page 154). 148 mm 28 mm 22.5 mm 5 mm M38 x 0.5 Ø33 mm mm* *For Best Performance ITEM# $ RMB DESCRIPTION ITL200 $ ,50 3, Infinity-Corrected Tube Lens for Nikon Plan Fluorite Objectives SM2A20 $ , Thread Adapter with Internal M38 x 0.5 and External SM2 Threads 1716

66 Dispersion Compensating Mirror Set Features Improves Image Contrast in by Compensating for Dispersion in the Beam Path λ/10 Surface Flatness 633 nm) Maintains Beam Quality Durable, Sputtered Coatings with High Refractivity Allow for Reliable, Low-Loss Use Designed for use with P-Polarized Light and an AOI of 8 Thorlabs has teamed up with its strategic partner, IdestaQE, to provide a pair of Dispersion-Compensating Mirrors that correct for the dispersion that occurs when ultrashort pulses travel through an optical system. Since femtosecond pulses are comprised of many different wavelengths of light, pulse broadening, as a result of dispersion, will occur when the laser light passes through a dielectric medium (e.g., glass). This pulse broadening is attributed to the wavelength dependence of the refractive index of the optical components through which the light travels. Shorter wavelengths are associated with higher GD (fs) % Reflectivity Group Delay vs. Wavelength (Design) Wavelength (nm) Reflectivity vs. Wavelength Wavelength (nm) DCMP175 $ 5, , ,00 39, Dispersion-Compensating Mirror Set, 2 Pieces Imaging Using DCMP175 indices of refraction than longer wavelengths; thus, when a femtosecond pulse travels through an optical system, the shorter wavelengths will travel slower than the longer ones. The pulse dispersion caused by the wavelength-dependent nature of the refractive index can be corrected using IdestaQE s dispersion-compensating mirror pair. These mirrors are specifically designed so that longer wavelengths experience larger group velocity delay than shorter wavelengths, thereby negating the pulse broadening caused by the optical elements within the imaging system. SPECIFICATIONS a Operating Wavelength Range nm Reflectivity (Over Operating Wavelength Range) >99.5% Dispersion per Reflection (@ 800 nm) -175 fs 2 Surface Flatness (@ 633 nm) b λ/10 Substrate Dimensions (L x W x D) c 2.10" x 0.47" 0.47" (53.0 mm x 12.0 mm x 12.0 mm) a AOI = 8, P-Polarized Light b Over Any Ø10 mm Clear Aperature c Coated Surface Dimensions: 53.0 mm x 12.0 mm with 50 mm x 10 mm Usable Area OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel The two-photon images of a mouse intestine shown here demonstrate the increased imaging quality possible using the Dispersion-Compensating Mirror Set (DCMP175). Figure 1 shows a multiphoton image of a mouse intestine specimen that was taken without the Dispersion-Compensating Mirror Set, whereas Fig. 2 shows the same image acquired after adding the mirror pair to the experimental setup. In the mouse intestine specimen, goblet cell mucous is labeled with Alexa Fluor 350 (blue) and cell nuclei are labeled with SYTOX Green (green). These pseudocolored images were obtained using Thorlabs multiphoton microscope equipped with a 40X microscope objective (NA = 0.75). Two-photon excitation was provided by Figure 1. Uncompressed Pulse Figure 2. Compressed Pulse IdestaQE s Octavius-1G, a Ti:Sapphire oscillator that provides a repetition rate of 1 GHz and ultra short (<6 fs) pulses (see page 1300). The group delay dispersion (GDD) attributed to the optical elements in the microscope was roughly 4200 fs 2. These images demonstrate that the pulse compression provided by the mirror set increases the fluorescence signal, thereby providing a higher quality image of the mouse intestine. 1717

67 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes Fluorescence Imaging Filters and Sets (Page 1 of 2) Features Ø25.0 mm Excitation and Emission Filters 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm Dichroic Filters Manufactured Using Hard-Coating Ion Beam Sputtering Technology Filter Sets Include Excitation, Emission, and Dichroic Filters BFP GFP TRITC CFP FITC CY3.5 WGFP YFP TXRED SPECIFICATIONS Size Clear Aperture Thickness Tolerance Dimensional Tolerance Surface Quality Angle of Incidence Ø25 mm x 5.0 mm (Excitation) Ø25 mm x 3.5 mm (Emission) 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm x 1.05 mm (Dichroic) Ø21 mm (Excitation and Emission) 80% of Total Area (Dichroic) ±0.1 mm (Excitation/Emission) ±0.05 mm (Dichroic) ±0.1 mm Scratch-Dig 0 ± 5 (Excitation/Emission) 45 ± 1.5 (Dichroic) Thorlabs mounted Ø25.0 mm excitation and emission filters and unmounted 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm dichroic filters are designed specifically for use in fluorescence imaging applications. Nine types of filters are available to accommodate key wavelength ranges for many common fluorophores (or their alternatives): BFP, CFP, WGFP, GFP, FITC, YFP, TRITC, CY3.5, and TXRED. Close Up of Engraving Filter Design These IBS filters are manufactured to high-performance optical specifications and designed for durability. They are produced with multiple dielectric layers deposited on a high-precision glass substrate. The substrate is ground and polished to ensure that the highest possible image quality is maintained. These hard-coated optics produce filter layers that are more dense than those obtained from electron beam deposition techniques. The dense filter layers reduce water absorption and greatly enhance durability, stability, and performance of the filter. Each filter layer is monitored during growth to ensure minimal deviation from design specification thickness, ensuring overall high-quality filter performance. All filters conform to MIL-STD-810F and MIL-C-48497A environmental standards. Excitation/Emission Filters These Ø25 mm excitation and emission filters feature dielectric layers that are deposited on fused silica substrates and mounted in 5 mm (excitation) or 3.5 mm (emission) thick black anodized housings. Each excitation (or emission) filter provides excellent transmission at the desired excitation (or emission) wavelength (>90%) with a sharp spectral cutoff and low transmission at other wavelengths (<0.001%). PMT Modules Ø25.0 mm Excitation Filters Microscope Adapters ITEM # MF $ $ ,00 RMB 1, FLUOROPHORE Blue Fluorescent Protein (BFP) CENTER WAVELENGTH 390 nm FWHM 18 nm Cuvette Holder MF MF $ $ ,00 174,00 1, , Cyan Fluorescent Protein (CFP) Wild Type GFP (WGFP) 434 nm 445 nm 17 nm 45 nm FiberPorts MF MF $ $ ,00 174,00 1, , Green Fluorescent Protein (GFP) Fluorescein Isothiocyanate (FITC) 469 nm 475 nm 35 nm 35 nm Test Targets/Reticles MF MF $ $ ,00 174,00 1, , Yellow Fluorescent Protein (YFP) Tetramethylrhodamine Isothiocyanate (TRITC) 497 nm 542 nm 16 nm 20 nm T-Scopes MF $ ,00 1, Texas Red (TXRED) 559 nm 34 nm MF $ ,00 1, Cyanine (CY3.5) 565 nm 24 nm Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Ø25.0 mm Emission Filters ITEM # $ RMB FLUOROPHORE CENTER WAVELENGTH FWHM MF $ ,00 1, Blue Fluorescent Protein (BFP) 460 nm 60 nm MF $ ,00 1, Cyan Fluorescent Protein (CFP) 479 nm 40 nm MF $ ,00 1, Wild Type GFP (WGFP) 510 nm 42 nm MF $ ,00 1, Green Fluorescent Protein (GFP) 525 nm 39 nm MF $ ,00 1, Fluorescein Isothiocyanate (FITC) 530 nm 43 nm MF $ ,00 1, Yellow Fluorescent Protein (YFP) 535 nm 22 nm MF $ ,00 1, Tetramethylrhodamine Isothiocyanate/ Cyanine (TRITC/CY3.5) 620 nm 52 nm MF $ ,00 1, Texas Red (TXRED) 630 nm 69 nm 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm Dichroic Filters These dichroic filters are designed to separate light of different wavelengths. When light is incident on the filter at a 45 angle with respect to the normal, the excitation light and its associated back reflection are reflected while the longer wavelength fluorescence signal is transmitted. These filters are unmounted. If your application would benefit from a round, mounted dichroic filter with steeper cut-off, please visit our website. REFLECTION TRANSMISSION ITEM # $ RMB FLUOROPHORE BAND BAND MD416 $ ,65 1, Blue Fluorescent Protein (BFP) nm nm MD453 $ ,65 1, Cyan Fluorescent Protein (CFP) nm nm MD480 $ ,65 1, Wild Type GFP (WGFP) nm nm MD498 $ ,65 1, Green Fluorescent Protein (GFP) nm nm MD499 $ ,65 1, Fluorescein Isothiocyanate (FITC) nm nm MD515 $ ,65 1, Yellow Fluorescent Protein (YFP) nm nm MD568 $ ,65 1, Tetramethylrhodamine Isothiocyanate (TRITC) nm nm MD588 $ ,65 1, Cyanine/Texas Red (CY3.5/TXRED) nm nm 1718

68 Fluorescence Imaging Filters and Sets (Page 2 of 2) Filter Sets Since standard fluorescence imaging applications generally incorporate three different filters (i.e., one excitation, one emission, and one dichroic filter) to maximize the signal-to-noise ratio, Thorlabs offers these filters as a set at a savings over purchasing them separately. 100 MDF-BFP MF MF MD MDF-CFP MF MF MD MDF-WGFP MF MF MD480 OCT % Transmission % Transmission % Transmission Stages ScienceDesk Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors 100 MDF-GFP MF MF MD MDF-FITC MF MF MD MDF-YFP MF MF MD515 Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes % Transmission % Transmission % Transmission PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes % Transmission MDF-TRITC MF MF MD568 % Transmission MDF-CY3.5 MF MF MD588 % Transmission MDF-TXRED MF MF MD588 Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Spectral Plots Available as Downloads (See and Search on Part Number) MDF-BFP $ ,65 3, BFP Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-CFP $ ,65 3, CFP Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-WGFP $ ,65 3, WGFP Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-GFP $ ,65 3, GFP Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-FITC $ ,65 3, FITC Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-YFP $ ,65 3, YFP Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-TRITC $ ,65 3, TRITC Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-CY3.5 $ ,65 3, CY3.5 Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) MDF-TXRED $ ,65 3, TXRED Fluorescence Imaging Filter Set (3 Filters) 1719

69 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder 30 mm Cage-Compatible Fluorescence Filter Cube Features Prealigns Fluorescence Filter Sets Within 30 mm Cage Cube Easily Swap Between Filter Sets Using Additional Inserts (Sold Separately) Kinematic Design Provides Repeatable Alignment Compatible with 30 mm Cage and SM1 Lens Tube Premounted Filter Cubes Available Upon Request Thorlabs DFM Fluorescence Filter Cube is designed to hold a fluorescence filter set (dichroic mirror and excitation and emission filters) in a 30 mm cage-compatible cube for homebuilt microscopy applications. The light-tight filter cube consists of a base and top lid with an insert to hold the filter set. The base unit (DFMB) has four SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) ports and contains an M6 tap (see mechanical drawing below) that is directly compatible with our Ø1" or Ø1.5" metric posts. Alternatively, it can be used with our Ø1/2" TR series posts using one of the included 8-32 or M4 thread adapters. The top with insert (DFMT1) is designed to hold a 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm dichroic mirror and two Ø25 mm filters (excitation and emission). The dichroic mirror is clamped in place using a design that provides uniform pressure without causing deformation to the mirror. The excitation and emission filters are held using the included SM1RR Retaining Rings. The SM1-tapped hole in the top plate s emission port is oriented at a 3 angle with respect to the face of the bottom of the cube, thereby eliminating unwanted reflections. Through an innovative kinematic design, filter sets can easily be swapped without requiring realignment. Additional tops and bases can be purchased separately. To help keep track of your filter sets, spaces are provided on the top to write the specific mirror and filters that are mounted in each cube. The DFM is also available premounted with any of Thorlabs Filter Sets (see page 1718). Contact Tech Support for details. Fluorescence Filter Sets can be easily mounted in the DFM Filter Cube (Filters Sold Separately) MDFM DFM FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks DFMT1 DFMT1 Kinematically Mounts to the DFMB Base for Repeatable Alignment Pinhole Wheel DFMB 1.00" (25.4 mm) 1/4"-20 (M6 x 1.0) Tapped Hole for Post Mounting 2.00" (50.8 mm) 1.02" (26 mm) 1.00" (25.4 mm) 4-40 Tap (4 Places) for 30 mm Cage Compatibility SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads 2.00" (50.8 mm) 1.00" (25.4 mm) 2.00" (50.8 mm) ITEM # METRIC DFM DFM/M $ ,65 2, Kinematic Fluorescence Filter Cage Cube DFMB DFMB/M $ , Kinematic Fluorescence Filter Cage Cube Base DFMT1* DFMT1* $ ,65 1, Kinematic Fluorescence Filter Cage Cube Top *Includes Two SMIRR Retaining Rings 1720

70 30 mm Cage-Compatible Beam Turning Cubes Features Prealigned, Removable Right-Angle Mirror in 30 mm Cage Cube 30 mm Cage and SM1 Lens Tube Compatible Compatible with Fluorescence Filter Cube Easily Swap Between Transmission or Right-Angle Reflection Modes Includes One of Four Premounted Right-Angle Mirrors Silver-Coated (MRA25-P01, See Page 788) Gold-Coated (MRA25-M01, See Page 788) Dielectric-Coated, nm (MRA25-E02, See Page 788) Dielectric-Coated, nm (MRA25-E03, See Page 788) DFM-E02 Imaging OCT Stages 2.00" (50.8 mm) 2.00" 50.8 mm) 1.02" (26 mm) 1.00" (25.4 mm) 1.00" (25.4 mm) 1.00" (25.4 mm) 2.00" (50.8 mm) 4-40 Tap (4 Places) for 30 mm Cage Compatibility SM1 (1.035"-40) Threads 1/4"-20 (M6 x 1.0) Tapped Hole for Post Mounting Thorlabs Beam Turning Cubes provide the ability to swap between transmissive and right-angle-deflected beam paths within a 30 mm Cage System. This cube is ideal for laser steering applications. Using the same innovative kinematic design as the Fluorescence Filter Cubes described on the previous page, the Beam Turning Cube consists of a base and top with insert. The top includes a pre-mounted right-angle mirror (see selection below). Additional tops can be purchased separately. The top of each cube is engraved with a diagram of the mirror location and indicates the light path through the cube. The same base included in the Fluorescence Filter Cube presented on the previous page is provided in the Beam Turning Cube, thereby enabling exchange between right-angle mirrors/prisms and fluorescence filter sets. The Beam Turning Cube is a 2.0" (50.8 mm) light-tight square cube that contains a pre-aligned, mounted optic for easy integration into Thorlabs SM1 (1.035"-40) Lens Tube and 30 mm Cage. All four sides have an SM1-threaded port for Ø1.0" (Ø25.4 mm) optics and four 4-40 tapped holes on 30.0 mm centers for compatibility with Thorlabs cage assemblies (see page 167). The Beam Turning Cube has a bottom-located 1/4"-20 (M6) tap that is directly compatible with our Ø1" and Ø1.5" mounting posts. ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Beam Turning Cube shown with Cage Assembly Rods (See Page 176) DFM-E02 Beam Turning Cube Top with Mounted Dielectric-Coated Right-Angle Mirror Cubes with Premounted Turning Mirrors ITEM # METRIC DFM-P01 DFM/M-P01 $ ,35 2, Kinematic Beam Turning Cube with Silver-Coated Right-Angle Mirror (MRA25-P01) DFM-M01 DFM/M-M01 $ ,35 2, Kinematic Beam Turning Cube with Gold-Coated Right-Angle Mirror (MRA25-M01) DFM-E02 DFM/M-E02 $ ,90 2, Kinematic Beam Turning Cube with Dielectric-Coated Right-Angle Mirror nm (MRA25-E02) DFM-E03 DFM/M-E03 $ ,25 2, Kinematic Beam Turning Cube with Dielectric-Coated Right Angle Mirror nm (MRA25-E03) Empty Cube Base and Top ITEM # METRIC DFMB DFMB/M $ , Beam Turning Cube Base DFMT2* DFMT2* $ ,10 1, Kinematic Beam Turning Cube Top (Optic Not Included) *Imperial and metric compatible 1721

71 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes Microscope Filter Cubes Thorlabs Microscope Filter Cubes are compatible with a broad range of Olympus and Nikon fluorescence microscopes. Designed for quick mounting, aligning, and swapping of fluorescence imaging filter sets, each cube holds one Fluorescence Filter Set (see page 1718), which includes a Ø25 mm emission filter, Ø25 mm excitation filter, and 25.2 mm x 35.6 mm dichroic mirror. A retaining clip and threaded retaining rings (included) can be used to secure the dichroic mirror and excitation/emission filters, respectively, thereby removing the need for epoxy and providing simple filter interchangeability. These drop-in filter cubes are sold as empty mounts. However, if a Thorlabs Fluorescence Filter Set is purchased at the same time, we will premount the optics at no additional charge; contact Tech Support for details. Please see the compatibility table below to determine the correct filter cube for your application. Features Hassle-Free Alignment Compatible with Many Olympus and Nikon Microscopes (See Table Below) Easily Mount Fluorescence Imaging Filter Sets Pre-Mounted Filter Cubes Available Upon Request DFM-TE2000 DFM-MF2 DFM-QFXL Microscope Compatibility ITEM # MANUFACTURER MICROSCOPES DFM-MF2 Olympus AX, BX, and IX Series DFM-QFXL Nikon E200, E400, E600, E800, E1000, TS100, TS100F, TE200, TE300, ME600L, L150A, and Some Other PHOTO Scopes DFM-TE2000 Nikon TE2000, 50i, 55i, 80i, 90i, Eclipse Ti, and Epi-Fluor Illuminator Scopes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters ITEM #* $ RMB DESCRIPTION DFM-MF2 $ ,95 3, Olympus AX, BX, and IX Cube Assembly DFM-QFXL $ ,50 2, Nikon E and TE200 Cube Assembly DFM-TE2000 $ ,95 3, Nikon TE2000 Cube Assembly *Each Assembly Includes Two SMIRR Retaining Rings Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel ScienceDesk Series of WorkStations Ergonomic Workplace for Manufacturing and Scientific Research Modular Design and Accessory Line Allows for Customization of Your Work Space Welded Steel Frame for Excellent Strength and Durability Passive- and Active-Air Isolation Available (Rigid Frames Also Available) Faraday Enclosure (FAR01) Also Available to Shield from Electromagnetic/Electrostatic Interference (See Page 1694) Typical FAR01 Faraday Enclosure Setup. ScienceDesk and all other parts available separately. Microscope not supplied. Panels are held in by magnets, allowing them to be quickly removed for access inside the cage. Thorlabs ScienceDesk Series of Workstations offer high-quality, ergonomic, modular solutions to reduce vibrations common to the lab environment. They are ideally suited for vibration-sensitive microscopy applications, such as those typically found in the fields of highresolution microscopy, confocal microscopy, scanning probe microscopy, and electrophysiology. Thorlabs now also offers a Faraday enclosure system as an optional accessory in order to shield from electromagnetic interference. ScienceDesks and accessories can be configured to satisfy almost any workspace requirement. For more details, see pages

72 Ø20 mm Two-Axis, Wide-Angle Fast Steering Mirror Features 2-Axis Steering (Pitch and Yaw) > ±24.0 Optical Angular Range Compact Mirror Housing Enables Easy Design of Optical Scanning Calibrated Linear Response Fault Detection Digital Closed-Loop Feedback Control Software and Hardware Triggering Capabilities Designed for OEM Applications* Additional Data can be Found on our Website. The FSM20XY Fast Steering Mirror is a high-performance 2D steering mirror designed to be easily integrated into a custom-built system. With an optical angular scan range in excess of ±24.0 and a clear aperture of 20 mm, the mirror is ideal for a variety of applications including general-purpose beam steering, autoalignment systems, remote beam control, and image capture applications. Each mirror is calibrated so that the position of the mirror relative to the flat face of the mirror housing can be requested via a command, which can be passed using either a USB 2.0 or serial interface (typically UART based). Design The FSM20XY mirror has a protected silver coating on a polished metal substrate, which offers a reflectivity greater than 95% throughout the nm wavelength range. The mirror is supported by a frictionless flexure bearing support and is actuated using four voice coil actuators. Performance Control of the fast steering mirror is accomplished with the included digital or analog driver circuits. A digital PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) algorithm is included as standard. Custom higher order algorithms can be accommodated. From the initiation of the move command to the mirror settling on the final position, the fast steering mirror is operated by a simple PID algorithm and can steer a beam through an angle of 48 in less than 60 ms. For a smaller 10 move, the elapsed time is less than 15 ms. The mirror is capable of mrad movements in ms. For the fastest point-to-point execution times, the move or move sequence should be programmed into the 1.20" (30.5 mm) All dimensions subject to change, please see 1.20" (30.5 mm) FSM20XY Front View 4-40 Mounting Hole (4 Places) Ø0.79" (Ø20.0 mm) 1.75" (44.5 mm) FSM20XY Side View Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. 1.01" (25.7 mm) SPECIFICATIONS Angular Response* FSM20XY Mirror Head and Drive Electronics 50 ms (24 ) 10 ms (0.5 ) 3 ms (1 mrad) Mechanical Scan Angle (Max) ±12.0 x ±12.0 Clear Aperture Mirror Flatness (@ 632 nm) 20 mm nm Wavelength Range** 450 nm 20 µm Damage Threshold >10 W/cm 2 Pointing Accuracy Repeatability 0.05 mrad <0.05 mrad Communication Modes UART, RS232, or USB 2.0 Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 C Housing Dimensions (W x H x D) 1.20" x 1.20" x 1.75" (30.5 mm x 30.5 mm x 44.5 mm) * Measured performance using a PID control algorithm. Non-traditional algorithms offering even faster response times are in development. **Protected Silver Coating (See page 772 for coating performance details) FIFO queue on the control circuit. In addition, the trajectory profile and settling band can be custom tailored to meet the needs of a specific application or sequence of moves. The position of the mirror is optically encoded using a position sensor that provides feedback to the digital control circuit. As a result, the mirror can be positioned with an accuracy of 0.05 mrad and be repeatedly returned to the same position with an accuracy better than 0.05 mrad. Since the mirror steers the beam in both the X and Y directions, the pincushion distortion will be minimized and symmetric. XY steering mirrors are also easy to incorporate into 2D scanning imaging systems since the mirror can be positioned at the back pupil plane of the scan lens. Integration The compact mirror housing includes four threaded holes for mounting. The included control card is built on a printed circuit board, which can be easily integrated into a customized interface box. The digital PID circuit needs an external power supply that can provide +15 VDC at 1 A, -15 VDC at 1 A, and +7 VDC at 0.4 A. A complete pin diagram with input and output levels for the full digital system or mirror movement subsystem is detailed in the manual found online at. Imaging OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel FSM20XY $ 5, , ,00 43, Axis Fast Steering Mirror with Control Card 1723

73 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel OEM Fast Steering Mirrors OEM Mirror Designs Ø75 mm Compact 20 mm x 30 mm Elliptical Mirror Design Thorlabs utilizes a combination of in-house optical design and coating capabilities with external specialty coating houses to cover a wide range of mirror reflectivity requirements. Finite Element Analysis of the mirror is performed to ensure flatness during static holding and fast dynamic operation. Optical testing equipment ensures that all mirrors meet your flatness and surface quality requirements and specifications. Ø75 mm High-Performance Flatness Testing of Coated Mirror Actuator Design Different mirror shapes, sizes, and deflection ranges require different electromagnetic actuator designs for optimal performance. Thorlabs performs extensive design and modeling of the electro-magnetic actuators to maximize efficiency for low-power consumption and fast dynamic performance for demanding applications. Below are some examples of actuators designed for various mirrors and motion control systems. Electromagnetic Finite Element Analysis (FEA) simulation capability at Thorlabs allows rapid development and optimization of new designs. Magnetic Simulation Different Actuator Designs 20 mm Round FEA Simulation of Mirror Under Load Custom Designed Steering Mirrors for Specialized or OEM Applications Wide Range of Options Scan Angle Mirror Size, Shape, and Reflective Coating Accuracy and Resolution* Power Consumption Expertly Designed and Optimized with the Aid of Computer Simulation Software Digital Motion Control Loop and Trajectory Generator for Improved Performance and Flexibility in Control Variety of Feedback and Feedforward Control Options Precise Point-to-Point Aiming Smooth Trajectory Tracking Realtime Disturbance Rejection Using Internal or External Sensors There is a wide range of applications for Fast Steering Mirrors (FSM) where an existing off-the-shelf mirror may not satisfy all of your needs. Thorlabs offers custom FSM design and manufacturing services to modify an existing FSM design or to create a new one. Our expert engineers in electro-magnetic and optomechanical engineering design Fast Steering Mirror systems by adjusting key design parameters to optimize performance for accuracy, repeatability, settling time, jitter, power consumption, heat dissipation, and stray light rejection. Options for absolute mirror angle calibration and either analog or digital position commands simplify system integration. Thorlabs can perform lifetime testing, vibration testing, and performance testing under various environmental conditions to qualify our mirrors for your application. Contact us to discuss your steering mirror requirements. For a sample custom design, please see the next page. Controller Design and Performance Testing Thorlabs Fast Steering Mirrors can execute rapid point-to-point motions or follow precise continuous curves and trajectories. The motion control hardware and algorithms are all designed in house and can be tailored to different applications. Position (degrees optical) Example Motion Control Architecture Trajectory Generator + - *Targeting to 1 in 100,000 of max scan angle using PSD technology is possible. Even better results can be achieved using MIMO technology co-developments Time (ms) An External Trigger Signal Initiates Tracking of a Precise Trajectory Feedforward Controller Feedback Controller Position (degrees optical) FSM Hardware Time (ms) Zoom in Shows Accurate Tracking and Low Jitter of 100 Triggered Repetitions 1724

74 Custom and OEM Fast Steering Mirrors: Sample Custom Design Fast Steering Mirror and Controller Features Ø3" Clear Aperture ±12 Optical Angular Range 2-Axis Steering (Pitch and Yaw) 30 ms Position Response (5 mrad) Flexure Bearing Mirror Suspension Closed-Loop PSD Feedback USB 2.0 Interface OCT Stages Thorlabs Fast Steering Mirror with controller provides a closed-loop solution for single- and dual-axis optical beam scanning applications. Its design incorporates four voice coils into a flexure bearing supported mirror for fast and stable positioning. It also contains an internal position sensitive photodetector (PSD) to provide accurate and repeatable positioning of the mirror. The mirror can be purchased with a controller that allows the user to adjust the mirror position either using the front panel keypad or remotely via a USB 2.0 interface. The front panel keypad features an Enable/Disable control with LED indicator, adjustment control of the X and Y mirror coordinates, and selection between local/remote operation. An internal closed-loop feedback is built into the controller to provide precise and repeatable position sensing with reference to the default zero position. Additional Options Thorlabs can offer custom fast steering mirrors for a variety of applications. See the previous page for general information on our capabilities. Applications Laser Beam Stabilization Image Stabilization Laser Tracking Laser Pointing When used with our PDQ Series of Quadrant Detectors, the mirror can quickly auto-align and lock to the center of the detector for high-speed laser beam control and stabilization. For additional details or to place an order, please contact Thorlabs technical support; contact details are on the back cover. Sample Mechanical Drawing 0.4" (10 mm) Top View 3.8" (95 mm) Front View Ø3.0" (Ø76 mm) 0.5" (12 mm) 2.0" (51 mm) 0.1" (4 mm) 1.4" (36 mm) 2.2" (56 mm) Side View 0.4" (9 mm) ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Optical Tweezer Kit Manipulation of Micron-Sized Particles Tweezing Force Resolutions of ~0.05 pn Modular Design Facilitates Simple Upgrades and Modifications Thorlabs OTKB Optical Tweezer Kit offers a complete set of components for constructing an optical tweezer system. The system s modularity makes it ideal for user alterations to accommodate a variety of teaching and research applications. For more details, see pages

75 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Galvanometer Mirror System Packages for Imaging (Page 1 of 2) GVSM001 GVSM and 2-Axis Galvanometer-Driven Mirror System Packages [Includes Drive Electronics, Power Supply, Mount, and Cables (Not Shown Above)] Features Complete 1D and 2D Scanning 5 mm Galvo Mirror Packages Includes GVS001/GVS002 Galvo System + Power Supply, Mirror Heatsink, and Driver Card Cover Optically Encoded Mirror Position 99.9% Motor and Position Sensor Linearity Advanced Analog Control Circuit (Servo Driver) with Current Damping and Error Limit The GVSM001 and GVSM002 Galvo Mirror System Packages are complete 1D and 2D scanning mirror systems, respectively. The closed-loop systems are ideal for raster and vector scanning applications as well as some step-and-hold applications. Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Specifications Max Beam Diameter: 5 mm (0.2") Mirror Separation: 10 mm (2D System) Full Scan Range (Mechanical): ±12.5 Full Scan Bandwidth: 350 Hz (Max) Small-Angle Scan Bandwidth: 1 khz (Max) Position Resolution: (15 µrad) Mirror: Protected Silver Coating ( nm) Mirror Flatness: λ/4 Galvo Mirror System Performance The mirrors on both the GVSM001 and GVSM002 can be driven to scan their full mechanical range of ±12.5 (±25 optical scan range) at a frequency of 100 Hz when using a square wave control input voltage and at a frequency of 350 Hz when using a sine wave control input voltage. When a mirror is continuously scanned over a small angular range (0.2 ) the maximum scan frequency is 1 khz. For a single smallangle step, it takes the mirror 300 µs to come to rest at the command position. The angular resolution of the system is (15 µrad). Galvo Motor/Mirror Assembly 1-Axis Galvo Mirror with Servo Driver (Included) Closed-Loop Mirror Positioning The angular orientation (position) of the mirror is optically encoded using an array of photocells and a light source, both of which are integrated into the interior of the galvanometer housing. Each mirror orientation corresponds to a unique ratio of signals from the photodiodes, which allows for the closedloop operation of the galvo mirror system. The galvo consists of a galvanometer-based scanning motor with an optical mirror mounted on the shaft and a detector that provides positional feedback to the control board. The moving magnet design for the GVS series of galvanometer motors was chosen over a stationary magnet and rotating coil design in order to provide the fastest response times and the highest system resonant frequency. The position of the mirror is encoded using an optical sensing system located inside of the motor housing. Due to the large angular acceleration of the rotation shaft, the size, shape and inertia of the mirrors become significant factors in the design of high performance galvo systems. Furthermore, the mirror must remain rigid (flat) even when subjected to large accelerations. All these factors have been precisely balanced in our galvo systems in order to match the characteristics of the galvo motor and maximize performance of the system. 2-Axis (X and Y) Galvo Mirror Pair 2D Scanning Galvo System Power Supply for Two Servo Controllers X-Axis Servo Controller Y-Axis Servo Controller 115 VAC or 230 VAC X-Axis Mirror Voltage Input ±10 V X-Axis Mirror Output Monitoring Signals Y-Axis Mirror Voltage Input ±10 V Y-Axis Mirror Output Monitoring Signal 1726

76 Galvanometer Mirror System Packages for Imaging (Page 2 of 2) GVSM001 MIRROR SPECIFICATIONS Maximum Beam Diameter Wavelength Range 5 mm nm Damage Threshold 100 W/cm 2 Motor and Position Sensor Linearity 99.9% Scale Drift (Max) Zero Drift (Max) Repeatability Typical Resolution Average Current 40 ppm/ C 10 µrad/ C 15 µrad (15 µrad) 1 A System Operation As shown in the schematic on the previous page, the servo driver must be connected to a DC power supply, the galvo motor, and an input voltage source (the monitoring connection is optional). For continuous scanning applications, a function generator with a square or sine wave output is sufficient for scanning the galvo mirror over its entire range. For more complex scanning patterns, a programmable voltage source should be used. The ratio between the input voltage and mirror position is switchable and can be 0.5, 0.8, or 1. For the GVSM001 and GVSM002 systems, when set to 0.8, the ±10 V input will rotate the mirror over its full range of ±12.5. The control circuit also provides monitoring outputs that allow the user to track the position of the mirror. In addition, voltages proportional to the drive current being supplied to the motor and the difference between the command position and the actual position of the mirror (see the manual online at for pin out information) are supplied by the control circuit. DRIVE ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS Full Scale Bandwidth Small-Angle (±0.2 ) Bandwidth 100 Hz Square Wave, 350 Hz Sine Wave 1 khz Small-Angle Step Response 300 µs Power Supply Analog Signal Input Resistance ±15 to ±18 VDC (1.25 A rms, 5 A peak Max) 20 kω ± 1% (Differential Input) OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Peak Current 5 A Position Signal Output Resistance 1 kω ± 1% Cuvette Holder Coil Resistance 2.2 Ω ± 10% Coil Inductance 150 µh ± 10% Rotor Inertia 0.02 g.cm 2 Maximum Scan Angle (Mechanical Angle) ±12.5 Motor Weight 50 g Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 C Optical Position Sensor Output Range µa Analog Position Signal Input Range Mechanical Position Signal Input Scale Factor Mechanical Position Signal Output Scale Factor ±10 V 0.5 V/degree, 0.8 V/degree, 1.0 V/degree (Switchable) 0.5 V/degree Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 C Servo Board Size (L x W x H) 3.3" x 2.9" x 1.7" (85 mm x 74 mm x 44 mm) FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Other Galvo Available (Please See Page 364) ITEM # METRIC GVSM001 GVSM001/M $ 1, , ,37 11, D Galvo Mirror System Package GVSM002 GVSM002/M $ 2, , ,27 19, D Galvo Mirror System Package Large Beam Diameter Galvo Mirrors and Accessories GVS012 Single- and Dual-Axis for <Ø10 mm Beams Post, Cage, and Stage Mounting Accessories Small Beam and Large Beam Galvo Power Supplies For more details, see page

77 OCT Stages ScienceDesk Photomultiplier Modules (Page 1 of 2) PMTSS2 (Lens Tube and Fiber Collimator Sold Separately) Features Ideal for Compatible with Thorlabs Essentials Kits (See Page 1684 for Details) PMT Modules Expandable to up to 8 Channels Included with Two-Channel Module Two Multi-Alkali PMTs Removable Fluorescence Filter Cube SM1-Threaded PMT Mount for Housing the Filter Block Stand-Alone Multi-Alkali PMT Also Available Broadband Spectral Response: nm LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Thorlabs Photomultiplier Tube (PMT) Modules are designed for easy integration of PMT detection into imaging systems such as our Essentials Kit (see page 1684). The PMTSS2 Two- Channel PMT Module consists of two multi-alkali standardsensitivity PMTs, a DFMT1 filter cube insert (see page 1721 for more details), and a base. The two multi-alkali PMTs incorporated into this module offer high detection efficiency with broad spectral response from nm. The base of the module is equipped with a DMFT filter cube block and slots for attachment to an imperial or metric optical table or breadboard. The input port of the filter block features SM1 (1.035"-40) threading, which is directly compatible with a wide array of Thorlabs SM1 lens tubes and fiber collimation adapters. The PMTs are prealigned for use with the included filter cube insert, which enables easy exchange of dichroic mirror/emission filter sets. With the purchase of additional single-channel add-on modules (PMTSS2-SCM), the two-channel PMT modules can be expanded to as many as 8 detection channels. These PMT Modules are featured in our Confocal describe on pages " (147.1 mm) SPECIFICATIONS Optical Detector Type Multi-alkali Spectral Response nm Peak λ Sensitivity 450 nm Radiant Sensitivity * 105 ma/w Dark Current (Analog Mode) 2.0 na (Typical); 10 na (Max) Rise Time ** 1.4 ns Gain 10 7 Active Area (W x H) 3.7 mm x 13 mm Electrical Output Signal Current 10 µa (Max) Input Voltage ±15 V Output Impedance Variable Gain Control Input Voltage V General Storage Temperature -20 to 50 C Operating Temperature 15 to 40 C * Radiant Sensitivity 450 nm ** Rise Time measured at maximum gain setting 5.54" (140.8 mm) DFMT1 Filter Cube 2.26" (57.3 mm) Module Base PMT PMT SM1 (1.035"-40) Internal Thread 5.54" (140.8 mm) 1.14" (29.0 mm) 7.35" (186.6 mm) PMTSS2 PMTSS2-SCM Single-Channel Add-On Module Module Base SM1 (1.035"-40) Internal Thread PMTSS 1728

78 Photomultiplier Modules (Page 2 of 2) PMTSS Power and Gain Control Voltage Input BNC Output For those interested in purchasing the PMTs alone, we offer the PMTSS, which is the multi-alkali PMT detector without the filter block and base. The detectors have a C-mount internal thread that enables direct compatibility with common microscope camera ports. The PMT detectors include a power cable for wiring to a usersupplied ±15 V power supply and V variable gain control. Detector data output is supplied via BNC connector. Combining a PMTSS2 Two-Channel Module with an additional PMTSS2-SCM Single-Channel Module, enables three-channel detection, as shown to the right. The included filter blocks enable easy insertion and exchange of fluorescence filter sets. 4.45" (113.1 mm) 5.14" (130.6 mm) Internal C Mount Thread 0.346"* (8.8 mm) Detector Element PMTSS 1.52" (38.7 mm) 0.63" (15.9 mm) 1.25" (31.8 mm) 2.50" (63.5 mm) *Distance from the Front of the PMTSS to the Detector Element Coupling of optical signal is possible through the addition of SM1 Lens Tube and Fiber Collimation System. Imaging OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder PMTSS2 $ 6, , ,50 49, Two-Channel PMT Module, Standard Sensitivity PMTSS2-SCM $ 3, , ,00 25, Single-Channel Add-On Module, Standard Sensitivity PMTSS $ 2, , ,00 18, Multi-Alkali PMT Detector FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Confocal Compact, Modular Design Adaptable for Upright, Inverted, and Thorlabs T-Scope Microscopes Two- and Four-Channel Options Optimized for UV, Visible Fluorescence, or Reflectance Modes High-Speed Scanning: 30 Frames per Second (at 512 x 512 Pixel Resolution) CLS-FS Confocal System Shown Mounted on a TSCOPE Microscope with MLS203 Stage Pinhole Wheel For more details, see pages

79 OCT Microscope Adapters with External SM2 Series Threads These adapters convert the unique mating mechanism on the lightport of Olympus BX and IX, Leica DMI, Nikon Eclipse, Nikon Eclipse TI, or Zeiss Axioskop microscopes to external SM2 (Ø2.035"-40) threading. With one of these adapters, an LED4C 4-wavelength High-Power LED Source (see page 1326) can be mounted to the microscope lightport. In addition, the SM2 thread allows most Thorlabs optomechanics and optics to be easily integrated as well as other industry-standard components through our extensive line of adapters (see page 342). SM2A17 Close-up of Spring Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder OLYMPUS BX & IX ITEM # LEICA DMI ITEM # ZEISS AXIOSKOP ITEM # NIKON ECLIPSE ITEM # NIKON ECLIPSE TI ITEM # SM2A13 SM2A14 SM2A16 SM2A15 SM2A17* SM2A13 $ , External SM2 Thread to Olympus BX and IX Microscope Adapter SM2A14 $ , External SM2 Thread to Leica DMI Microscope Adapter SM2A16 $ , External SM2 Thread to Zeiss Axioskop Microscope Adapter SM2A15 $ , External SM2 Thread to Nikon Eclipse Microscope Adapter SM2A17* $ , External SM2 Thread to Nikon Eclipse Ti Microscope Adapter *These Nikon Eclipse Ti bayonet adapters are the same as the Nikon Eclipse adapters except that they incorporate an additional spring. Whether or not you need an adapter with a spring will depend on the compatibility requirements of the light port on your Nikon microscope. Rotating Lens Turret FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel SM1 (1.035"-40) Internal Thread Features 4 RMS-Threaded Microscope Objective Ports SM1 Lens Tube Interfaces Provided Bi-Directional Repeatability: ±2.5 mm Detent Mechanism Ensures Location Repeatability Aluminum and Brass Construction with Hardened Steel Inserts OT1 Lens Turret RMS (0.800"-36) Internal Thread 4 Ports This lens turret holds up to four standard microscope objective lenses and is designed to be used with our SM1 lens tubes and 30 or 60 mm cage systems. It allows easy magnification changes without adjusting the optical setup. A detent mechanism ensures any given lens returns to the same location with high accuracy (Bi-directional repeatability: ±2.5 µm). Increasing Compatibility The SM05RMS adapter allows the RMS (Royal Society) fittings on the front side of the OT1 objective lens turret to be converted into SM05 threading, enabling the OT1 to be used with a host of products, such as our aspheric lenses. SM05 (0.535"-40) Internal Thread RMS (0.800"-36) External Thread OT1 $ ,95 2, Objective Lens Turret for Four RMS-Threaded Objectives SM05RMS $ , SM05-to-RMS Adapter 1730

80 Microscope Adapters with Internal SM Series Threads Features Integrate SM1, SM2, and 30 mm Cage System Products with Microscopes Adapters for the Following Microscopes: Olympus IX and BX Microscopes Nikon Eclipse and Eclipse Ti Mount Microscopes Leica DMI Microscopes Zeiss Axioskop Microscopes These adapters allow Olympus BX and IX, Leica DMI, Nikon Eclipse, Nikon Eclipse Ti, or Zeiss Axioskop microscopes to be mounted with SM Series lens tubes and integrated with our cage assemblies. The adapters mate to the reflected light lamphouse port of current generation microscope models. Any existing lamphouse needs to be removed from the microscope prior to using the adapter. OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs COMPATABILITY Internal SM1 (1.035" -40) Thread and 30 mm Cage OLYMPUS BX & IX ITEM # LEICA DMI ITEM # ZEISS AXIOSKOP ITEM # NIKON ECLIPSE ITEM # NIKON ECLIPSE TI ITEM # SM1A14 SM1A21 SM1A23 SM1A22 SM1A26* Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes COMPATABILITY Internal SM2 (2.035" -40) Thread OLYMPUS BX & IX ITEM # LEICA DMI ITEM # ZEISS AXIOSKOP ITEM # NIKON ECLIPSE ITEM # NIKON ECLIPSE TI ITEM # SM2A7 SM2A8 SM2A10 SM2A9 SM2A18* Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Adapters with Internal SM1 Threads, 30 mm Cage System Compatible SM1A14 $ , Olympus BX and IX to Internal SM1 Thread, 30 mm Cage System Adapter SM1A21 $ , Leica DMI to Internal SM1 Thread, 30 mm Cage System Adapter SM1A23 $ , Zeiss Axioskop to Internal SM1 Thread, 30 mm Cage System Adapter SM1A22 $ , Nikon Eclipse to Internal SM1 Thread, 30 mm Cage System Adapter SM1A26* $ , Nikon Eclipse Ti to Internal SM1 Thread, 30 mm Cage System Adapter *These Nikon Eclipse Ti bayonet adapters are the same as the Nikon Eclipse adapters except that they incorporate an additional spring. Whether or not you need an adapter with a spring will depend on the compatibility requirements of the light port on your Nikon microscope. Adapters with Internal SM2 Threads SM2A7 $ , Olympus BX and IX to Internal SM2 Thread Adapter SM2A8 $ , Leica DMI to Internal SM2 Thread Adapter SM2A10 $ , Zeiss Axioskop to Internal SM2 Thread Adapter SM2A9 $ , Nikon Eclipse to Internal SM2 Thread Adapter SM2A18* $ , Nikon Eclipse Ti to Internal SM2 Thread Adapter *These Nikon Eclipse Ti bayonet adapters are the same as the Nikon Eclipse adapters except that they incorporate an additional spring. Whether or not you need an adapter with a spring will depend on the compatibility requirements of the light port on your Nikon microscope. 1731

81 OCT Stages Cuvette Holder with Four Light Ports (Page 1 of 3) Features Compatible with Standard Micro and Macro Cuvettes Four Light Ports for Fiber and Free Space Applications One Filter Holder for Mounted Ø1" Filters Included Interchangeable SMA Collimator Included Z-Dimension Beam Height: 8.5 mm SM1 (1.035"-40) and 30 mm Cage Compatible Post Mountable via 1/4"-20 (M6) Tap CVH100 Filter Holder, SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter and SM1 End Caps Included ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules The CVH100 Cuvette Holder, which includes a Fiber Adapter with an N-BK7 lens and one CVH100-FH Filter Holder, offers a compact means for performing spectroscopic measurements. Designed to accommodate standard micro and macro cuvettes, the holder can be used in fiber or free-space applications. It features four SM1-compatible (1.035"-40) light ports, thereby offering two perpendicular light paths for transmission and fluorescence measurements. Both optical axes and the axis for the post mount have a common crossing intersection point (see illustrations below), which allow the user to rotate the holder while maintaining alignment to the optical axes in free-space applications. When purchasing small volume or window cuvettes, a 'Z' dimension is often specified. This 'Z' dimension is the length from the bottom of the cuvette to the center of the sample chamber window on the cuvette. The CVH100 is designed such that the beam height is 8.5 mm from the bottom of the cuvette (see illustration below). Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder Beam Paths through the Cuvette Holder Z Dimension FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Sample Window Side view cross section showing the position of the mechanical axes (red) and an optical axis (blue). Z 8.5 mm Small Volume/Window Cuvette CVH100 Shown with Filter Holder, Fiber Adapter, and Cuvette Ports of the Cuvette Holder Top view cross section showing ray trace of beam through system and possible signals for spectroscopic measurements. Input light port with 9 mm x 14 mm slotted hole Output light port with Ø12 mm round hole Ports of the 2 nd optical axis with Ø9 mm round hole 1732

82 Cuvette Holder with Four Light Ports (Page 2 of 3) Fiber Adapter The holder is shipped with a collimating SMA-to-SM1 fiber adapter, allowing the cuvette holder to be directly connected to fiber-based light sources, detectors, or spectrometers. An uncoated N-BK7 collimating optic is included. Two SM1 end caps are also included so that unused ports can be covered to prevent dust from entering the optomechanical assembly. SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter with Lens Mount The CVH100-COL SMA-to-SM1 fiber adapter with lens mount allows the user to mount an unmounted Ø1/2" collimating lens and insert it into the beam path. Use this option to optimize the fiber coupling for specific setups (e.g., for use with large-core-diameter multimode fibers or if a coated lens is required). The CVH100-COL ships with 2 spacer rings (6.8 mm and 9.6 mm thick) and a retaining ring. The fiber adapter accompanying the CVH100 includes an N-BK7 glass lens, which transmits from nm. When ordering the CVH100-COL, additional lenses must be purchased. Recommended 20 mm focal length lenses, and the appropriate spacer to be used, are given in the table above. Please note that plano-convex lenses should be mounted with the plano side facing the fiber. Recommended Lenses with f = 20 mm* TRANSMITTED LENS ITEM # MATERIAL WAVELENGTHS SPACER PAGE LA1074 N-BK7 350 nm µm 6.8 mm 668 LA4647 UV Fused Silica 185 nm µm 6.8 mm 636 LA5315 CaF nm µm 6.8 mm 672 LA0506-E BaF µm 9.6 mm 672 LA8126-E Si 3-5 µm 9.6 mm 673 LA7733-F ZnSe 8-12 µm 9.6 mm 674 LA9015-F Ge 8-12 µm 9.6 mm 674 *Sold Separately CVH100-COL Optional SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter with Lens Mount for Collimation (Includes two Spacers and a Retaining Ring) Cross-Sectional View (Lens Not Included) OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules ITEM # CVH100 CVH100/M Outer Cuvette Dimensions 0.49" x 0.49" x 1.77" 12.5 mm x 12.5 mm x 45 mm Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder Cuvette Types Cuvette Z Dimension (Optical Axis Height Above Cuvette Base) Macro and Micro Cuvettes with 0.39" (10 mm) Light Path 0.33" 8.5 mm FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles Window Sizes Input (Main Optical Axis) 0.35" x 0.55" 9 mm x 14 mm Output (Main Optical Axis) Ø0.47" Ø12 mm Side Ports (Secondary Optical Axis) Ø0.35" Ø9 mm Optical T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel In-Line Filter Holder* Mounted Ø1" (25.4 mm) Filters Filter Thickness (Max) 0.28" 7 mm Fiber Port Collimator Lens SMA (removable) Uncoated N-BK7 Glass Mounting Main Optical Axis Secondary Optical Axis (90 to Main Axis) Sunk SM1 Internal Thread (Optimized for Lens Tubes) 30 mm Cage System SM1 (Ø1.035"-40) Internal Thread 30 mm Cage System Post Mounting Tap 1/4"-20 M6 General Material (Main Body / Collimator) Weight Aluminum Black Anodized / Stainless Steel 280 g Dimensions w/o Collimator (W x H x D)** 1.73" x 1.65" x 1.93" 44 mm x 42 mm x 49 mm Dimensions w/ Collimator (W x H x D)** 1.73" x 1.65" x 2.36" 44 mm x 42 mm x 60 mm * Filters sold separately ** Height with filter holder: 1.97" (50 mm) Pricing and Ordering Information Presented on Next Page 1733

83 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Cuvette Holder with Four Light Ports (Page 3 of 3) Filter Holder The CVH100 cuvette holder includes one filter holder designed to house Ø1" mounted filters measuring up to 7 mm in thickness. These filters are typically used to achieve wavelength isolation for incident or emitted radiation. This filter holder is located between the cuvette and one of the ports. Additional CVH100-FH filter holders can be purchased separately. Mounting All four access ports on the cuvette holder are equipped with four 4-40 taps for compatibility with our 30 mm cage systems and a single bore that has internal SM1 (1.035"-40) threading for direct mounting to our lens tubes or other SM1-compatible products such as our OSL1 white light source or our mounted high-power LEDs (MxxxL2 series, see pages ). The cuvette holder can be post mounted using the 1/4"-20 (M6) mounting hole on the bottom of the cuvette holder. The black anodized aluminum coating protects the mount from corrosion in typical lab environments. CVH100-FH Ø1" Mounted Filter Holder Post, Cage, and Lens Tube Mounting Options Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters CVH100 $ ,30 3, Cuvette Holder for Micro and Macro Cuvettes w/ Fiber Port CVH100/M $ ,30 3, Cuvette Holder for Micro and Macro Cuvettes w/ Fiber Port, Metric CVH100-COL $ , SMA-to-SM1 Fiber Adapter w/ø1/2" Lens Mount CVH100-FH $ , Additional Ø1" Mounted Filter Holder Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Optical Spectrum Analyzers Resolve Spectral Characteristics in the nm or nm Range Resolution: nm; nm Wavelength Accuracy: <1 pm The Spectrum of a 1550 nm laser diode. OSA201, OSA203 Thorlabs new line of Optical Spectrum Analyzers (OSAs), which are based on a Fourier Transform Spectrometer design, provide a fiberbased solution to quickly and easily resolve wavelength and spectral characteristics in the visible or near-infrared spectral regions. Advantages of this design include high optical throughput, wide wavelength range, and high spectral resolution. The peak and total optical power of the 1550 nm laser diode. See pages

84 Achromatic FiberPort Collimators Features Ideal for Applications Achromatic Lens for Minimal Chromatic Focal Shift Collimate Broad Band Light AR-Coated Lenses Optimized for Three Wavelengths -A: 486.1, 587.6, and nm -B: 706.5, 855, and 1015 nm -C: 1016, 1330, and 1550 nm Compatible with FC/PC and FC/APC Connectors Thorlabs Achromatic FiberPorts are adjustable fiber coupling and collimation devices. They feature an achromatic doublet lens (see page 689) that is positioned with respect to an optical fiber with an FC/PC or FC/APC connector. The FiberPort offers five axes of adjustment of the collimating/coupling lens: X, Y, Z, pitch, and yaw. A 6 th axis is achieved by rotating the fiber, which is particularly useful when working with polarization-sensitive PAFA-X-4-A applications. The lens has an antireflection coating to minimize back reflections. The achromatic design of the PAFA series of FiberPorts utilizes cemented doublets to minimize chromatic aberrations when coupling or collimating either a broadband light source or multiple wavelengths. The small focal length shifts experienced by an achromatic doublet allow the FiberPort to be used over a broad wavelength range without needing realignment (see below). OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources 80 FiberPort Spot Radius Comparison 0.03 FiberPort Focal Shift Comparison Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors RMS Spot Radius (µm) Achromatic Doublet Aspheric Wavelength (nm) Focusing a beam on a fiber using an Achromatic FiberPort, without z-axis adjustment, provides a small spot size over a broader band wavelength range compared to using an aspheric lens. Focal Shift (µm) Achromatic Focal Shift Aspheric Focal Shift Wavelength (nm) Wavelength-dependent focal shifts are minimized when using an Achromatic FiberPort compared to aspheres, as shown here. Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks 0-80 Screws Adjust Tilt Plate (3 Places) Ø1.06" (27.0 mm) A A 3X Plunger Tip Screws to Adjust Pressure on Tilt Plate Fiber Recepticle Counterbore for Mounting #2 Screw (4 Places) 0.47" (12.0 mm) 0.13" (3.2 mm) Reflectance (%) Broadband AR Coatings A Coating B Coating C Coating Pinhole Wheel Wavelength (nm) ITEM # EFL INPUT MFD a OUTPUT WAIST DIA. MAX. WAIST DIST. b DIVERGENCE LENS CHARACTERISTICS CA c NA AR λ d PAFA-X-4-A 4.0 mm 3.5 µm 0.86 mm 571 mm 0.76 mrad 1.8 mm nm PAFA-X-4-B 4.0 mm 5.0 µm 0.87 mm 350 mm 1.25 mrad 1.8 mm nm PAFA-X-4-C 4.0 mm 9.2 µm 0.73 mm 162 mm 2.30 mrad 1.8 mm nm a Mode Field Diameter c Clear Aperture b Maximum distance that the beam waist can be from the lens while still remaining collimated d Wavelength of the Antireflection Coating PAFA-X-4-A $ ,00 3, Achromatic FiberPort, FC/PC & FC/APC, f = 4.0 mm, nm PAFA-X-4-B $ ,00 3, Achromatic FiberPort, FC/PC & FC/APC, f = 4.0 mm, nm PAFA-X-4-C $ ,00 3, Achromatic FiberPort, FC/PC & FC/APC, f = 4.0 mm, nm 1735

85 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Stage Micrometers Features Calibrate Eyepiece Reticles and Objective Magnification R1L3S1P: 10 mm Scale with 50 µm Divisions R1L3S2P: 1 mm Scale with 10 µm Divisions Scales Centered on a 3" x 1" Microscope Slide Stage micrometers are commonly used for calibrating imaging devices, such as microscopes, when precise measurements are necessary. Positive slides are available with either a 10 mm or 1 mm scale. The 10 mm scale (R1L3S1P) has 50 µm divisions, while the 1 mm scale (R1L3S2P) has 10 µm divisions. R1L3S1P 10 mm Stage Micrometer with 50 µm Divisions Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks R1L3S2P 1 mm Stage Micrometer with 10 µm Divisions R1L3S1P $ ,25 1, Positive 10 mm Stage Micrometer with 50 µm Divisions, 3" x 1" R1L3S2P $ ,85 1, Positive 1 mm Stage Micrometer with 10 µm Divisions, 3" x 1" Grid Distortion Targets Our R1L3S3P positive grid array features four chrome grids on a 3" x 1" glass slide. The four grid arrays are 500 µm, 100 µm, 50 µm, and 10 µm. Grid arrays are used to determine the distortion of an imaging system, as the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid should be perpendicular to each other. A distorted image will show the lines as bowed; this image can then be used to correct for distortion. R1L3S2P Microscope View R1L3S1P Microscope View Features Four Grid Arrays on a 3" x 1" Soda Lime Glass Slide 500 µm, 100 µm, 50 µm, and 10 µm Grid Arrays Ideal for Stage Calibration and Distortion Detection Microscope View Pinhole Wheel R1L3S3P R1L3S3P $ ,75 1, Positive Grid Array: 500, 100, 50, and 10 µm Grids, 3" x 1" Custom Targets and Reticles Thorlabs designs, manufactures, and tests all of its Test Targets and Reticles. Custom Reticles and Targets can also be designed for your particular application. Contact Tech Support for details. Features Patterned Metal on Glass Designed by Contact Photolithography with Submicron Resolution Class 100 Cleanroom 1736

86 1951 USAF Resolution Targets Features Determine Resolution of an Optical System 3" x 1" Wheel Pattern Targets for Measuring Resolution Across Image 3" x 3" Targets Offer up to 4.4 µm per Line Pair Resolution Conforms to MIL-S-150A Standard Positive and Negative Patterns Available R3L1S4P Positive Wheel Pattern Thorlabs offers positive and negative resolution test targets that are made from plating chrome on a soda lime glass substrate and measure either 3" x 1" or 3" x 3". A set of six elements (horizontal and vertical line pair) are in one group and ten groups compose the resolution chart. The spacing between the lines in each element is equal to the thickness of the line itself. When the target is imaged, the resolution of an imaging system can be determined by viewing the clarity of the horizontal and vertical lines. The largest set of nondistinguishable horizontal and vertical lines determines the resolving power of the imaging system. The 3" x 3" targets have 10 groups (-2 to +7), with 6 elements per group to offer resolution from line pairs per mm (lp/mm) to lp/mm. On the other hand, the 3" x 1" wheel pattern targets have 9 USAF 1951 targets, each with 6 groups (+2 to +7) to also offer a maximum resolution of lp/mm with a minimum of 4.00 lp/mm. NBS 1963A Resolution Targets USAF 1951 Targets* Element R3L3S1N Negative Pattern R3L3S1P Positive Pattern R3L3S1N $ ,20 1, Negative 1951 USAF Test Target, 3" x 3" R3L3S1P $ ,20 1, Positive 1951 USAF Test Target, 3" x 3" R3L1S4N $ ,00 1, Negative 1951 USAF Wheel Pattern, 3" x 1" R3L1S4P $ ,00 1, Positive 1951 USAF Wheel Pattern, 3" x 1" NBS 1963A Targets Group Number * Units are line pairs per millimeter Cycles/mm Cycle Size Cycles/mm Cycle Size mm mm mm mm OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel mm mm mm mm R2L2S1N Negative Pattern R2L2S1P Positive Pattern Determine Resolution of an Optical System Frequencies from 1 to 18 cycles/mm 2" x 2" Soda Lime Glass Substrate Positive and Negative Patterns Available Thorlabs offers positive and negative NBS 1963A resolution test targets that are made from plating chrome on a glass substrate and measure 2" x 2". These targets have sets of 5 horizontal and 5 vertical lines. Each set of lines is labeled with a number, which refers to the number of cycles per mm. With a maximum frequency of 18 cycles/mm, the smallest cycles are only mm. The minimum frequency is 1.0 cycle/mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm R2L2S1N $ , Negative NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2" R2L2S1P $ ,00 1, Positive NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2" 1737

87 OCT T-Scopes (Thorlabs Microscopes) Features Focus-Adjustable C-Mount Adapter Five-Objective Turret Directly Compatible with SM1 and SM2 Lens Tube Includes Adapters for RMS-Threaded Objectives Motorized Version Includes Software and User Interface Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Thorlabs T-Scopes are microscopes designed to provide an optical system that is easy to both operate and modify. These microscopes can be adapted for a variety of applications such as wide-field or laser scanning microscopy. The housing is equipped with an SM1-threaded port, making it possible to build custom imaging and microscopy systems. The T-Scope is available with either manual or motorized Z-axis translation and consists of a tube lens system (ITL200) designed for parfocality. These microscopes are mounted on Thorlabs Manual or Motorized Focus Blocks (Item #s MGZ30 and MGZ30-MOT, respectively; see the following page for details), which provide up to TSCOPE 30 mm of travel along the Z-axis. A non-rotating, fine-focus-adjustable, SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) port with included C-mount adapter is provided at the top of the T-Scope for direct mounting of cameras or detectors. Without the C-mount adapter, the T-Scope can accept custom optical systems built upon the SM1 thread standard. The fine focusing adjustment at this port allows for precise adjustment through the image plane. Alternatively, if desired, one can gain access to the SM2 (2.035"-40) thread standard by removing the SM1-threaded port and an adapter from the top of the T-Scope. A 5-objective turret with M26 x 36 TPI threading is included with the T-Scope. For use with RMSthreaded objectives, five RMSA7 adapters are also provided. For compatibility with objectives with other threads, see our extensive collection of adapters on page 342. The motorized version, TSCOPE-MOT, incorporates a stepper motor and built-in encoder for positional readout along the Z-axis. The TSCOPE-MOT is powered by USB and includes software and a user interface. Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel Confocal System Shown Mounted on MGZ30-MOT Motorized T-Scope with MLS203-1 Stage (See Page 1686) and MP1214 T-Scope Stand (featured below). Specifications ITEM # Z-Axis Travel Z-Axis Adjustment TSCOPE (MANUAL MICROSCOPE) Fine: 250 µm/rev Coarse: 40 mm/rev 30 mm TSCOPE-MOT (MOTORIZED MICROSCOPE) Fine: 250 µm/rev Coarse: 40 mm/rev Incremental Step (Min) 500 nm 50 nm Resolution 2.5 µm 100 nm Mounting* Ø1.5" Posts *Mounting post sold separately (see page 106) TSCOPE $ 2, , ,00 22, Thorlabs Microscope with Manual Focus TSCOPE-MOT $ 5, , ,00 40, Thorlabs Microscope with Motorized Focus T-Scope/Focus Block Stand The MP1214 T-Scope/Focus Block stand consists of Thorlabs Ø1.5" Dynamically Damped Post with a specially designed 12" x 14" breadboard. This 3/4" thick breadboard base is designed to provide increased stability for Thorlabs T-Scopes and Focus Blocks compared to what would be provided with a standard 1/2" thick aluminum breadboard. Additionally, the base includes side grips and recessed feet for easy lifting and transportation of the stand. The included DP14 Dynamically Damped Post (see page 107 for details) provides added stability by reducing vibrational effects on the final image. MP1214 MP1214 $ ,00 4, Stand for T-Scopes and Focus Blocks 1738

88 Post-Mountable Focus Blocks Features Five-Objective Turret Compatible with SM1, SM2, and 30 mm Cage Compatible Includes Adapters for RMS- Threaded Objectives (SM1 and M25 x 0.75 Adapters also Available) MGZ30-MOT Base and Post Sold Separately on the Previous Page Thorlabs Post-Mountable Focus Blocks are designed to be the base units upon which home-built imaging systems may be constructed and configured from our standard optomechanics. Available in a manual or motorized version, the Focus Block provides 30 mm of travel along the Z-axis with fine and coarse coaxial adjustment knobs. Each unit includes a five-objective turret with M26 x 36 TPI (M26 x 0.706) threading. Adapters are also included for use with RMS-threaded objectives. Additional adapters (Item # RMSA7) as well as adapters for M25 x 0.75 threaded objectives are available below. A single dovetail adapter is located above the lens turret and enables direct integration of 30 mm cage, SM1-threaded (1.035"-40) components, and SM2- threaded (2.035"-40) components. The Focus Blocks are designed to mount directly to a Ø1.5" post as shown to the left and featured MGZ30 in our MP1214 T- Scope/Focus Block Stand on the previous page. Additional Motorized (MGZ30-MOT) Features Motorized Z Translation with Encoder that Responds to Automated or Manual Adjustment USB Powered Separate Controller Not Required Software and GUI Included The Motorized Post-Mounted Focus Block (MGZ30-MOT) incorporates a stepper motor and built-in encoder for positional readout. The MGZ30-MOT is powered by USB and includes software and a user interface. SPECIFICATIONS ITEM # Manual Focus Block (MGZ30) Motorized Focus Block (MGZ30-MOT) Z-Axis Travel 30 mm Colinear Z-Axis Adjustment Fine: 250 µm/rev Coarse: 40 mm/rev Minimal Incremental Step 500 nm 50 nm Resolution 2.5 µm 100 nm Mounting* Ø1.5" Posts *Post sold separately. See page 106. MGZ30 $ 1, , ,00 14, Manual Post-Mountable Focus Block MGZ30-MOT $ 4, , ,00 32, Motorized Post-Mountable Focus Block OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel M26 x 36 TPI Adapters for Threaded Objectives M25A1 RMSA7 These thread adapters are designed to facilitate the use of various thread standards with our Post-Mountable Focus Blocks featured above. The M25A1 thread adapter has external M26 x 36 TPI threads and internal M25 x 0.75 threads, making it directly compatible with M25 x 0.75-threaded objectives. SM1A28 has external M26 x 36 TPI threads and internal SM1 (1.035"-40) threads for use with our large range of SM1-compatible products. Finally, the RMSA7 adapter (5 are included with the purchase of the Post- Mountable Focus Block presented above) also features external M26 x 36 TPI threads but offers internal RMS (0.800"-36) threads for use with RMS-threaded objectives. M25A1 $ , Thread Adapter with M25.5 Internal and M26 x 36 TPI External Thread RMSA7 $ , Thread Adapter with RMS Internal and M26 x 36 TPI External Thread SM1A28 $ , Thread Adapter with SM1 Internal and M26 x 36 TPI External Thread 1739

89 OCT Stages ScienceDesk LEDs Light Sources Motorized Pinhole Wheel for Confocal Imaging Features Included in all Thorlabs Confocal 16 Pinholes: Ø25 µm to Ø2 mm Enables Quick and Repeatable Pinhole Positioning Eliminates Need for Realignment SMA Fiber Connector for Coupling to PMT/APD Detector High-Precision Encoded Motor 30 mm Cage System Compatible MPH16 Thorlabs MPH16 Motorized Pinhole Wheel enables automated and repeatable positioning of pinholes for applications such as confocal laser scanning microscopy. The Motorized Pinhole Wheel has a chrome-plated glass disk with 16 pinholes ranging from Ø25 µm to Ø2 mm. The disk is manufactured using standard photolithography techniques and is AR coated with our standard A coating ( nm) to further increase the throughput of the system. A highprecision, optically encoded motor provides repeatable selection between pinholes without the need for realignment. The detection end has an SMA fiber input for efficient collection of the spatially filtered light. A dovetail adapter plate is also included, which provides compatibility with Thorlabs 30 mm cage system. Objectives/Scan Lenses Dispersion Compensating Mirrors Fluorescence Imaging Filters Filter Cubes PMT Modules Microscope Adapters Cuvette Holder % Reflectivity N-BK7 Broadband Antireflection Coatings Wavelength (nm) Pinhole Wheel Coating: Standard A Coating ( nm) Pinhole Sizes 25 µm 80 µm 30 µm 90 µm 35 µm 100 µm 40 µm 125 µm 45 µm 200 µm 50 µm 300 µm 60 µm 1 mm 70 µm 2 mm FiberPorts Test Targets/Reticles T-Scopes Focus Blocks Pinhole Wheel 1.30" (33.0 mm) 2.60" (66.0 mm) 3.34" (84.7 mm) 1.31" (33.3 mm) 3.34" (84.7 mm) 1.99" (50.4 mm) MPH " ( mm) 1.99" (50.4 mm) SMA POWER 24 V DC 1.50 A 3.73" (94.8 mm) MPH16 $ 2, , ,00 17, Position Motorized Pinhole Wheel Motorized Stages Ideal for Manual or Automated Positioning of Stages Low Profile: 31.0 mm (1.22") Tall Integrated Brushless DC Linear Servo Motor Actuators High-Quality, Precision-Engineered Linear Bearings Range of Sample Holders Available MLS203-1 XY Scanning Stage For more details, see pages

90 Selection Guide LASER SCANNING MICROSCOPY MICROSCOPY COMPONENTS OCT IMAGING SYSTEMS OCT COMPONENTS ADAPTIVE OPTICS Pages Pages Pages Pages Pages Selection Guide Overview Pages Selection Guide Page 1747 Spectral Domain OCT Pages Swept Source OCT Pages Polarization-Sensitive OCT Page 1756 OCT Microscope Pages

91 Maximum Depth Imaging OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Optical Coherence Tomography Tutorial (Page 1 of 2) Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) is a noninvasive optical imaging modality that provides real-time, 1D depth, 2D cross-sectional, and 3D volumetric images with micron-level resolution and millimeters of imaging depth. [1] OCT images consist of structural information from a sample based on light backscattered from different layers of material within the sample. It can provide real-time imaging and is capable of being enhanced using birefringence contrast or functional blood flow imaging with optional extensions to the technology. Thorlabs has designed a broad range of OCT imaging systems that cover several wavelengths, imaging resolutions, and speeds, while having a compact footprint for easy portability. Also, to increase our ability to provide OCT imaging systems that meet each customer s unique requirements, we have designed a highly modular technology that can be optimized for varying applications. OCT is the optical analog of ultrasound, with the tradeoff being lower imaging depth for significantly higher resolution (see Fig. 1). With the ability to image up to 6 mm in depth and achieve better than 5 µm in axial resolution, OCT fills a niche between ultrasound and confocal microscopy. In addition to the high resolution and greater imaging depth, the non-contact, noninvasive advantage of OCT makes it well suited for imaging samples such as biological tissue, small animals, and materials. Recent advances in OCT have led to a new class of technologies called Fourier Domain OCT, which has enabled high-speed imaging at rates greater than 700,000 lines per second. V. Jayaraman, J. Jiang, H. Li, P. Heim, G. Cole, B. Potsaid, J. Fujimoto, and A. Cable, up to 760 khz Axial Scan Rate Using Single-Mode 1310 nm MEMs-Tunable VCSELs with 100 nm Tuning Range, CLEO Laser Applications to Photonic Applications, paper PDPB2 (2011). OCT Highlights Noninvasive Optical Imaging Ideal for Medical, Biological, and Industrial Imaging Applications 1D Depth, 2D Cross-Sectional, and 3D Volumetric Imaging Capabilities Real-Time Imaging with Micron-Level Resolution Millimeters of Imaging Depth in Highly Scattering Samples E BV D BV OCT Cross-Sectional Image of Human Finger. Layers of Skin: E- Epidermis; D- Dermis; BV- Blood Vessels. Image Size: 4.9 mm x 2.6 mm. Image Taken with TELESTO OCT System. Example Application Figure 1 1 nm 10 nm AFM TIR-FM Art Conservation Drug Coatings 3D Profiling 0.1 µm 1 µm 10 µm 0.1 mm Optical Histology Vis-FL 1 mm 1 cm 10 cm OCT US Small Animal Retina Cone Cells Biology 1 m 10 m 10 nm 1 nm slow invasive & slow 0.1 µm 10 µm 1 µm MRI 1 mm 0.1 mm PET 1 m 10 cm 1 cm Resolution In-vivo Mouse Lung Tissue Birefringence Comparison of imaging depth and resolution between various imaging modalities. OCT is a high-speed, noninvasive imaging modality that fills a niche between ultrasound and confocal microscopy. 1742

92 Optical Coherence Tomography Tutorial (Page 2 of 2) Fourier Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (FD-OCT) is based on lowcoherence interferometry, which utilizes the coherent properties of a light source to measure optical path length delays in a sample. In OCT, to obtain cross-sectional images with micron-level resolution, an interferometer is set up to measure optical path length differences between light reflected from the sample and reference arms. There are two types of FD-OCT systems, each characterized by its light source and detection schemes: Spectral Domain OCT (SD-OCT) and Swept Source OCT (SS- OCT). In both types of systems, light is divided into sample and reference arms of a Michelson interferometer setup, as illustrated in Fig. 2. SS-OCT uses coherent and narrowband light, whereas SD-OCT systems utilize broadband, low-coherence light sources. Back scattered light, attributed to variations in the index of refraction within a sample, is recoupled into the sample arm fiber and then combined with the light that has traveled a fixed optical path length along the reference arm. A resulting interferogram is measured through the detection arm of the interferometer. Spectral Domain OCT CCD Broadband Light Source Grating Swept Laser Source Balanced Detector Spectrometer Swept Source OCT The frequency of the interferogram measured by the sensor is related to the depth location of the reflector in the sample. As a result, a depth reflectivity profile (A-scan) is produced by taking a Fourier transform of the detected interferogam. 2D cross-sectional images (B-scans) are produced by scanning the OCT sample beam across the sample. As the sample arm beam is scanned across the sample, a series of A-scans are collected to create the 2D image. Similarly, when the OCT beam is scanned in a second direction, a series of 2D images are collected to produce a 3D volume dataset. With FD-OCT, 2D images are collected on time scales of milliseconds, and 3D images can be collected at rates now below 1 second. Spectral Domain OCT vs. Swept Source OCT Spectral Domain and Swept Source OCT systems are based on the same fundamental principle but incorporate different technical approaches for producing the OCT interferogram. SD-OCT systems have no moving parts and therefore have high mechanical stability and low phase noise. Availability of a broad range of line cameras has also enabled development of SD-OCT systems with varying imaging speeds and sensitivities. SS-OCT systems utilize a frequency swept light source and photodetector to rapidly generate the same type of interferogram. Due to the rapid sweeping of the swept laser source, high peak powers at each discrete wavelength can be used to illuminate the sample to provide greater sensitivity with little risk of optical damage. 1 3 CIR 2 FC FC Sample and Reference Arm PC Sample Arm Reference Arm VA M C Figure 2 Schematic diagrams for the two Fourier Domain OCT techniques, Spectral Domain OCT and Swept Source OCT. FC: Fiber Coupler; PC: Polarization Controller; C: Collimator; VA: Variable Attenuator; M: Mirror; CIR: Circulator OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope FD-OCT Signal Processing In Fourier Domain OCT, the interferogram is detected as a function of optical frequency. With a fixed optical delay in the reference arm, light reflected from different sample depths produces interference patterns with different frequency components. A Fourier transform is used to resolve different depth reflections, thereby generating a depth profile of the sample (A-scan). 1743

93 OCT Overview Thorlabs OCT Software (Page 1 of 2) High-performance data acquisition software is included with all Thorlabs OCT systems. This Windows -based software performs data acquisition, processing, scan control, and display of OCT images. Additionally, LabVIEW and C-based Software Development Kits are available that contain a complete set of libraries for measurement control, data acquisition, and processing, as well as storage and display of OCT images. Therefore, each user can customize his or her OCT software for a given application. Scan Control Features Software Included with All Thorlabs OCT Interactive Click and Scan Video Mode High-Speed Volume Rendering Display Doppler Imaging Versatile Scan and Acquisition Control Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Interactive Scan Contols Thorlabs OCT software provides several scan and acquisition controls. The camera integrated in the probe of our OCT systems displays live video images in the application software. Users can now select points directly on the video display to define the scan line or area for 2D or 3D imaging, respectively. Manual controls of scan length, size (in pixels), angle, and location are also available. 2D Mode In the 2D imaging mode, the probe beam is scanned in one direction and cross-sectional OCT reflectivity images are displayed in real time. Line averaging before or after the fast Fourier transform (FFT) is available as well as OCT image averaging. Image display parameters such as colormapping, brightness, and contrast can also be controlled in this mode. We have also implemented an option for automated display using the optimal dynamic range of the system. All windows can be undocked from the application screen. Doppler Mode Doppler OCT imaging comes standard with all OCT systems. In the Doppler Mode, phase shifts between adjacent pixels are averaged to calculate the Doppler frequency shift induced by particle motion or flow (see page 1746 for more details). The Doppler Mode is activated by a button on the software toolbar. The user can control the number of lateral and axial pixels over which to average to calculate Doppler frequency shifts as well as threshold values for the Doppler OCT image display. The Doppler images are displayed in the main window with a user-selectable colormap indicating forward- or backward-directed flow, relative to the OCT beam. 1744

94 Thorlabs OCT Software (Page 2 of 2) 3D Mode In the 3D imaging mode, the OCT probe beam is sequentially scanned across the sample to collect a series of 2D cross-sectional images, which are then used to build a 3D image. Through our new interactive scan control, users can define the 3D region to scan using the live video image, as well as the manual inputs. In the Thorlabs OCT software, 3D volume data sets can be viewed as orthogonal cross-sectional planes (see right) and volume renderings. In the Sectional View, users can scan crosssectional images in all three orthogonal planes, no matter the orientation in which the data was acquired. The view can be rotated as well as zoomed in and out. The Rendering View provides a volume render of the acquired volume dataset. This view enables quick 3D visualization of the sample being imaged. Planes of any orientation can be clipped out to expose internal structures within the volume. Users can zoom in/out, rotate, as well as save the render as an image. Utilizing the full potential of our high-performance software and Sectional View high-speed OCT systems, we have developed a Fast Volume Rendering Mode for the Thorlabs OCT software. In this mode, highspeed volume renderings can be displayed in real-time, providing rapid visualization of samples in three dimensions. OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Rendering View Fast Volume Rendering Data Archiving Thorlabs OCT software provides numerous methods for archiving data. Output file formats include raw data directly from the detector, OCT image data, Doppler phase data, as well as complex data that is calculated after the FFT. Users can specify recording options such as length (in terms of time or number of frames) and file names as well as choose to cache data into a buffer to optimize acquisition speed. Images can be saved as.bmp,.jpeg,.tiff, or.png files. In Playback Mode, saved data can be processed (in case of raw data), reviewed, and exported into image stacks, video files, or converted into other data values. Data Recording Options 1745

95 OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Doppler Doppler OCT is an extension of OCT that enables imaging of particle motion within a sample. In Fourier Domain OCT (FD-OCT) systems, there are no additional hardware requirements for implementation of Doppler imaging. Doppler OCT imaging capability is embedded in the software provided with all Thorlabs OCT systems and is ideal for functional vascular imaging, studying embryonic cardiac dynamics, or monitoring vascular treatment response. It is also useful for general flow velocimetry used in microfluidic channel monitoring. Developmental Biology Principles of Doppler OCT The Fourier transform of the interferogram acquired in FD-OCT imaging (A-scan) produces a complex signal [I(z) + iq(z)], where the magnitude of that signal is used to create the structural OCT image. The complex portion of the signal contains information based on the phase of the interferogram. Any change in phase between consecutively acquired A-scans can be attributed to a Doppler frequency shift induced by particle motion. In Thorlabs implementation of Doppler OCT, Doppler frequency shifts are calculated based on spatially averaging phase shifts within a sliding 2D window and Doppler Effect A stationary observer will observe a Doppler shift in the frequency of light emitted from a source moving toward or away from the observer. When the light source is moving toward the observer, the observed frequency of light will be blue-shifted, meaning the perceived frequency of the light will be higher than the actual frequency emitted by the source. Higher frequencies correspond to shorter wavelengths. Conversely, if the light source is moving away from the observer, the observed frequency of light will be redshifted to lower frequencies. In Doppler OCT, the Doppler effect caused by moving particles in a sample is determined by measuring a shift in the phase between consecutive OCT interference fringe signals. Thorlabs Swept Source System (OCS1300SS) with Doppler Imaging was used by researchers at the University of Toronto to study the cardiovascular system of living tadpoles. The series of images below show in vivo cross-sectional SS-OCT images of a beating tadpole heart superimposed with Doppler blood flow images. An optical Doppler cardiogram was obtained using a gated technique to increase the effective frame rate and improve the signal-to-noise ratio. The gating technique provides ultra high-speed visualization of the heart blood flow pattern in developing African frog embryos in both 3D and 4D (i.e., 3D + time) modes. This allows detailed visualization of the complex cardiac motion and hemodynamics in the beating heart. using a Kasai autocorrelation function (see reference below). The Doppler frequency shift f D caused by moving particles is related to the phase shift between A-scans, as described in the following expression: where ϕ is the average phase shift within the sliding 2D window and f A is the A-scan rate of the OCT system. The Thorlabs Doppler Imaging Mode displays the phase shift induced by moving particles using a standard Doppler colormap where red to yellow (violet to blue) indicates flow in the direction toward (away from) the OCT sample beam. The mean velocity <ν> of the moving particles, at any depth, can be quantified by knowing θ, the angle between the OCT sample beam and flow vector: Here, λ ο is the center optical wavelength of the OCT sample beam and n is the index of refraction of the sample. Reference: C. Kasai, K. Namekawa, A. Koyano, R. Omoto et al. Realtime two-dimensional blood flow imaging using an autocorrelation technique, IEEE Trans. Sonics. Ultrason (1985). Fig. A Fig. B Normalized Flow Velocity Reference: A. Mariampillai, B.A. Standish, N.R. Munce, C. Randall, G. Liu, J.Y. Jiang, A.E. Cable, I.A. Vitkin, V.X.D. Yang, Doppler optical cardiogram gated 2D color flow imaging at 1000 fps and 4D in vivo visualization of embryonic heart at 45 fps on a swept source OCT system, Optics Express 15, 1627 (2007). Fig. A shows the 3D surface reconstruction of the tadpole heart, while Fig. B demonstrates the complex blood flow pattern of the heart via a 3D color Doppler map. 1746

96 Optical Coherence Tomography Selection Guide Thorlabs offers a wide variety of Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) imaging systems. We recognize each imaging application has their specific needs. With the growing number of OCT systems available, it can be challenging to decide which system best meets your needs. Below we have put together a Selection Guide that outlines a few key technical specifications of each of our systems as well as some tips on how to choose the best OCT system for your application. Further details on these systems are described in the following pages. Choosing an OCT System Center Wavelength and Bandwidth Thorlabs currently offers OCT systems that operate with a center wavelength of either 930 nm or 1325 nm. The center wavelength contributes to the actual imaging depth and resolution of the system. Shorter wavelength OCT systems, such as our 930 nm system, are ideal for higher resolution imaging compared to systems with a center wavelength of 1325 nm. For imaging samples that have higher optical scattering properties, such as tissue, the longer wavelength systems are recommended. The longer center wavelength is not affected by scattering, and therefore, the light is able to penetrate deeper into the sample and return for detection. The spectral bandwidth of the OCT light source is indirectly proportional to the axial (depth) resolution of the imaging system. Therefore, broadband light sources are used to provide high axial resolution. A-Scan/Line Rate A single depth profile (Intensity vs Depth) is called an A-Scan. A B-Scan, or two-dimensional cross-sectional image, is created by laterally scanning the OCT beam and collecting sequential A- scans. The speed with which a B-scan is collected depends on the A-Scan or Line rate. For Spectral-Domain OCT systems (see pages ), the A-Scan rate is determined by the speed of the camera in the detection spectrometer. For Swept-Source OCT systems (see pages ), the A-Scan rate is determined by the sweep speed of the swept laser source. There is a tradeoff between A-Scan rate and the sensitivity of an OCT system. Resolution In OCT, the axial (depth) and lateral resolutions are dependent on different factors. The axial resolution of the OCT system is proportionally dependent on the center wavelength of the source and inversely proportional to the source bandwidth. In practice, the axial resolution is also improved by the index of refraction of the sample. For example, the axial resolution of the CALLISTO OCT system is 7 µm in air or 5.2 µm in water-rich samples such as tissue (n = 1.35). As with general microscopy principles, the lateral resolution is dependent on the focusing objective in the imaging probe. All of Thorlabs OCT systems come with our specially designed OCT scan lens (see pages ), which provides telecentric scans across the entire field of view. Field of View (FOV) The length (L) and width (W) of the FOV is limited by the scan lens properties. The maximum depth (D) attainable is set by the design of the OCT system. However, the actual imaging depth will typically depend on the optical properties of the sample. Our standard OCT systems are designed to provide an optimized balance between imaging depth and axial resolution. For applications requiring greater depth or higher resolution, we offer custom configurations, which are detailed on page Sensitivity The sensitivity of an OCT system describes the largest permissible signal attenuation within a sample that can still be distinguished from the noise. In practice, higher sensitivity OCT systems are capable of providing higher contrast images. Since the sensitivity of an OCT system can be increased by increasing the integration time, there is usually a tradeoff between A-scan rate and sensitivity. OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Selection Guide SPECTRAL DOMAIN OCT SWEPT SOURCE OCT OCT System CALLISTO GANYMEDE HYPERION TELESTO OCS1300A1 OCS1300A1-NIK Center Wavelength 930 nm 1325 nm 1325 nm A-Scan/Line Rate 1.2 khz 29 khz 110 khz Up to 91 khz 50 khz Axial (Depth) Resolution (Air) 7 µm 5.8 µm 6.5 µm 12 µm Lateral Resolution 8 µm 15 µm 25 µm Maximum FOV* (L x W x D) 10 mm x 10 x mm 1.6 mm 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.7 mm 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.5 mm 10 mm x 10 mm x 6 mm Sensitivity 105 db 91 db 86 db Up to 106 db 100 db Key Performance Feature High-Sensitivity Imaging High-Resolution Video-Rate Imaging High-Speed Imaging Widely Versatile Imaging Deep Imaging with Polarization-Sensitive Capability OCS1300A1 Mounted on Upright Microscope Page *Field of View 1747

97 OCT Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 1 of 6) Spectral Domain OCT Features 930 nm and 1325 nm OCT Available Custom and OEM Options Fully Operational System Right Out of the Box Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Overview Thorlabs offers several Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (SD-OCT) to address a wide variety of imaging applications. Each system is designed to provide the best balance between imaging depth and axial resolution. All systems incorporate long-lasting, highpower Superluminescent Diode (SLD) light sources to provide the best in imaging-quality. The spectrometer detection system is expertly built TELESTO System around high-quality silicon-based (930 nm SD-OCT ) or InGaAs-based (1325 nm SD-OCT System) line cameras. All systems include a probe mount, computer that is preinstalled with high-performance user software, and a software development kit (see below). CALLISTO 930 nm OCT Image of Human Nailfold. Image Size: 8.9 mm x 1.7 mm Probe Stand Software Development Kit The Probe Mount and Sample Stage Incorporates the MP1214 T-Scope/Focus Black Stand Featured on Page 1738 All OCT Include a Probe Mount with Sample Stage Coarse and Fine Z-Travel of Probe Sample Stage with XY Translation and Rotation Post Mounted Using DP14 Vibration Damping Ø1.5" Post on 12" x 14" Breadboard Along with high-performance user software (see pages for details), all SD-OCT include a software development kit from which the user application is built upon. C++ and LabVIEW -Based Interfaces Seamless Integration into User s Own Software High-Speed Processing in Both Programming Languages Includes Hardware Control, Extensive Processing Routines, Display Options, and Data Import/Export Controls Doppler Processing and Display Routines 1748

98 Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 2 of 6) CALLISTO Features High Sensitivity for Increased Contrast Ideal for Imaging Static or In Vitro Samples Custom Configurations Available (See Page 1753 for Details) SPECIFICATIONS Center Wavelength 930 nm A-Scan/Line Rate 1.2 khz Axial (Depth) Resolution 7 µm (Air) Lateral Resolution 8 µm Maximum FOV* (L x W x D) 10 mm x 10 mm x 1.6 mm Sensitivity 105 db Optical Power on Sample (Typical) 1.5 mw Pixels per A-Scan 512 Data Interface USB Pixel Depth 16 Bit *Field of View CALLISTO'S Sensitivity Advantage CALLISTO System (Computer Subject to Change) High-Sensitivity System The CALLISTO SD- System has the highest sensitivity of all Thorlabs 930 nm OCT systems. With 105 db of sensitivity and an imaging rate of 1200 lines per second, CALLISTO is the ideal OCT system for imaging static samples. The sensitivity advantage achieved with this imaging system enables distinction between layers of similar material that cannot be visualized using other OCT systems (see example below), especially at greater depths. This OCT system is a great tool for teaching labs in the fields of imaging, biophysics, biology, and biomedical engineering. The CALLISTO utilizes a USB data connection and is controlled via software preinstalled on the provided computer. It also includes a 3D scanning probe with an integrated video camera for volume imaging and live video display. The included stand and sample stage provides XY translation and rotation of the sample along with axial travel of the probe. The CALLISTO is fully functional right out of the box. Imaging OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Included with this System SD-OCT Engine with 930 nm Superluminescent Diode Light Source and Linear CCD Array-Based Spectrometer 2D Scanning Probe for Acquisition of 3D Volume OCT Images Video Camera Integrated in the Scanning Probe for Live Video Imaging of the Sample Probe Stand with Sample Stage (See Page 1748) Computer with High-Performance Software (See Pages ) Close Up of OCT Probe The CALLISTO System provides superior sensitivity for increased contrast over other OCT imaging systems. Here we show the difference between an OCT image of a grape taken with the CALLISTO System (top) compared to the high-speed but lower sensitivity HYPERION OCT System (bottom image, see page 1751). Image size: 6.3 mm x 1.7 mm. Custom and OEM configurations of the CALLISTO including 840 nm central wavelength and extended imaging depth designs are also available. For more details, see page CALLISTO $ 27, , ,00 215, nm, 1.2 khz, High-Sensitivity SD-OCT System 1749

99 OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 3 of 6) GANYMEDE Features A-Scan Rate of 29 khz General-Purpose OCT System with a Balance Between Sensitivity and Imaging Speed Ideal for Biological and Industrial Materials Imaging Applications Large Field of View: 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.7 mm Custom Configurations Available (See Page 1753 for Details) Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT GANYMEDE System (Computer Subject to Change) Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope GANYMEDE System The GANYMEDE OCT system balances the sensitivity of the detector with the speed at which the image can be acquired. With an A-Scan rate of 29 khz, this Spectral Domain OCT System is an excellent general-purpose system for imaging biological samples as well as producing 2D cross-sectional images and 3D volume datasets. The GANYMEDE utilizes a GigE data connection and is controlled via software preinstalled on a compact computer. It also includes a 3D scanning probe with integrated video camera for volume imaging and live video display. The included stand and sample stage provides XY translation and rotation of the sample along with axial travel of the probe. The GANYMEDE provides out-of-the-box functionality. SPECIFICATIONS Center Wavelength 930 nm A-Scan/Line Rate 29 khz Axial (Depth) Resolution 5.8 µm (Air) Lateral Resolution 8 µm Maximum FOV* (L x W x D) 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.7 mm Sensitivity 91 db Optical Power on Sample (Typical) 1.5 mw Pixels per A-Scan 1024 Data Interface GigE Pixel Depth 12 Bit *Field of View Included with this System SD-OCT Engine with 930 nm Superluminescent Diode Light Source and Linear CCD Array-Based Spectrometer 2D Scanning Probe for Acquisition of 3D Volume OCT Images Video Camera Integrated in the Scanning Probe for Live Video Imaging of the Sample Probe Stand with Sample Stage (See Page 1748) Computer and 22" Monitor High-Performance Software (See Pages ) OCT image of a laminated IR card taken with the GANYMEDE Imaging System. Image Size: 8.8 mm x 2.7 mm Custom and OEM configurations of the GANYMEDE, including 840 nm central wavelength and extended imaging depth designs, are also available. For more details, see page GANYMEDE CALL CALL CALL CALL 930 nm, 29 khz, SD-OCT System 1750

100 Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 4 of 6) High-Speed HYPERION System The HYPERION System provides high-speed acquisition up to 110,000 A-Scans per second. At such rates, this system is ideal for fast volume data acquisition or monitoring rapid dynamic processes within a sample. The HYPERION utilizes a Camera Link data connection and is controlled via software preinstalled on a highperformance computer that is capable of online rendering and display of all measured 3D datasets. It also includes a 3D scanning probe with integrated video camera for volume imaging and live video display. The included stand and sample stage provides XY translation and rotation of the sample along with axial travel of the probe. The HYPERION is fully functional right out of the box. HYPERION Features High-Speed Acquisition Enables Real-Time Streaming of Volume Data Sets Online Rendering of 3D Volumes Ideal for High-Speed and Volume Imaging Applications Large Field of View: 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.7 mm Custom Configurations Available (See Page 1753 for Details) HYPERION System (Computer Subject to Change) OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope SPECIFICATIONS Center Wavelength 930 nm A-Scan/Line Rate 110 khz Axial (Depth) Resolution 5.8 µm (Air) Lateral Resolution 8 µm Maximum FOV* (L x W x D) 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.7 mm Sensitivity 86 db Optical Power on Sample (Typical) 1.5 mw Pixels per A-Scan 1024 Data Interface Camera Link Pixel Depth 12 Bit *Field of View High-Speed Imaging with the HYPERION enables realtime volume display up to 7 volumes per second Included with this System SD-OCT Engine with 930 nm Superluminescent Diode Light Source and Linear CCD Array-Based Spectrometer 2D Scanning Probe for Acquisition of 3D Volume OCT Images Video Camera Integrated in the Scanning Probe for Live Video Imaging of the Sample Probe Stand with Sample Stage (See Page 1748) Computer and 22" Monitor High-Performance Software (See Pages ) Close Up of SD-OCT Probe The HYPERION System is ideal for highspeed imaging during material inspection. Here is an image of a plastic adapter. Image Size: 7 mm x 2.75 mm Custom and OEM configurations of the HYPERION, including 840 nm central wavelength and extended imaging depth designs, are also available. For more details, see page HYPERION CALL CALL CALL CALL 930 nm, 110 khz SD-OCT System 1751

101 OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 5 of 6) TELESTO System (Computer Subject to Change) TELESTO Features 1325 nm Center Wavelength Provides Deep Image Penetration in Highly Scattering Samples Three Acquisition Modes for Flexibility in Imaging Speed and Sensitivity Ideal for High-Speed and Biological/Biomedical Imaging Applications High Resolution: 6.5 µm in Air Variable-Rate TELESTO System Thorlabs TELESTO System is the newest member to its SD-OCT imaging family. This system provides the flexibility required for high-speed, deep penetration and high resolution imaging applications. It utilizes Thorlabs unique Superluminescent Diode design, which provides over 160 nm of bandwidth, resulting in an axial resolution of 6.5 µm in air. In the software, users can select between three imaging modes to image up to 91,000 A-Scans per second with 91 db sensitivity or with 5,500 A-Scans per second with 106 db sensitivity. Increasing the sensitivity, at the cost of imaging speed, enables detection of more subtle structures in a sample (see images below). Highspeed imaging at 91 khz enables rapid volume acquisition and display. The TELESTO is controlled via software preinstalled on a high-performance computer that is capable of displaying greater than 6 volumes per second. It also includes a 3D scanning probe with integrated video camera for volume imaging and live video display. The included stand and sample stage provides XY translation and rotation of the sample along with axial travel of the probe. The TELESTO is fully functional right out of the box. SPECIFICATIONS Center Wavelength 1325 nm High-Speed Mode: 91 khz A-Scan/Line Rate Video-Rate Mode: 28 khz High-Sensitivity Mode: 5.5 khz Axial (Depth) Resolution 6.5 µm (Air) Lateral Resolution 15 µm Maximum FOV* (L x W x D) 10 mm x 10 mm x 2.5 mm High-Speed Mode: 91 db Sensitivity Video-Rate Mode: 100 db High-Sensitivity Mode: 106 db Optical Power on Sample 3 mw Pixels per A-Scan 512 Data Interface Camera Link Pixel Depth 12 Bit *Field of View Included with this System SD-OCT Engine with a Matched Pair Broadband 1325 nm Superluminescent Diode Light Source and Linear InGaAs Array-Based Spectrometer 2D Scanning Probe for Acquisition of 3D Volume OCT Images Video Camera Integrated in the Scanning Probe for Live Video Imaging of the Sample Probe Stand with Sample Stage (See Page 1748) Computer and 22" Monitor High-Performance Software (See Pages ) Flexible Imaging with TELESTO 5.5 khz 29 khz 91 khz The TELESTO 1325 nm SD- System boasts the flexibility of user-controlled acquisition speed. With this flexibility, one can achieve high sensitivity or high speed with a single system. Above are images of a fingertip taken at all three speed settings. Image size: 4.8 mm x 2.6 mm. TELESTO CALL CALL CALL CALL 1325 nm, Variable-Rate SD-OCT System 1752

102 Spectral Domain Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 6 of 6) Custom Spectral Domain OCT In addition to our standard SD-OCT systems, Thorlabs offers options for customers to design an SD-OCT system based on their unique imaging requirements. Currently we offer the option for an extended imaging depth SD-OCT system based on our standard HYPERION TM, GANYMEDE TM, and CALLISTO TM models. These designs offer almost double the imaging range at the cost of resolution. In addition to the extended imaging depth option outlined below, we also offer systems with an 840 nm central wavelength upon request. We have an extensive design team available to discuss special sample arm probes and delivery devices that can be customized for your application. We encourage customers to contact Thorlabs to discuss how we can meet your unique imaging needs. OCT ITEM # HYPERION GANYMEDE CALLISTO A-Scan Rate 110 khz 29 khz 1.2 khz Sensitivity 86 db 91 db 105 db Maximum Imaging Depth Axial (Depth) Resolution Maximum Imaging Depth Axial (Depth) Resolution Maximum Imaging Depth Axial (Depth) Resolution Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Standard Polarization Sensitive OCT Standard System 930 nm 2.7 mm 5.8 µm (Air) 4.4 µm (Water) 2.7 mm 5.8 µm (Air) 4.4 µm (Water) 1.6 mm 7.0 µm (Air) 5.3 µm (Water) OCT Microscope System with Extended Imaging Depth Extended Imaging Depth 930 nm 5.0 mm 11 µm (Air) 5.3 µm (Water) 5.0 mm 11 µm (Air) 8.3 µm (Water) 4.5 mm 19 µm (Air) 14.2 µm (Water) OEM Besides standard products for research and development, Thorlabs also provides custom-designed OCT units to OEM customers. OCT may be the key technology needed to improve your existing product. Contact our technical support staff to discuss your application. Thorlabs can be a partner in a subset or all of the steps necessary to turn your idea into a product: Discuss New Ideas At Thorlabs we spend the time to understand customer s applications in significant detail. Along with discussing a customer s needs, we like to share our knowledge about the potential and limitations of OCT to determine together if OCT can provide a solution for a specific measurement task. Feasibility Studies To assist our customers in determining feasibility for a custom OCT design, we can provide a standard system to perform initial tests. In many cases, changes to the design of the probe or software are required to perform the measurements. We can help with the design and implementation of such changes if the customer doesn t have the required resources in house. With our existing technology base and many years of expertise, we can often reduce the feasibility phase to a few months. Custom OCT System Design Once a customer is satisfied with the results of the feasibility study, we are ready to define a custom-designed OCT unit that exactly fits the need. We choose the most economical design that gets the customer the necessary measurement. We will also meet on required certifications for the product (e.g., conformity for medical products) and all the financial details that come into play at this point. Thorlabs can provide OEM customers with a reliable supply of units from its manufacturing sites in the USA and Germany. All facilities are ISO 9001 certified. 1753

103 OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 1 of 2) Swept Source Features Long Coherence Length Provides Increased Imaging Range Polarization-Sensitive and OCT Microscope Designs Also Available OCS1300A1 SS- System Shown with PS1300A1 Polarization-Sensitive Module Thorlabs Swept Source-based Optical Coherence Tomography are ideal for imaging highly scattering samples such as small animals and biological tissue. The 1325 nm central wavelength and long coherence length of the swept laser source enable deep image penetration up to 6 mm. Compared to Spectral Domain OCT technology, Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (SS-OCT) does not suffer from inherent sensitivity degradation at longer imaging depths. Therefore, these systems are the preferred choice where long imaging depths are required. Our line of Swept Source-based OCT systems, including our Polarization-Sensitive Module (see page 1756) and OCT Microscope (see page 1757), is described on the following pages. All systems include a probe mount, computer with user software (see pages for details), and a software development kit (see below). Software Development Kit All OCT Include a Probe Mount with Sample Stage Coarse and Fine Z-Travel of Probe Sample Stage with XY Translation and Rotation Post Mounted Using DP14 Vibration Damping Ø1.5" Post on 12" x 14" Breadboard Along with high-performance user software (see pages for details), all SS-OCT include a software development kit from which the user application is built upon. C/C++, Visual Basic, and LabVIEW -Based* Interfaces Seamless Integration into User s Own Software High-Speed Processing in Both Programming Languages Includes Hardware Control, Extensive Processing Routines, Display Options, and Data Import/Export Controls Doppler Processing, Polarization-Sensitive OCT Processing, and Display Routines Chick Embryo Brain Imaging Thorlabs SS-OCT imaging systems are ideal for imaging small animals. Here we show OCT images of a chicken embryo before and after subdivision and formation of compartments within the brain. These images were acquired using Thorlabs 1325 nm SS-OCT Microscope. Transverse cross sections were compiled into volumes, which enabled the generation of 3D volumetric renderings and reconstructions. Time lapse capabilities built into the software provided real-time, noninvasive visualization of changes in morphology. Reference: B.A. Filas, et al., Annals of Biomedical Engineering 39, , *LabVIEW is a trademark of National Instruments. Thorlabs, nor any software programs or other goods or services offered by Thorlabs are affiliated with, endorsed by, or sponsored by National Instruments. Pre-Compartment Formation Post-Compartment Formation 3D Renderings 3D Reconstructions Transverse Cross- Sections Transverse Cross- Sections 1754

104 Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 2 of 2) OCS1300A1 Features Ideal for Imaging Small Animals and Highly Scattering Biological Samples Up to 6 mm Imaging Depth High-Speed Scan Rate Enables Fast Volumetric Imaging OCT OCS1300A1 System The OCS1300A1 Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) System provides the deepest imaging capability of all Thorlabs OCT systems. It utilizes a wavelength-swept, broadband laser and balanced detection scheme to produce high-quality 2D and volumetric images. Based off its OCS1300SS predecessor, the OCS1300A1 has a compact design and includes a 3D scanning probe with integrated video camera for volume imaging and live video display, respectively. The included stand with sample stage provides XY translation and rotation of the sample along with axial travel of the imaging probe. Like all of Thorlabs OCT systems, the OCS1300A1 SS-OCT system includes computer and high-performance software and arrives fully functional right out of the box. OCS1300A1 Swept Source System Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope SPECIFICATIONS* Center Wavelength 1325 nm A-Scan/Line Rate >50 khz Axial (Depth) Resolution 12 µm (Air) Lateral Resolution 25 µm Maximum FOV** (L x W x D) 10 mm x 10 mm x 6.0 mm Sensitivity 100 db Optical Power on Sample (Typical) 1.5 mw Pixels per A-Scan 1024 Pixel Depth 16 Bit *Due to ongoing developments, specifications are subject to change. Please refer to our website for the most up-to-date information. **Field of View Included with this System SS-OCT Engine with 1325 nm Swept Laser Source Imaging Module with Optical Path Length Delay and Polarization Controls 2D Scanning Probe for Acquisition of 3D Volume OCT Images Video Camera Integrated in the Scanning Probe for Live Video Imaging of the Sample Probe Stand with Sample Stage (See Page 1748) Computer and 22" Monitor High-Performance Software (See Pages ) OSC1300A1 is ideal for real-time skin imaging. Here we show images taken from the heel of a foot before (top) and after (bottom) application of moisturizer. Image size: 5 mm x 1 mm. Thorlabs SS- are undergoing significant improvements that may affect laser specifications. Software updates are also under way. Please visit our website for the most current information. OCS1300A1 CALL CALL CALL CALL 1325 nm SS- System 1755

105 OCT Polarization-Sensitive OCT Module PS-OCT System Features Add-on Module for 1325 nm SS-OCT System Contrast Based on Birefringence of Material Ideal for Imaging Biological and Industrial Materials Real-Time Display of Phase Retardation Images Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Polarization-Sensitive Optical Coherence Tomography (PS-OCT) is a cross-sectional birefringence imaging tool for a wide range of biological and industrial materials. PS- OCT is an extension of OCT that is based on measuring the polarization properties of light collected from birefringent samples. Birefringent materials decompose light into two polarization states with an optical delay being imposed on one state. Birefringence only occurs if the material is anisotropic. Materials that exhibit birefringence properties include tissues such as tendons, muscles, teeth, bones, blood vessels, and skin. In samples such as these, PS-OCT provides additional contrast compared to conventional OCT structural images. The real-time, high-resolution imaging capability of PS-OCT makes it well suited for studying glaucoma and other eye diseases, dental diseases, burn depths in the skin, and vascular imaging to guide plaque excision. Birefringence is also created in isotropic materials that have undergone a deformation such that the isotropy is lost (i.e., stress-induced birefringence). In such cases, PS-OCT is very useful for nondestructive detection of stress birefringence in industrial materials such as plastics, thin films, semiconductors, and liquid crystals. (a) Thorlabs has developed a real-time, fiberbased swept source PS-OCT imaging system that provides simultaneous crosssectional imaging of the intensity and phase retardation of light backscattered from birefringent samples. This system utilizes a standard Thorlabs 1325 nm SS-OCT Imaging System (OCS1300A7) with the PS-OCT add-on module. The modularity of the Thorlabs OCT system enables incorporation of PS-OCT imaging capability at any time. Thorlabs software package enables easy display of OCT structural or PS-OCT birefringence images. OCT structural (a) and PS-OCT phase retardation (b) images of an oxtail sample. The strong birefringence seen in the phase retardation image indicates that highly organized structures such as collagen fibrils exist in the tissue layers. (b) π 0 PS-OCT Images Imaging of a human fingernail bed, a chicken muscle, and a plastic component are shown below. The birefringence of the human fingernail bed and chicken muscle is due to intrinsic ordering of specific areas of biological tissue, while that of the component is induced by residual strain resulting from the manufacturing process. Note the significantly improved contrast in the phase retardation images (b) compared to the intensity-only images (a) typical of conventional OCT systems. (a) (a) (a) (b) (b) (b) Fingernail Chicken Muscle Plastic Component PSOCT-1300A1 CALL CALL CALL CALL Polarization-Sensitive OCT Module 1756

106 OCT on Nikon FN1 Microscope Features Ideal for Real-Time Imaging of Biological Samples Utilizes Thorlabs 1325 nm OCS1300A1 SS-OCT Engine Built Upon the Nikon Eclipse FN1 Upright Microscope Collinear Optical Design Enables Easy Registration Between OCT and Sub-Micron Imaging 2D Cross-Sectional Imaging, 3D Volumetric Imaging, and Surface Profiling Capabilities Doppler Flow Imaging Capability Included The OCS1300A1-NIK Nikon FN1 OCT Microscope is built upon Thorlabs OCS1300A nm Swept Source OCT engine, enabling 2D cross-sectional and 3D volumetric imaging, as well as surface profiling. This system includes the 1325 nm Swept Source OCT engine, Nikon FN1 Eclipse Microscope with integrated OCT scanning module, computer (with monitor), and our SS-OCT control and data acquisition software (see pages ) for details. When combined with a Nikon Eclipse FN1 upright microscope, which is designed specifically for imaging small animals and thick samples, the result is a system capable of OCT imaging. The microscope has a slim body design and long working distance for easy access to and manipulation of the sample. The video-rate imaging capability of OCT makes it an attractive tool for real-time monitoring of experimental procedures. The OCT beam path is collinear with the optical microscopy path of the FN1. This design allows users to quickly switch between OCT and submicron microscopy modalities with a simple pull of a lever. As a result, the sample does not need to be moved to switch between the modalities; hence, registration is closely maintained, and the two images can be overlaid with minimal correction. Flow imaging is also possible with the Doppler Imaging function included in the software. The OCS1300A1-NIK is delivered with Thorlabs 5X LSM03 scan lens. The system is also available with a 10X LSM02 scan lens (see page 1782) upon request (please specify at time of ordering). OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope SPECIFICATIONS OCS1300A1-NIK Microscope with OCT Scanning Module Center Wavelength 1325 nm Axial Scan Rate >50 khz (Call for Details) OCT Objective* Thorlabs LSM03 Thorlabs LSM02 Magnification 5X 10X Transverse Resolution 20.0 µm 13.0 µm Field of View 10.0 mm x 10.0 mm 5.0 mm x 5.0 mm Axial Resolution Air (Water) 12.0 µm (9.0 µm) Max Field of View 10.0 mm x 10.0 mm x 6.0 mm *See Page 1782 for OCT Objectives 6.91" (176 mm) CCD Port 0.50" (13 mm) 3.94" (100 mm) 18.48" (470 mm) 22.51" (572 mm) 1.79" (46 mm) Out Position OCT Channel Engagement Slider Adjustable Sample Height 12.34" (314 mm) 1.96" (50 mm) Optional Spacer Physiology Stages 1.06" (27 mm) 6.48" (165 mm) 12.00" (305 mm) 8.45" (215 mm) 18.00" (457 mm) PHYS24 See pages Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. OCS1300A1-NIK CALL CALL CALL CALL Nikon FN1 OCT Microscope 1757

107 OCT Overview Selection Guide Spectral Domain OCT Swept Source OCT Polarization Sensitive OCT OCT Microscope Optical Coherence Tomography Publications Thorlabs welcomes the opportunity to collaborate with fellow scientists. On this page is a select list of journal articles which utilize Thorlabs OCT products or are a result of previous and ongoing collaborations with researchers in the advanced imaging community. If you would like Thorlabs to highlight any recent work that may have resulted from a Thorlabs OCT system or component, we encourage you to contact us. Developmental Biology Mechanical Stress as a Regulator of Cytoskeletal Contractility and Nuclear Shape in Embryonic Epithelia, B. A. Filas, P. V. Bayly, and L. A. Taber, Ann. Biomed. Eng. 39, 443 (2011). Live Imaging of Blood Flow in Mammalian Embryos Using Doppler Swept-Source Optical Coherence Tomography, I. V. Larina, M. E. Dickenson, N. Sudheendran, M. Ghosn, K. V. Larin, J. Jiang, and A. Cable, Journal of Biomedical Optics Letters, 13, (2008). Doppler Optical Cardiogram Gated 2D Color Flow Imaging at 1000 fps and 4D in vivo Visualization of Embryonic Heart at 45 fps on a Swept Source OCT System, A. Mariampillai, B. A. Standish, N. R. Munce, C. Randall, G. Liu, J. Y. Jiang, A. E. Cable, I. A. Vitkin, and V. X. D. Yang, Optics Express, 15 (2007). Vascular Imaging Speckle Variance of the Vasculature in Live Mammalian Embryos N. Sudheendran, S. H. Syed, M. E. Dickinson, I. V. Larina, and K. V. Larin, Laser Physics Letters, 8, 247 (2011). Rapid Volumetric Angiography of Cortical Microvasculature with Optical Coherence Tomography, V. J. Srinivasan, J. Y. Jiang, M. A. Yaseen, H. Radhakrishnan, W. Wu, S. Barry, A. E. Cable, and D. A. Boas, Optics Letters, 35 (2010). Blood-Vessel Closure Using Photosensitizers Engineered for Two-Photon Excitation, H. A. Collins, M. Khurana, E. H. Moriyama, A. Mariampillai, E. Dahlstedt, M. Balaz, M. K. Kuimova, M. Drobizhev, V. X. D. Yang, D. Phillips, A. Rebane, B. C. Wilson, and H. L. Anderson, Nature Photonics (2008). Speckle Variance Detection of Microvasculature Using Swept-Source Optical Coherence Tomography, A. Mariampillai, B. A. Standish, E. H. Moriyama, M. Khurana, N. R. Munce, M. K. K. Leung, J. Jiang, A. Cable, B. C. Wilson, I. A. Vitkin, and V. X. D. Yang, Optics Letters, 33 (2008). Biomedical Detecting Cell Death with Optical Coherence Tomography and Envelope Statistics, G. Farhat, V. X. D. Yang, G. J. Czarnota, and M. C. Kolios, J. Biomed. Opt. 16, (2011). Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) Reveals Depth-Resolved Dynamics During Functional Brain Activation, Y. Chen, A. D. Aguirre, L. Ruvinskaya, A. Devor, D. A. Boas, and J. G. Fujimoto, Journal of Neuroscience Methods, 178, (2009). Co-Registered Optical Coherence Tomography and Fluorescence Molecular Imaging for Simultaneous Morphological and Molecular Imaging, S. Yuan, C. A. Roney, J. Wierwille, C. W. Chen, B. Xu, G. Griffiths, J. Jiang, H. Ma, A. Cable, R. M. Summers, Y. Chen, Physics in Medicine and Biology, 55, (2010). Optical Coherence Tomography of Human Kidney, M. L. Onozato, P. M. Andrews, Q. Li, J. Jiang, A. Cable, Y. Chen, Journal of Urology, 183, (2010). Parametric Imaging of Cancer with Optical Coherence Tomography, R. A. McLaughlin, L. Scolaro, P. Robbins, C. Saunders, S. L. Jacques, D. D. Sampson, J. Biomed. Opt., 15, (2010). Depth-Resolved Imaging and Detection of Micro-Retroreflectors within Biological Tissue Using Optical Coherence Tomography, S. N. Ivers, S. A. Baranov, T. Sherlock, K. Kourentzi, P. Ruchhoeft, R. Willson, and K. V. Larin, Biomed. Opt. Express, 1, (2010). Combined Impedance Spectroscopy and Fourier Domain Optical Coherence Tomography to Monitor Cells in Three-Dimensional Structures, Pierre O. Bagnaninchi, Int. J. Artif. Organs, 33, (2010). For a complete list of publications using Thorlabs OCT products, see our website: /OCTPublications Industrial Investigation of the Mesoscale Structure and Volumetric Features of Biofilms Using Optical Coherence Tomography, M. Wagner, D. Taherzadeh, C. Haisch, and H. Horn, Biotechnol. Bioeng., 107, (2010). Application of Optical Coherence Tomography to Automated Contact Lens Metrology, B. R. Davidson, and J. K. Barton, Journal of Biomedical Optics, 15, (2010). Imaging Pharmaceutical Tablets with Optical Coherence Tomography, J. M. A. Mauritz, R. S. Morrisby, R. S. Hutton, C. H. Legge, and C. F. Kaminski, Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 99 (2009). Comparison of Three-Dimensional Optical Coherence Tomography and High Resolution Photography for Art Conservation Studies, D. C. Adler, J. Stenger, I. Gorczynska, H. Lie, T. Hensick, R. Spronk, S. Wolohojian, N. Khandekar, J. Y. Jiang, S. Barry, A. E. Cable, R. Huber, and J. G. Fujimoto, Optics Express, 15, (2007). Opthamalogy Ultrahigh Speed 1050 nm Swept Source / Fourier Domain OCT Retinal and Anterior Segment Imaging at 100,000 to 400,000 Axial Scans per Second, B. Potsaid, B. Baumann, D. Huang, S. Barry, A. E. Cable, J. S. Schuman, J. S. Duker, and J. G. Fujimoto, Optics Express, 18, (2010). Ultrahigh Speed Spectral / Fourier Domain OCT Ophthalmic Imaging at 70,000 to 312,000 Axial Scans per Second, B. Potsaid, I. Gorczynska, V. J. Srinivasan, Y. Chen, J. Jiang, A. Cable, and J. G. Fujimoto, Optics Express, 16 (2008). High-Speed, High-Resolution Optical Coherence Tomography Retinal Imaging with a Frequency-Swept Laser at 850 nm, V. J. Srinivasan, R. Huber, I. Gorczynska, J. G. Fujimoto, J. Y. Jiang, P. Reisen, and A. E. Cable, Optics Letters, 32 (4),

108 Selection Guide LASER SCANNING MICROSCOPY MICROSCOPY COMPONENTS OCT IMAGING SYSTEMS OCT COMPONENTS ADAPTIVE OPTICS Pages Pages Pages Pages Pages OCT Selection Guide Light Sources Pages Balanced Detectors Pages Interferometers Pages Fiber Pages Polarization Controllers Page 1776 Pages Optics Pages Resolution Targets Page

109 OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets High-Speed MEMS-Tunable VCSEL for Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 1 of 4) Thorlabs is dedicated to developing leading-edge optical coherence tomography (OCT) systems and components that will help advance our customers research and development efforts. One significant effort is focused on the development of OCT sources that will push the limits with regards to bandwidth, imaging speed, and coherence length. Through a strategic partnership with Praevium Research, we have developed a patented ultra broadband, 1325 nm superluminescent diode light source that enables highresolution OCT imaging (see pages 1764 and 1765 for details). Building upon the established success of this partnership, Thorlabs and Praevium are now developing a high-speed MEMS-tunable VCSEL for high-speed swept source OCT applications. This project is one of great excitement for us at Thorlabs, as well as for the OCT community. In this article we will describe the motivation, goals, and promising preliminary results of a MEMS-tunable VCSEL for Swept Source OCT. Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) is a noninvasive imaging modality that is capable of rapidly producing micron-scale, cross sectional and volumetric images. Over the past several years, significant technological advancements of OCT have resulted in major developments of the application of OCT imaging systems to areas of medical imaging such as ophthalmology, dermatology, and cardiology. The ability to noninvasively and rapidly collect 3D volume images allows for the visualization of rapid changes in tissue architecture and sample manipulations, such as taking virtual histological slices. To reach its full potential, however, there are still some technological barriers where OCT falls short. Limitations that exist in current OCT systems include insufficient scan speeds, limited depth of view, and cost. To address these limitations, Thorlabs has partnered with Praevium. Founded in 2001, Praevium Research develops semiconductor-based light emitting devices such as superluminescent diodes (SLDs), as well as both edgeemitting and vertical cavity lasers. Praevium s early development work on a wideband tuning VCSEL demonstrated great promise to serve as a light source that will Deflecting Membrane Multiple Quantum Well Active Region Fully Oxidized Dielectric Mirror Substrate Diagram of MEMS-Tunable VCSEL Emission Air Gap MEMS Dielectric Mirror MEMS Actuator Top Contact Antireflection Coating MEMS Actuator Bottom Contact Praevium s MEMS-Tunable VCSEL is an innovative design that offers high speed and broadband emission with long coherence length. This is an ideal combination for an OCT swept laser source. surpass current OCT limitations. Building upon the same model that led to Thorlabs release of the 1325 nm broadband (SLD1325) and extended bandwidth (LS2000B) light sources for OCT, Praevium Research, Thorlabs, and collaborators at MIT have set out to develop a wideband, high-speed MEMS-tunable VCSEL light source for OCT applications. VCSEL Overview Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Lasers (VCSELs) are semiconductorbased devices that emit light perpendicular to the chip surface (see illustration above). VCSELs were originally developed as low-cost, low-power alternatives to edge-emitting diodes, mainly for high-volume datacom applications. Quickly thereafter, the advantages of VCSELs became evident, leading to them being preferred light sources over edge-emitters in many applications. Compared to edge-emitting sources, VCSELs offer superior output beam quality, lower manufacturing costs, and single mode operation. In 2009, Thorlabs and Praevium Research entered into a partnership where Thorlabs provided monetary, personnel, and equipment support to Praevium in exchange for commercialization rights to wideband superluminescent diodes and MEMS-tunable VCSEL light sources. This is the ideal partnership where Praevium gains access to arguably the world s largest tool box of photonics equipment while leveraging Thorlabs manufacturing capabilities and sales channels. Meanwhile, continuing the dedication to its customers, Thorlabs has the special opportunity to serve the photonics community by providing these unique devices, which have been born from Praevium s innovations. LS2000B 1325 nm Extended Broadband SLD Light Source SLD nm Superluminescent Diode 1760

110 High-Speed MEMS-Tunable VCSEL for Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 2 of 4) MEMS-tunable VCSELs can be densely packed on a single wafer to increase the potential yield. Shown above is a typical VCSEL wafer. The inset shows a single MEMS-tunable VCSEL device after fabrication. The overall size of the MEMS-tunable VCSEL is approximately 600 µm x 600 µm square. MEMS-tunable VCSELs utilize micro-electromechanical mirror systems (MEMS) to vary the cavity length of the laser, thereby tuning the output wavelength. MEMS-tunable VCSELs have existed for several years; however, the limited tuning range and output power of these devices have precluded them from being used in OCT applications. Praevium Research, in collaboration with Thorlabs and MIT, have since developed a MEMS-tunable VCSEL design that overcomes these previous limitations. In order for a MEMS-tunable VCSEL to be successful for applications in OCT, it needs to meet certain standards: Rapid Sweep Speed Broad Tuning Range Long Coherence Length High Laser Output Power Low Cost Rapid Sweep Speed Applications using OCT demand high-speed imaging without sacrificing current imaging quality. Fast imaging rates allow better time resolution, dense collection of 3D datasets, and decreased laser exposure times to the sample. Currently, there exists a few swept laser sources that offer highspeed scanning. Fourier domain mode-locked lasers, for example, achieve extremely high imaging speeds but require the use of very long fiber optic delays in the laser cavity and can only operate in wavelength ranges were fiber loss is low. Of the commercially available high-speed swept lasers, many operate with multiple longitudinal modes or have long cavity lengths, which limits coherence length or tuning speed, respectively. The low mass of the MEMS-tuning mirror in a MEMS-based tunable VCSEL and the short cavity length both contribute to its high-speed operation. The short cavity length also places only one mode in the gain spectrum, enabling single-mode continuous tuning. In addition, the short cavity design enables nearly identical spectra in the forward and backward sweeps. We have recently measured greater than 500 khz sweep rates using a MEMStunable VCSEL prototype, without using optical multiplexing to increase the sweep speed. Broad Tuning Range High-resolution imaging depends on the overall tuning bandwidth of the swept laser source. Praevium boasts the broadest bandwidth MEMS-tunable VCSEL that has ever been developed. A unique design incorporating broadband fully oxidized mirrors, wideband gain regions, and thin active regions, has currently resulted in a remarkable 110 nm of continuous mode-hop-free tuning, centered around 1300 nm (see below). Long Coherence Length A significant limitation to most OCT systems is the depth-of-view (maximum imaging depth range). Especially in clinical applications, where sample thickness, patient motion, and sample location cannot be controlled, a long depth-of-view is advantageous. A long coherence length alone, however, is not enough. Image sensitivity needs to be virtually unaffected throughout the entire depth. Due to the micron-scale cavity length of the VCSEL and single mode-hop-free operation, we have measured coherence lengths of greater than 25 mm from our Intensity (db) Static Tuning of MEMS-Tuning VCSEL 110 nm Wavelength (nm) MEMS-tunable VCSELS are capable of tuning over 100 nm. Here we show single mode operation over a 110 nm spectral tuning range centered at 1300 nm. OCT image of human finger pad acquired using a MEMS-tunable VCSEL driven at 500 khz. Image size: 4096 lines, 5 mm x 2 mm (width x depth). OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets 1761

111 OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller High-Speed MEMS-Tunable VCSEL for Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 3 of 4) Intensity (a.u.) Output Spectrum of MEMS-Tunable VCSEL Post-Amplification >100 nm Tuning Range Wavelength (nm) The MEMS-tunable VCSEL supports >100 nm of continuous mode-hop free spectral tuning. Shown here is a spectral measurement taken from a prototype MEMS-tunable VCSEL operating at 200 khz, with center wavelength around 1310 nm, and post-amplification using an SOA. Continuous development of these sources has indicated the capability of tuning over 110 nm of bandwidth. B A C D E F Fabrication of a MEMS-Tunable VCSEL The VCSEL wafer process begins with a multiple quantum well (MQW) active region (A) that is grown on an InP substrate (B) and bonded to a GaAs-based mirror (C) grown on a GaAs substrate (D). The InP substrate is chemically etched down to a strategically located stop-etch layer (E). The GaAs-based mirror is oxidized to create a wideband dielectric mirror (F). Optics Resolution Targets MEMS-tunable VCSEL with nearly no signal degradation. Currently limited by detector bandwidth, we are confident that the MEMStunable VCSEL is able to achieve even longer imaging depths than have been measured to date. This remarkable depth-of-view will not only benefit the medical OCT imaging community but also open doors to other applications such as large objective surface profiling, fast frequency domain reflectometry, and fast spectroscopic measurements with high spectral resolution. High Output Power Increased imaging speed often comes at the cost of decreased output power and/or optical power on the sample. One advantage of edgeemitting light sources over VCSELs is that they can emit greater output powers. As a general rule, most OCT imaging applications need a minimum of 20 mw of laser output power to maintain image quality when operating at faster scan rates. To reach this goal, the MEMStunable VCSEL is coupled with a semiconductor optical amplifier (SOA) to achieve greater than 30 mw of power. An additional advantage of this post-amplification scheme is that the SOA reshapes the MEMS-VCSEL output spectrum such that it is more uniform. Low Cost Although OCT was originally developed for medical imaging applications, the high cost is still prohibitive to allowing wide spread adoption across medical applications, such as dermatology and dentistry, and geographical markets, such as China and India. A unique aspect about MEMS-tunable VCSELs compared to other OCT swept laser sources is that both the gain material and tuning element are integrated onto a single chip. Existing laser sources require separate manufacturing and assembly of the gain media (e.g., BOA) and tuning element (e.g., MEMS mirror). Although the manufacturing process of MEMStunable VCSELs are more involved than edge-emitters, we envision that the overall cost per source can be less. VCSELs can be tested throughout the manufacturing process, while still at the wafer level including final functional testing. Also, since VCSELs emit from the top surface, they can be more densely packed within a wafer. These two aspects, along with the integrated manufacturing of the gain media and tuning element, potentially result in a much higher device yield, which translates to a lower manufacturing cost per device. G L H I K J After removal of the stop-etch layer, an AR coating (G) and annular MEMS bottom actuator contact (H) are deposited on top of the MQW active region. Next, a sacrificial layer (I) of a specifically designed thickness and composition is deposited. A membrane layer (J) and annular top MEMS actuator contact (K) are then deposited on top of the sacrificial layer. Finally, a dielectric mirror (L) is deposited and patterned. The top MEMS contact is further patterned to complete creation of the actuator. The sacrificial layer is undercut to leave a suspended, movable top mirror above the MQW structure, producing a VCSEL with MEMS-based tuning element in a single device. 1762

112 High-Speed MEMS-Tunable VCSEL for Swept Source Optical Coherence Tomography (Page 4 of 4) a b c The MEMS-tunable VCSEL cavity consists of very few optical components which can often cause noise and etalon-based artifacts. As shown in this series of images of a roll of scotch tape, the individual layers of the roll of tape can be resolved at different reference arm delays, (a) 0.5 mm, (b) 2.5 mm and (c) 5.0 mm. The total display depth range in these images is 8 mm. A special feature of the MEMS-tunable VCSEL is that it is scalable for different wavelengths. Through innovative combinations of gain materials and dielectric mirrors, a wide wavelength range in the visible to near infrared can be reached, enabling expansion of this new family of light sources. Along with all the development work required to design a MEMStunable VCSEL, Thorlabs is ramping up to support production of these OCT Images Using MEMS-VCSEL devices. Building off of a thirteen-year history of manufacturing of semiconductor-based components, Thorlabs Quantum Electronics (TQE) division is well positioned for manufacturing these devices at their 40,000 ft 2 facility. At TQE there already exists a semiconductor fabrication and device packaging facility that will be further expanded for MEMS-tunable VCSEL manufacturing. Additionally, skilled personnel are already available who have years of experience in volume manufacturing of semiconductor active optical devices such as lasers, SLDs, amplifiers, and modulators. Beyond the already existing wafer fabrication capability and hermetic packaging knowledge, additional capabilities and equipment are necessary to accommodate mass production of MEMS-tunable VCSELs. Thorlabs is dedicated to building the infrastructure and capabilities towards making these devices available to not only the clinical imaging market but also core researchers who desire such sources for their particular integration or application. With the proper design, MEMS-tunable VCSELs are capable of advancing optical coherence tomography into new applications and markets. Unlike other commercially available swept laser sources for OCT, the MEMS-tunable VCSEL can provide high-speed, a wide spectral tuning range, and extra long coherence length in a single device. As we develop this light source, we look forward to finding new and exciting applications for its use. Updates on this technology will be posted at. Please contact us to discuss how a MEMS-tunable VCSEL may advance your research. OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets En face (XY) OCT images of a plant leaf acquired with a MEMS-tunable OCT system operating at 200 khz line rate. Image size: 6 mm (L) x 6 mm (W) x 100 um step (D) Cross-sectional OCT image of human fingertip, acquired at 100 khz line rate using MEMS-tunable VCSEL; Image size: 16 mm (L) x 8 mm (D) Thorlabs Quantum Electronics (TQE), formerly Covega Corp., is vertically integrated with full in-house III-V Semiconductor and Lithium Niobate wafer fabrication capabilities. Our wafer fabrication area features both Class 100 and 1000 cleanrooms with photolithography, etching, thin-film deposition, dicing, and optical coating for volume manufacturing of opto-electronic components. An additional Class 10,000 cleanroom boasts auto laser welding and auto die attachment for opto-electronic packaging. TQE also has experience producing module-level products such as wide bandwidth, swept source tunable lasers. Once ready for release, TQE will be the ideal home for manufacturing of our MEMS-tunable VCSELs. 1763

113 OCT Superluminescent Diode Light Source for OCT Features Integrated TEC and Thermistor for Temperature Control and Enhanced Output Stability Integrated Optical Isolator FC/APC-Terminated Fiber Pigtail Minimizes Optical Feedback Hermetically Sealed 14-Pin Butterfly Package Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets The SLD1325 is a high-power, broadband 1325 nm Superluminescent Diode (SLD). It is hermetically sealed in a 14-pin butterfly package and includes a built-in thermoelectric cooler and thermistor for temperature control. Each device goes through burn-in screening, mechanical robustness testing, and characterization testing before being packaged. The output is coupled into an SM fiber terminated with an FC/APC connector. SLDs in butterfly packages are excellent high-power broadband light sources for use as ASE Light Sources and in applications like Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) Imaging and Fiber Optic Gyroscopes (FOGs). Each SLD is shipped with its own characterization sheet. Normalized Intensity Typical Emission Spectra of an SLD Wavelength (nm) SLD1325 Manufactured by Thorlabs at our Quantum Electronics Division located in Jessup, Maryland. SPECIFICATIONS Central Wavelength 1325 nm Bandwidth (FWHM) >100 nm Fiber-Coupled Power >10 mw SLD Injection Current (Max) 780 ma Voltage (Max) 4 V Operating Temperature Range 0 40 C Isolation of Integrated Isolator >30 db Fiber Pigtail SMF-28e+ Fiber Length ~1 m Fiber Connector FC/APC Return Loss of FC/APC Connector >50 db Thermoelectric Cooler Current (Max) 4 A Thermoelectric Cooler Voltage (Max) 4 V Thermistor Resistance* 10 kω *Steinhart - Hart Coefficients: C 1 = , C 2 = , and C 3 = SLD1325 $ 3, , ,00 25, FC/APC-Pigtailed SLD, 1325 nm, >10 mw, >100 nm FWHM Narrowband SLD Butterfly Laser Diode Mount Center Wavelengths of 1050 nm or 1310 nm <50 nm FWHM 14-Pin Butterfly Package FC/APC Connector SLD10215 Laser Diode Mount for 14-Pin Butterfly Package Laser-Enabled LED Indicator User-Defined Pin Out Configuration LM14S2 See page 1356 See page

114 Extended Broadband SLD Light Source for OCT : >170 nm FWHM LS2000B Extended Broadband SLD Light Source for High Resolution OCT In OCT imaging systems, the optical bandwidth of the light source is inversely proportional to the axial resolution. To provide higher axial resolution than currently possible with a single SLD, we offer an extended broadband SLD light source, which contains two SLDs. The output of the two fiber-pigtailed SLDs are fiber coupled to provide a single extended bandwidth (>170 nm) light source. This extended light source can be used in OCT imaging systems to produce images with a resolution of ~3 µm in biological (n = 1.33) samples. The LS2000B extended broadband SLD light source packages the matched-pair SLDs into a single compact housing measuring 12.6" x 10.6" x 2.5" (320 mm x 269 mm x 64 mm). The LS2000B front panel provides independent control of the output of each SLD. In addition, each SLD has a front panel enable/disable output button as well as a reset to the factory configuration. There are four FC/APC fiber connectors in the front panel. Two are for access to the output of each SLD, while the other two provide extended bandwidth output from the combined pair of SLDs. Each combo-channel provides a bandwidth in excess of 170 nm and output power greater than 10 mw. Features Dual SLD Light Sources for Broadband Spectral Output 1325 nm Center Wavelength Fiber-Coupled Power >10 mw Independent Enable/Disable and Output Power Control for Each SLD Remote Control via USB SPECIFICATIONS Matched-Pair SLD Characteristics Channels SLD Output SLD A SLD B A + B Central Wavelength (Typical) 1225 nm 1340 nm 1300 nm FWHM Wavelength (Typical) 80 nm 110 nm 200 nm 10dB Bandwidth (Typical) 100 nm 150 nm 235 nm Fiber-Coupled Power >10 mw per channel Noise, Typical <0.2% (Source Dependent) Controller Characteristics Adjustment Range 0 - Full Power Temperature Control to C Operating Temperature C Fiber/Connector SMF-28e+, FC/APC SLD A SLD B Optical Switches Optical Switches 2 x 2 Coupler Output: SLD A Output: SLD B Output: SLD A + SLD B Output: SLD A + SLD B OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Emission Intensity (µw) FWHM -80 nm Sample SLD Emission SLD A FWHM -110 nm SLD B Wavelength (nm) * * 10 5 Sample SLD Emission Ch3 SLD A+B < 3dB FWHM ~ 200 nm Ch4 SLD A+B Wavelength (nm) * Spectral noise at longer wavelengths are artifacts caused from water absorption in the optical spectrum analyzer Emission Intensity (µw) LS2000B $ 12, , ,00 102, Extended Broadband SLD Light Source, 1325 nm, >170 nm 1765

115 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets OCT-Proven Balanced Detectors (Page 1 of 2) PDB420C Image quality in an OCT system can be improved by utilizing a balanced detection scheme, which improves the signal-to-noise ratio by commonmode rejection and autocorrelated noise suppression. Thorlabs offers a broad range of balanced detectors to cover different bandwidth and wavelengths from nm. All the detectors are optimized for low DC offset and high transimpedance gain. The active low-pass anti-aliasing filter helps to remove the frequency aliasing effect associated with highfrequency signal digitization processes. These balanced detectors are widely used in Thorlabs Swept Source OCT imaging systems. Noise Reduction The detectors consist of two balanced photodetectors and an ultra-low noise, high-speed transimpedance amplifier. The two photodetectors are matched to achieve an excellent common mode rejection ratio, leading to better noise reduction. Operation Thorlabs Balanced Amplified Photodetectors consist of two well-matched photodiodes and an ultra-low noise, high-speed transimpedance amplifier (TIA) that generates an output voltage (RF OUTPUT) proportional to the difference between the photocurrents in the two photodiodes (i.e., the two optical input signals). Additionally, the unit has two fast monitor outputs (MONITOR+ and MONITOR-) to observe the optical input power levels on each photodiode separately. Responsivity (A/W) Features Improves SNR in SS-OCT Set Ups Operating Wavelength nm (Si) nm (InGaAs) Bandwidth DC to 15 MHz (PDB440) DC to 75 MHz (PDB420) DC to 100 MHz (PDB410) DC to 200 MHz (PDB460) High Transimpedance Gain 250 x 10³ V/A (PDB420) 51 x 10³ V/A (PDB440) Less than ±2 mv of DC Offset Excellent Common Mode Rejection (See Specs Table) Ultra Low Noise Free Space & Fiber Input Options Switchable Power Supply Included PDB4 Series Responsivity PDB4xxA PDB4xxC Wavelength (nm) Full Range of Balanced Detectors, Including AC-Coupled Versions See page 1582 PDB440C Connectors These balanced detectors come with two removable FC input connectors (please note that for PDB460C the FC adapter is not removable). Three SMA electrical connectors provide the balanced output signal plus a fast power monitor for each of the two input signals. These two monitors enable the control of the input power levels. Packaging/Power Supply Housed in a shielded aluminum enclosure measuring 85 mm x 80 mm x 30 mm (3.3" x 3.1" x 1.2"), these detectors are post mountable using the included adapter plate, which can be attached to the bottom or side of the housing with the included 8-32 (M4) screws. The unit is powered with the provided ±12 V DC power supply. The input voltage of 110 V or 230 V can be manually selected by a switch. 1766

116 OCT-Proven Balanced Detectors (Page 2 of 2) ITEM # PDB440A PDB420A PDB440C PDB420C Detector Type Si/PIN Si/PIN InGaAs/PIN InGaAs/PIN Wavelength Range nm nm nm nm Bandwidth (3 db) DC 15 MHz DC 75 MHz DC 15 MHz DC 75 MHz Peak Responsivity 0.53 A/W 0.53 A/W 1.0 A/W 1.0 A/W Active Detector Diameter 0.8 mm 0.8 mm 0.3 mm 0.3 mm Common Mode Rejection Ratio Transimpedance Gain* 51 x 10 3 V/A 250 x 10 3 V/A 51 x 10 3 V/A 250 x 10 3 V/A Conversion Gain RF-Output 27 x 10 3 V/W 133 x 10 3 V/W 51 x 10 3 V/W 250 x 10 3 V/W Conversion Gain Monitor Output nm nm >35 db nm nm CW Saturation Power RF-Output nm nm nm nm NEP DC - 10 MHz (Min) 6.4 pw / Hz 6.5 pw / Hz 3.3 pw / Hz 3.5 pw / Hz Optical Inputs Photodiode Damage Threshold FC/PC or FC/APC (Removable) 20 mw OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller RF Output Impedance * Transimpedance Gain is reduced by a factor of two for 50 Ohm loads 50 Ω Optics Resolution Targets ITEM # PDB410A PDB460A PDB410C PDB460C Detector Type Si/PIN Si/PIN InGaAs/PIN InGaAs/PIN Wavelength Range nm nm nm nm Bandwidth (3 db) DC 100 MHz DC 200 MHz DC 100 MHz DC 200 MHz Peak Responsivity 0.53 A/W 0.50 A/W 1.0 A/W 1.0 A/W Active Detector Diameter 0.8 mm 0.4 mm 0.3 mm 0.15 mm Common Mode Rejection Ratio >25 db (>35 db Typical) Transimpedance Gain* 50 x 10 3 V/A 30 x 10 3 V/A 50 x 10 3 V/A 30 x 10 3 V/A Conversion Gain RF-Output 26.5 x 10 3 V/W 16 x 10 3 V/W 50 x 10 3 V/W 30 x 10 3 V/W Conversion Gain Monitor Output nm nm 10 nm nm CW Saturation Power RF-Output nm nm nm nm NEP DC - 10 MHz (Min) 7 pw / Hz 13.2 pw / Hz 3.8 pw / Hz 6.0 pw / Hz Optical Inputs** FC/PC or FC/APC (Removable) FC/PC or FC/APC (Not Removable) Photodiode Damage Threshold RF Output Impedance 20 mw 50 Ω * Transimpedance Gain is reduced by a factor of two for 50 Ohm loads ** For Model PDB460C the FC adapter is not removable ITEM #* $ RMB DESCRIPTION PDB440A $ 1, ,75 10, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, Si, 15 MHz PDB440C $ 1, , ,70 11, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, InGaAs, 15 MHz PDB420A $ 1, ,01 9, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, Si, 75 MHz PDB420C $ 1, ,70 10, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, InGaAs, 75 MHz PDB410A $ 1, ,00 8, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, Si, 100 MHz PDB410C $ 1, ,50 9, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, InGaAs, 100 MHz PDB460A $ 1, ,15 10, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, Si, 200 MHz PDB460C $ 1, ,41 10, Balanced Amplified Photodetector, Fixed Gain, InGaAs, 200 MHz * Add -AC to the itme number for a version with AC-Coupling 1767

117 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Polarization Diversity, Balanced Detector The INT-POL-1300 is a pair of integrated balanced detectors that are used to analyze the S and P States of Polarization (SOP) of two input signals independently. This compact system is designed for polarization-sensitive optical coherence tomography (OCT) applications, but it also can be used in any application where the difference between two signals has to be analyzed with a high degree of sensitivity. Balanced Receiver Functionality The S and P polarization states of the input are split using a polarizing beamsplitter (PBS) and directed into two balanced detectors, one for each SOP. The receiver is comprised of two balanced photodetectors and an ultra-low-noise, high-speed transimpedance amplifier. The balanced detectors also have active lowpass filters to prevent aliasing effects and to suppress out-of-band noise effectively. These balanced photodetectors operate in the same manner as our PDB400 Series of OCT Balanced Detectors; they subtract the two optical input signals from each other resulting in the cancellation of common mode noise. Connectors Optical signals are coupled to the photodiodes via two FC/APC input connectors. The unit has six electrical SMA output connectors, three for each polarization state. One of the three outputs provides the balanced signal and the other two are the power monitor outputs. The monitor outputs allow the user to observe the effect of changes to the power or SOP of the input signals. The device is powered via a ±12 VDC input connector (power supply included). Responsivity (A/W) Signal In Signal In Responsivity for Photodiodes in INT-POL-1300 Balanced Dectector Package Wavelength (nm) Balanced Detector S Beamsplitter PBS Splitter PBS S P S P Balanced Detector P Monitor + Monitor RF Output Monitor + Monitor RF Output ITEM # Optical Parameters Wavelength Range (Beamsplitter Limited) Fiber Type Optical Connectors Extinction Ratio (PBS) Max Input Power 1300 nm Electrical Parameter Detector Material/Type Detector Wavelength Range Typical Max Responsivity Output Bandwidth RF Output Output Bandwidth Monitor Output Transimpedance Gain Conversion Gain Monitor Outputs Saturation Power Electrical Output/Impedance DC Offset Features Integrated Signal Detection with Active Aliasing Filter Fast Monitor Outputs for External Polarization Adjustment Excellent Common Mode Rejection Matched S and P Optical Path Lengths Custom Designs & Volume Pricing Available INT-POL nm Corning SMF-28e+ FC/APC Power Supply ±12 V, 250 ma Custom Designs Available (Please Call for Details) INT-POL-1300 $ 2, , ,00 19, Polarization Dependent, Balanced Detector, nm 22 db 20 mw InGaAs/PIN nm 1.0 A/W DC 15 MHz DC - 5 MHz 50 x 10³ V/A 5 V/mW nm SMA, 50 Ω ±10 mv 1768

118 Mach-Zehnder Interferometer Module Features Three Models Available with 850 nm, 1050 nm, or 1300 nm Center Wavelength Ideal for Swept Source Output Frequency Monitoring with Balanced Detection Output Insertion Loss: <3 db Flat Wavelength Response Integrated Signal Detection for Power Monitor and k-clock Signals Compact Design Power Supply Included Custom Models & Volume Pricing Available INT-MZI-1300 Imaging OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Thorlabs series of Mach-Zehnder interferometer modules are designed to be used for swept source OCT systems with a central wavelength of 850 nm, 1050 nm, or 1300 nm. The internal fiber couplers are optimized for flat wavelength responses and coupling losses that have a very low polarization dependence, which make the output signals independent of input polarization changes. The modules have an integrated detection circuit with an ultra-low noise, high-speed transimpedance amplifier to provide a power monitor signal as well as a k-clock signal to monitor both the output power and wavelength of a swept laser source. Both outputs have a 200 MHz bandwidth, and the k-clock uses a balanced detection scheme to maximize rejection of common mode noise. Figure 1. Sample Setup of INT-MZI-1300 Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets ITEM # INT-MZI-850 INT-MZI-1050 INT-MZI-1300 Wavelength Range nm nm nm Free Spectral Range* 103 GHz (±5%) Insertion Loss** <1.5 db (Typical), 3 db (Max) <1.0 db (Typical), 3 db (Max) Power Monitor Bandwidth MZI Output Bandwidth DC 200 MHz (3 db) DC 200 MHz (3 db) Fiber 780-HP 980-HP SMF-28e+ Dimensions (W x H x D) 120 mm x 80 mm x 16 mm (4.72" x 3.15" x 0.63") *Custom models with choice of Free Spectral Range are available; please contact technical support for more information. **Includes connector losses fo the input and output pigtail, measured at central wavelength Rapidly swept laser sources typically use sinusoidal tuning elements to achieve the very fast optical frequency sweep speeds required for OCT imaging applications. Accurate and reliable re-calibration of the OCT signal is required so that the final data points are evenly spaced in frequency. The Thorlabs swept source laser features a built-in Mach- Zehnder Interferometer (MZI) with balanced detector output that can be used for just this purpose. A frequency clock is derived from the zero crossings of the MZI interference fringe signal; these zero crossings are equally spaced in optical frequency (k-space). INT-MZI-850 $ 1, , ,00 14, nm, 103 GHz FSR, Mach-Zehnder Interferometer Clock Box INT-MZI-1050 $ 1, , ,00 14, nm, 103 GHz FSR, Mach-Zehnder Interferometer Clock Box INT-MZI-1300 $ 1, , ,00 14, nm, 103 GHz FSR, Mach-Zehnder Interferometer Clock Box 1769

119 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Michelson-Type Interferometer Modules INT-MSI-1300B Custom Models & Volume Pricing Available Features <5 db Coupling Loss Flat Wavelength Response (See Figure 2) Input for Aiming Beam (660 nm) to Aid Alignment Power Supply Included DC to 15 MHz and DC to 100 MHz Bandwidth Thorlabs Michelson Interferometer Modules ease the task of building OCT imaging systems for both our research and industry customers. It contains a fiber coupler network with outputs for both reference and sample arms. The internal couplers are optimized to have a flat wavelength response and low polarization dependent coupling losses to ensure the output signal is insensitive to changes in the input polarization. The INT-MSI-1300 and INT-MSI-1300B have an integrated balanced detector based on two InGaAs photodetectors. This detection circuit is designed for a signal bandwidth from DC to 15 MHz and DC to 100 MHz, respectively, and high transimpedance gain (51 kv/a, 100 kv/a, respectively) for use in high sensitivity Swept Source OCT applications. The modules also feature an additional input for a 660 nm (±30 nm) aiming laser to assist in the alignment of the sample arm OCT beam. The housing includes FC/APC-angled fiber adapters for easy coupling to both the sample and reference arms of an OCT system. Scanning Mirror Reference Arm Sample Sample Arm 50/50 INT-MSI-1300 WDM Circulator Figure 1. Sample Setup of INT-MSI-1300 in an OCT system Aiming Laser Broadband Source Data Acquisition Device ITEM # INT-MSI-1300 INT-MSI-1300B Figure 2. Coupling of the INT-MSI-1300/INT-MSI- 1300B measured from the 1300 nm IN port to the SAMPLE and REFERENCE ARM ports. Internal Fiber Network Figure 1 shows a sample setup of the INT-MSI-1300 in an OCT system. The incoming broadband light source, which has a central wavelength of 1300 nm, passes through a circulator and a broadband 50/50 coupler. Back-reflected light from both the sample and reference arms of the interferometer are combined in the 50/50 coupler, generating the interference fringe signals that pass through the circulator and the WDM coupler to the inputs Wavelength Range nm Detector Material/Type InGaAs/PIN Output Bandwidth (3 db) DC to 15 MHz DC to 100 MHz Transimpedance Gain 51 kv/a 100 kv/a Saturation Power** 70 µw 35 µw Input Power Laser (Max)** 250 mw 250 mw Aiming Laser Wavelength Range nm Path Length Difference <0.1 mm (Typical), 0.2 mm (Max) Peak Responsivity 1.0 A/W Fiber Type SMF-28e+ Input/Output Port FC/APC Insertion Loss* 1300 nm to Sample Arm and Reference Arm Insertion Loss* for 660 nm to Probe Dimensions (W x H x D) <4.2 db (Typical) 5.0 db (Max) <3.0 db (Typical) 4.5 db (Max) 120 mm x 80 mm x 21 mm (4.72" x 3.15" x 0.83") * Includes connector losses of the input and output pigtail, measured at the central wavelength **Conversion gain measured with respect to the output power using a high impedance load, half value with a 50 Ω impedance of the balanced detector, the output of which is labeled as the data acquisition device in Fig. 1. The RF output from the ultra-low noise high speed transimpedance amplifier is proportional to the difference between the two photocurrents in the balanced detector. This reduces common mode noise. The inputs of the balanced detector are also matched to achieve optimal noise suppression (i.e., the maximum common mode rejection ratio CMRR). INT-MSI-1300 $ 2, , ,00 18, nm, 15 MHz Michelson-Type Interferometer INT-MSI-1300B $ 2, , ,00 18, nm, 100 MHz Michelson-Type Interferometer 1770

120 Common-Path OCT Interferometer Module Thorlabs Common-Path Interferometer module is designed for common-path OCT applications where the reference and sample arm signals arise from the same optical path. Internal couplers are optimized for flat wavelength response and coupling losses that have a very low polarization dependence. The interferometer module includes FC/APC-angled fiber adapters on all external connections. All internal connections are fusion spliced. To simplify alignment, we have added an additional input for a 660 nm (±30 nm) aiming laser. This module is intended for use with OCT systems with an interferometer that follows a common path configuration, similar to that shown in Fig. 1. The probe interfaced with this module has a reference arm and sample arm. Reflections from both arms are combined to produce interference fringes that are detected by one channel of the integrated balanced detector. The second channel of the detector may be used to offset the DC component of the interference signal by using an external variable optical attenuator (see page 1131 for available VOAs) to control the amount of light reaching the second detector channel. The integrated balanced detector utilizes two InGaAs photodetectors. The RF output signal from the ultra-low noise, high-speed transimpedance amplifier is proportional to the difference between the two photocurrents, which reduces common-mode noise. Sample Probe WDM Circulator Aiming Laser INT-COM-1300 Custom Models & Volume Pricing Available Features 2.3 db Coupling Loss Flat Wavelength Response Input for 660 nm Alignment Beam Compact Design Power Supply Included Imaging OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Slope Compensation 95/5 OCT Laser VOA INT-COM-1300 Data Acquisition Device Figure 1. Sample Setup of INT-COM-1300 in an OCT System SPECIFICATIONS Wavelength Range Insertion Loss from 1300 nm Input to Probe Insertion Loss from 1300 nm Input to VOA Input Insertion Loss from 660 nm Input to Probe Bandwidth (3 db) Dimensions (W x H x D) 1250 nm 1350 nm <1.5 db (Typical), 2.3 db (Max) <17 db (Typical), 20 db (Max) <2 db (Typical), 4 db (Max) DC to 15 MHz 120 mm x 80 mm x 20 mm (4.72" x 3.15" x 0.83") Figure 2. Wavelength response of coupling from the input to probe port. The INT-COM-1300 is designed for a flat wavelength response. A small portion of the incoming light (~5%) is split off and connected to the IN port of a variable optical attenuator (VOA) via a slope-compensation coupler. This additional coupler is used to compensate for the wavelength-dependent coupling ratio. The two-coupler design makes the VOA IN signal nearly independent of the OCT laser wavelength, allowing broadband DC offset compensation, as demonstrated by the wavelength response curves in Figs. 2 and 3. Fig. 2 shows the INT-COM-1300 coupling ratio measured from the 1300 nm input to the probe ports, while Fig. 3 shows the coupling ratio measured from the 1300 nm input port to the VOA input port. Figure 3. Wavelength response of coupling from the input to VOA input port. INT-COM-1300 $ 2, , ,00 19, nm, 15 MHz Common-Path OCT Interferometer 1771

121 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers OCT-Proven Broadband 2 x 2 Fiber-Optic Couplers (Page 1 of 2) FC APC Features Operating Wavelengths: 1310 ± 70 nm, 850 ± 40 nm Flat Spectral Response Low Insertion Loss Available Coupling Ratios: 1:99, 10:90, and 50:50 FC/APC Connectors Customized Fiber Lengths and Connectors Available Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT) systems require components that operate over a broad spectral range with minimal spectral dependency. Thorlabs' OCT-proven couplers are tested to ensure minimal wavelength-dependent insertion loss variations, making them an ideal choice for integration into many OCT systems. The FC and FC series of OCT-proven broadband couplers are polarization-independent, passive, 2 x 2 single mode fiber optic components designed for use over larger bandwidths. An important consideration in the design of an OCT system is the flat spectral response of the components in the system. Shown on the next page are the spectral response curves for these couplers. Specifications SERIES FC XX-APC SERIES FC XX-APC SERIES Wavelength Range 850 ± 40 nm 1310 ± 70 nm Fiber Type SM Ø900 µm Hytrel Tubing Corning SMF-28e+, Ø900 µm Hytrel Tubing Coupling Ratio (%) 1/99 10/90 50/50 1/99 10/90 50/50 Insertion Loss 0.5/22 db 0.9/13 db 4.2/4.2 db 0.4/21.6 db 0.8/12.7 db 3.8/3.8 db Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) 0.2 db 0.15 db Excess Loss 1.0 db 0.5 db Directivity 55 db 60 db Port Configuration 2 x 2 Operating Temperature Range -40 to +85 C Storage Temperature Range -40 to +85 C Lead Length and Tolerance Connectors 100 ± 10 cm FC/APC Broadband Light Source (BW > 160 nm) FC/APC Optical Spectrum Analyzer 1300 nm Test Setup Reference A Experimental Test Procedure Step 1: A broadband light source is spectrally analyzed, and the trace is saved as Reference A. Step 2: This reference light is sent to the coupler; the output of coupler is analyzed and saved as trace B (Fig. 1). Broadband Light Source (BW > 160 nm) FC/APC Coupler FC/APC Optical Spectrum Analyzer Coupler Output B Step 3: These two traces are normalized to 0 db so that they share a common reference intensity (Fig. 2). Step 4: The difference between these normalized curves is calculated and plotted (Difference = A B) in Fig. 3. The result is the spectral uniformity curve for the fiber coupler, showing the variation in db across the wavelength band of interest. 1772

122 OCT-Proven Broadband 2 x 2 Fiber-Optic Couplers (Page 2 of 2) Intensity (db) Figure 1 - Raw Spectra -20 Reference A Coupler Output B Wavelength (nm) Relative Intensity (db) 0-3 Figure 2 - Normalized Spectra Reference A Coupler Output B Wavelength (nm) Difference (db) Figure 3 - Difference A-B Difference A-B Wavelength (nm) OCT Light Sources Each optical path is analyzed, yielding four traces for each coupler. For an operating bandwidth of 140 nm, the maximum variation of any optical path will not surpass 1.5 db ( nm), and for an operating bandwidth of 100 nm, the maximum variation will not surpass 1.0 db. This guarantees a flat response across a wide wavelength range, making these couplers perfect for broadband experiments and OCT imaging. Spectral Variation (db) Optical Path Blue to Red Blue to White White to Red White to White Spectral Uniformity for FC XX-APC Series Δλ = 100 nm **For reference only** Device-Specific Curves will Vary Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Wavelength (nm) FC APC $ ,85 2, Broadband Fiber Optic Coupler, 850 nm ± 40 nm, 1:99, FC/APC FC APC $ ,85 2, Broadband Fiber Optic Coupler, 850 nm ± 40 nm, 10:90, FC/APC FC APC $ ,85 2, Broadband Fiber Optic Coupler, 850 nm ± 40 nm, 50:50, FC/APC FC APC $ ,85 2, Broadband Fiber Optic Coupler, 1310 nm ± 70 nm, 1:99, FC/APC FC APC $ ,85 2, Broadband Fiber Optic Coupler, 1310 nm ± 70 nm, 10:90, FC/APC FC APC $ ,85 2, Broadband Fiber Optic Coupler, 1310 nm ± 70 nm, 50:50, FC/APC Extended Broadband SLD Light Source LS2000B For more details, see page µm 500 µm with a 90 nm bandwidth (FWHM) source provides ~9 µm of axial resolution, as demonstrated in the top image of an onion skin. Incorporating an Extended Broadband SLD, based on matched-pair SLD light sources that together provide a bandwidth of >170 nm (FWHM), enables imaging at axial resolutions less than 4 µm, as demonstrated to the left. The higher resolution provided by the Extended Broadband SLD enables visualization of distinct layers in the onion skin (pink arrows). 1773

123 OCT OCT-Proven Broadband Circulator CIR APC Port 2 Features Polarization Independent Broadband Operating Wavelength Range ( nm) <1.6 db Insertion Loss 1 m Single Mode (SMF-28e+) Fiber with FC/APC Connectors Ø900 µm Loose Protective Jacket Customized Fiber Length and Connectorization Available Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Port 1 Circulator Port 3 Fiber Optic Circulators, such as the CIR APC, guide light from the input fiber (Port 1) to the output fiber (Port 2). Light returning through the output fiber is redirected to a third fiber (Port 3) with virtually no loss. The circulator isolates the input source (Port 1) from light returning from Port 2. Each OCT-Proven Broadband Circulator has been tested for optimal application in OCT imaging system designs. An important consideration in the design of an OCT system is the flat spectral response of the components in the system. The CIR APC was chosen as an OCT-proven broadband circulator because of its flat spectral response over its operating range. SPECIFICATIONS Wavelength Range nm Isolation >28 db Insertion Loss <1.6 db Directivity (Port 1 3) 50 db Return Loss 45 db Polarization-Dependent Loss <0.2 db Polarization Mode Dispersion <0.05 ps Max Optical Power 500 mw Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C Storage Temperature -40 to 85 C Fiber Type SMF-28e+ Pigtail Type and Length Ø900 µm Loose Tube, 1.0 ± 0.1 m Connector FC/APC (Angled) for Each Port Normalized Coupling Efficiency 1310 nm Circulator Spectral Transmission 100% 80% 60% 40% 20% Port 2->3 Port 1->2 0% Wavelength (nm) Normalized coupling efficiency versus wavelength for the two beam propagation paths of a typical OCT-proven 1310 nm circulator (CIR APC). Port 1 2 shows a mean coupling efficiency of 88%. Port 2 3 shows a mean coupling efficiency of 86% and a standard deviation of 12%. CIR APC $ ,00 5, Broadband Fiber Circulator, nm Integrated Detection Modules Scanning Mirror Reference Arm Sample Sample Arm 50/50 INT-MSI-1300B WDM Circulator Aiming Laser Broadband Source Data Acquisition Device Schematic of a swept source OCT imaging system. A key component in the imaging system is the INT-MSI-1300B Michelson-Type Interferometer (see page 1770), which utilizes a CIR APC. In the interferometer, the circulator guides the light emitted by the broadband light source into the sample and reference arms of the OCT system. The light returning from the sample and reference arms is then guided to the detector. 1774

124 Aiming Beam Coupler: 660/1310 nm WDM Features Designed for Coupling 660 nm Aiming Laser into 1310 nm OCT System <0.5 db Insertion 1310 nm Flat (±3.5%) Spectral Response from 1250 nm to 1360 nm OCT Our WDM components can effectively combine (or separate) single mode signals at two wavelength ranges. This 660/1310 nm multiplexer is an ideal solution for combining OCT and aiming beam light at 1310 nm and 660 nm (see below). Based on the proven Fused Biconic Taper (FBT) technology, this multiplexer provides a broad operating wavelength range and low insertion loss. All of our WDM couplers are available with any connector style (FC/PC as standard, other connectors available upon request) and include Ø900 µm loose tubing to protect the fibers. See page 1116 for other WDM wavelengths nm nm 2.76" (70.0 mm) Ø0.16" (Ø4.0 mm) WD202A2-FC 1300/660 nm Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS WD202A2 Integrated Detection Module with Aiming Beam Optics Operating Wavelength 660/1310 nm Resolution Targets Max Insertion Loss* Min Isolation Polarization Dependent Loss 0.5 db 19 db <0.1 db Scanning Mirror Reference Arm Sample Arm 50/50 WDM Circulator Aiming Laser Broadband Source Wavelength Bandwidth Directivity ± nm 36 db Sample INT-MSI-1300 Data Acquisition Device Operating Temperature 0 to 60 C Storage Temperature -50 to 85 C Fiber Type Jacket 0.5 m of SMF-28e+ Ø900 µm Loose Tubing Setup of INT-MSI-1300 with a Michelson Interferometer module (see page 1770). The WD202A2 660/1310 nm WDM is incorporated in Thorlabs SS- System to provide users with a collinear aiming laser with the OCT imaging beam. Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. *Insertion loss will change depending on connector type; specified without connectors Wavelength Division Multiplexers (WDM) ITEM # $ RMB CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION WD202A2 $ ,42 2, None OCT-Proven 660/1310 nm Wavelength Division Multiplexer WD202A2-FC $ ,28 2, FC/PC OCT-Proven 660/1310 nm Wavelength Division Multiplexer, FC/PC Optical Amplifiers Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers (See Pages ) SOA1013S Tapered Optical Amplifiers (See Page 1306) Single-Angle Facet Gain Chips (See Pages ) 1775

125 OCT Fiber Polarization Controllers CCC1310-J9 SM Fiber is Compatible with SMF-28e FPC020 Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets FPC030 If your application includes single mode fiber and requires linearly polarized light, the FPC Series of Polarization Controllers can be easily implemented to convert elliptically polarized light in a single mode fiber into another state of polarization, including linearly polarized light. This polarization conversion is achieved by loading the paddles with a prescribed number of fiber loops and adjusting their positions to control the output polarization state. These polarization controllers utilize stress-induced birefringence to create three independent fractional wave plates to alter the polarization of the transmitted light in the single mode fiber by looping the fiber into three independent spools. The miniature FPC020 Polarization Controller achieves the same results with just two paddles. Please check our website for detailed operating theory. FPC560 For Bend-Sensitive Fibers The amount of birefringence induced in the fiber is a function of the fiber cladding diameter, the spool diameter (fixed), the number of fiber loops per spool, and the wavelength of the light. The fast axis of the fiber, which is in the plane of the spool, is adjusted with respect to the transmitted polarization vector by manually rotating the paddles. The FPC031, FPC032, FPC561, and FPC562 fiber polarization controllers come preloaded with fiber. NOTE: The FPC030 and FPC020 Controllers work well with most of our single mode fibers. For fibers with higher bend loss (e.g., SMF-28e+), we recommend FPC560, which has larger paddles. ITEM # LOOP DIAMETER PADDLE ROTATION FOOTPRINT OPERATING WAVELENGTH CONNECTORS BEND LOSS FPC " (18 mm) ± " x 0.5" (77.7 mm x 12.7 mm) N/A N/A N/A FPC " (27 mm) ± " x 1.0" (216 mm x 25 mm) N/A N/A N/A FPC " (27 mm) ± " x 1.0" (216 mm x 25 mm) nm FC/PC 0.1 db FPC " (27 mm) ± " x 1.0" (216 mm x 25 mm) nm FC/APC 0.1 db FPC " (56 mm) ± " x 1.0" (317.5 mm x 25 mm) N/A N/A N/A FPC " (56 mm) ± " x 1.0" (317.5 mm x 25 mm) nm FC/PC 0.1 db FPC " (56 mm) ± " x 1.0" (317.5 mm x 25 mm) nm FC/APC 0.1 db FPC020 $ ,08 1, Miniature 2-Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller FPC030 $ ,30 1, Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller w/ Small Paddles, No Fiber FPC031 $ ,19 1, Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller w/ Small Paddles, FC/PC Connectors, CCC1310-J9 Fiber FPC032 $ ,59 2, Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller w/ Small Paddles, FC/APC Connectors, CCC1310-J9 Fiber FPC560 $ ,74 1, Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller w/ Large Paddles, No Fiber FPC561 $ ,63 2, Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller w/ Large Paddles, FC/PC Connectors, SMF-28e Fiber FPC562 $ ,03 2, Paddle Fiber Polarization Controller w/ Large Paddles, FC/APC Connectors, SMF-28e Fiber Inline Fiber Polarization Controller PLC-900 The PLC-900 polarization controller is ideal for applications that require a stable, compact, manual controller. It is designed to be used with Ø900 µm jacketed single mode fiber. Simply place the fiber in a channel and hold in place with end-clamps. An adjustable knob allows the fiber to be squeezed and rotated, providing the ability to convert an arbitrary input state of polarization into any other state of polarization; any point on the Poincare sphere may be set. A separate knob is used to lock the controller into position. Features Insensitive to Wavelength Variations Compact For Ø900 µm Tight-Buffered Fiber Specifications Insertion Loss: <0.05 db Return Loss: >65 db Extinction Ratio: >40 db PLC-900 $ ,70 4, Inline Fiber Polarization Controller for Ø900 µm Tight-Buffered Fiber 1776

126 Ø20 mm Two-Axis, Wide-Angle Fast Steering Mirror Features 2-Axis Steering (Pitch and Yaw) > ±24.0 Optical Angular Range Compact Mirror Housing Enables Easy Design of Optical Scanning Calibrated Linear Response Fault Detection Digital Closed-Loop Feedback Control Software and Hardware Triggering Capabilities Designed for OEM Applications* Additional Data can be Found on our Website. The FSM20XY Fast Steering Mirror is a high-performance 2D steering mirror designed to be easily integrated into a custom-built system. With an optical angular scan range in excess of ±24.0 and a clear aperture of 20 mm, the mirror is ideal for a variety of applications including general-purpose beam steering, autoalignment systems, remote beam control, and image capture applications. Each mirror is calibrated so that the position of the mirror relative to the flat face of the mirror housing can be requested via a command, which can be passed using either a USB 2.0 or serial interface (typically UART based). Design The FSM20XY mirror has a protected silver coating on a polished metal substrate, which offers a reflectivity greater than 95% throughout the nm wavelength range. The mirror is supported by a frictionless flexure bearing support and is actuated using four voice coil actuators. Performance Control of the fast steering mirror is accomplished with the included digital or analog driver circuits. A digital PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) algorithm is included as standard. Custom higher order algorithms can be accommodated. From the initiation of the move command to the mirror settling on the final position, the fast steering mirror is operated by a simple PID algorithm and can steer a beam through an angle of 48 in less than 60 ms. For a smaller 10 move, the elapsed time is less than 15 ms. The mirror is capable of mrad movements in ms. For the fastest point-to-point execution times, the move or move sequence should be programmed into the 1.20" (30.5 mm) All dimensions subject to change, please see 1.20" (30.5 mm) FSM20XY Front View 4-40 Mounting Hole (4 Places) Ø0.79" (Ø20.0 mm) 1.75" (44.5 mm) FSM20XY Side View Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. 1.01" (25.7 mm) SPECIFICATIONS Angular Response* FSM20XY Mirror Head and Drive Electronics 50 ms (24 ) 10 ms (0.5 ) 3 ms (1 mrad) Max Mechanical Scan Angle ±12.0 x ±12.0 Clear Aperture Mirror Flatness (@ 632 nm) 20 mm nm Wavelength Range** 450 nm - 20 µm Damage Threshold >10 W/cm 2 Pointing Accuracy Repeatability 0.05 mrad <0.05 mrad Communication Modes UART, RS232, or USB 2.0 Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 C Housing Dimensions (W x H x D) 1.20" x 1.20" x 1.75" (30.5 mm x 30.5 mm x 44.5 mm) * Measured performance using a PID control algorithm. Non-traditional algorithms offering even faster response times are in development. **Protected Silver Coating, see pages 781 and 1105 for coating performance. FIFO queue on the control circuit. In addition, the trajectory profile and settling band can be custom tailored to meet the needs of a specific application or sequence of moves. The position of the mirror is optically encoded using a position sensor that provides feedback to the digital control circuit. As a result, the mirror can be positioned with an accuracy of 0.05 mrad and be repeatedly returned to the same position with an accuracy better than 0.05 mrad. Since the mirror steers the beam in both the X and Y directions, the pincushion distortion will be minimized and symmetric. XY steering mirrors are also easy to incorporate into 2D scanning imaging systems since the mirror can be positioned at the back pupil plane of the scan lens. Integration The compact mirror housing includes four threaded holes for mounting. The included control card is built on a printed circuit board, which can be easily integrated into a customized interface box. The digital PID circuit needs an external power supply that can provide +15 VDC at 1 A, -15 VDC at 1 A, and +7 VDC at 0.4 A. A complete pin diagram with input and output levels for the full digital system or mirror movement subsystem is detailed in the manual found online at. OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets FSM20XY $ 5, , ,00 43, Axis Fast Steering Mirror with Control Card 1777

127 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets OEM Fast Steering Mirrors OEM Mirror Designs 75 mm Compact 20 mm x 30 mm Elliptical Mirror Design Thorlabs utilizes a combination of in-house optical design and coating capabilities with external specialty coating houses to cover a wide range of mirror reflectivity requirements. Finite Element Analysis of the mirror is performed to ensure flatness during static holding and fast dynamic operation. Optical testing equipment ensures that all mirrors meet your flatness and surface quality requirements and specifications. 75 mm High-Performance Flatness Testing of Coated Mirror Actuator Design Different mirror shapes, sizes, and deflection ranges require different electromagnetic actuator designs for optimal performance. Thorlabs performs extensive design and modeling of the electro-magnetic actuators to maximize efficiency for low power consumption and fast dynamic performance for demanding applications. Below are some examples of actuators designed for various mirrors and motion control systems. Electromagnetic Finite Element Analysis (FEA) simulation capability at Thorlabs allows rapid development and optimization of new designs. Magnetic Simulation Different Actuator Designs 20 mm Round FEA Simulation of Mirror Under Load Custom Designed Steering Mirrors for Specialized or OEM Applications Wide Range of Options Including: Scan Angle Mirror Size, Shape, and Reflective Coating Accuracy and Resolution* Power Consumption Expertly Designed and Optimized with the Aid of Computer Simulation Software Digital Motion Control Loop and Trajectory Generator for Improved Performance and Flexibility in Control Variety of Feedback and Feedforward Control Options Precise Point-to-Point Aiming Smooth Trajectory Tracking Realtime Disturbance Rejection Using Internal or External Sensors There is a wide range of applications for Fast Steering Mirrors (FSM) where an existing off-the-shelf mirror may not satisfy all of your needs. Thorlabs offers custom FSM design and manufacturing services to modify an existing FSM design or to create a new one. Our expert engineers in electro-magnetic and optomechanical engineering design Fast Steering Mirror systems by adjusting key design parameters to optimize performance for accuracy, repeatability, settling time, jitter, power consumption, heat dissipation, and stray light rejection. Options for absolute mirror angle calibration and either analog or digital position commands simplify system integration. Thorlabs can perform lifetime testing, vibration testing, and performance testing under various environmental conditions to qualify our mirrors for your application. Contact us to discuss your steering mirror requirements. For a sample custom design, please see the next page. Controller Design and Performance Testing Thorlabs Fast Steering Mirrors can execute rapid point-to-point motions or follow precise continuous curves and trajectories. The motion control hardware and algorithms are all designed in house and can be tailored to different applications. Position (degrees optical) Trajectory Generator + - *Targeting to 1 in 100,000 of max scan angle using PSD technology is possible. Even better results can be achieved using MIMO technology co-developments Time (ms) An External Trigger Signal Initiates Tracking of a Precise Trajectory Feedforward Controller Feedback Controller Example Motion Control Architecture Position (degrees optical) FSM Hardware Time (ms) Zoom in Shows Accurate Tracking and Low Jitter of 100 Triggered Repetitions 1778

128 Custom and OEM Fast Steering Mirrors: Sample Custom Design Fast Steering Mirror and Controller Features Ø3" Clear Aperture ±12 Optical Angular Range 2-Axis Steering (Pitch and Yaw) 30 ms Position Response (5 mrad) Flexure Bearing Mirror Suspension Closed-Loop PSD Feedback USB 2.0 Interface OCT Light Sources Thorlabs Fast Steering Mirror with controller provides a closed-loop solution for single- and dual-axis optical beam scanning applications. Its design incorporates four voice coils into a flexure bearing supported mirror for fast and stable positioning. It also contains an internal position sensitive photodetector (PSD) to provide accurate and repeatable positioning of the mirror. The mirror can be purchased with a controller that allows the user to adjust the mirror position either using the front panel keypad or remotely via a USB 2.0 interface. The front panel keypad features an Enable/Disable control with LED indicator, adjustment control of the X and Y mirror coordinates, and selection between local/remote operation. An internal closed-loop feedback is built into the controller to provide precise and repeatable position sensing with reference to the default zero position. Additional Options Thorlabs can offer custom fast steering mirrors for a variety of applications. See the previous page for general information on our capabilities. Applications Laser Beam Stabilization Image Stabilization Laser Tracking Laser Pointing When used with our PDQ Series of Quadrant Detectors, the mirror can quickly auto-align and lock to the center of the detector for high-speed laser beam control and stabilization. For additional details or to place an order, please contact Thorlabs technical support; contact details are on the back cover. Sample Mechanical Drawing 0.4" (10 mm) Top View 3.8" (95 mm) Front View Ø3.0" (Ø76 mm) 0.5" (12 mm) 2.0" (51 mm) 0.1" (4 mm) 1.4" (36 mm) 2.2" (56 mm) Side View 0.4" (9 mm) Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Touch Screen Power and Energy Meter Console Fiber and Free Space Applications Over 25 Compatible Sensors Measurement Capabilities from 100 pw to 250 W and 185 nm to 25 µm Power and Energy Measurements 5.7" Auto-Rotating, Color Touch Screen USB Stick Data Storage Optional Plug-In Fiber Inspection Camera For more details, see page

129 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Galvanometer Mirror System Packages for Imaging (Page 1 of 2) GVSM001 GVSM and 2-Axis Galvanometer-Driven Mirror System Packages [Includes Drive Electronics, Power Supply, Mount, and Cables (Not Shown Above)] Features Complete 1D and 2D Scanning 5 mm Galvo Mirror Packages Includes GVS001/GVS002 Galvo System + Power Supply, Mirror Heatsink, and Driver Card Cover Optically Encoded Mirror Position 99.9% Motor and Position Sensor Linearity Advanced Analog Control Circuit (Servo Driver) with Current Damping and Error Limit The GVSM001 and GVSM002 Galvo Mirror System Packages are complete 1D and 2D scanning mirror systems, respectively. The closed-loop systems are ideal for raster and vector scanning applications as well as some step-and-hold applications. Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Specifications Max Beam Diameter: 5 mm (0.2") Mirror Separation: 10 mm (2D System) Full Scan Range (Mechanical): ±12.5 Full Scan Bandwidth: 350 Hz (Max) Small-Angle Scan Bandwidth: 1 khz (Max) Position Resolution: (15 µrad) Mirror: Protected Silver Coating ( nm) Mirror Flatness: λ/4 1-Axis Galvo Mirror with Servo Driver (Included) Galvo Mirror System Performance The mirrors on both the GVSM001 and GVSM002 can be driven to scan their full mechanical range of ±12.5 (±25 optical scan range) at a frequency of 100 Hz when using a square wave control input voltage and at a frequency of 350 Hz when using a sine wave control input voltage. When a mirror is continuously scanned over a small angular range (0.2 ) the maximum scan frequency is 1 khz. For a single smallangle step, it takes the mirror 300 µs to come to rest at the command position. The angular resolution of the system is (15 µrad). Galvo Motor/Mirror Assembly Closed-Loop Mirror Positioning The angular orientation (position) of the mirror is optically encoded using an array of photocells and a light source, both of which are integrated into the interior of the galvanometer housing. Each mirror orientation corresponds to a unique ratio of signals from the photodiodes, which allows for the closedloop operation of the galvo mirror system. The galvo consists of a galvanometer-based scanning motor with an optical mirror mounted on the shaft and a detector that provides positional feedback to the control board. The moving magnet design for the GVS series of galvanometer motors was chosen over a stationary magnet and rotating coil design in order to provide the fastest response times and the highest system resonant frequency. The position of the mirror is encoded using an optical sensing system located inside of the motor housing. Due to the large angular acceleration of the rotation shaft, the size, shape and inertia of the mirrors become significant factors in the design of high performance galvo systems. Furthermore, the mirror must remain rigid (flat) even when subjected to large accelerations. All these factors have been precisely balanced in our galvo systems in order to match the characteristics of the galvo motor and maximize performance of the system. 2-Axis (X and Y) Galvo Mirror Pair 2D Scanning Galvo System Power Supply for Two Servo Controllers X-Axis Servo Controller Y-Axis Servo Controller 115 VAC or 230 VAC X-Axis Mirror Voltage Input ±10 V X-Axis Mirror Output Monitoring Signals Y-Axis Mirror Voltage Input ±10 V Y-Axis Mirror Output Monitoring Signal 1780

130 Galvanometer Mirror System Packages for Imaging (Page 2 of 2) GVSM001 MIRROR SPECIFICATIONS Maximum Beam Diameter Wavelength Range 5 mm nm System Operation As shown in the schematic on the previous page, the servo driver must be connected to a DC power supply, the galvo motor, and an input voltage source (the monitoring connection is optional). For continuous scanning applications, a function generator with a square or sine wave output is sufficient for scanning the galvo mirror over its entire range. For more complex scanning patterns, a programmable voltage source should be used. The ratio between the input voltage and mirror position is switchable and can be 0.5, 0.8, or 1. For the GVSM001 and GVSM002 systems, when set to 0.8, the ±10 V input will rotate the mirror over its full range of ±12.5. The control circuit also provides monitoring outputs that allow the user to track the position of the mirror. In addition, voltages proportional to the drive current being supplied to the motor and the difference between the command position and the actual position of the mirror (see the manual online at for pin out information) are supplied by the control circuit. OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Damage Threshold 100 W/cm 2 Motor and Position Sensor Linearity 99.9% Scale Drift (Max) 40 ppm/ C Zero Drift (Max) 10 µrad/ C Repeatability 15 µrad Typical Resolution (15 µrad) Average Current 1 A DRIVE ELECTRONICS SPECIFICATIONS Full Scale Bandwidth Small-Angle (±0.2 ) Bandwidth 100 Hz Square Wave, 350 Hz Sine Wave 1 khz Small-Angle Step Response 300 µs Power Supply Analog Signal Input Resistance ±15 to ±18 VDC (1.25 A rms, 5 A peak Max) 20 kω ± 1% (Differential Input) Optics Resolution Targets Peak Current 5 A Position Signal Output Resistance 1 kω ± 1% Coil Resistance 2.2 Ω ± 10% Coil Inductance 150 µh ± 10% Rotor Inertia 0.02 g.cm 2 Analog Position Signal Input Range Mechanical Position Signal Input Scale Factor ±10 V 0.5 V/degree, 0.8 V/degree, 1.0 V/degree (Switchable) Maximum Scan Angle (Mechanical Angle) ±12.5 Motor Weight 50 g Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 C Optical Position Sensor Output Range µa Mechanical Position Signal Output Scale Factor 0.5 V/degree Operating Temperature Range 0 to 40 C Servo Board Size (L x W x H) 3.3" x 2.9" x 1.7" (85 mm x 74 mm x 44 mm) Other Galvo Available (Please See Page 364) ITEM # METRIC GVSM001 GVSM001/M $ 1, , ,37 11, D Galvo Mirror System Package GVSM002 GVSM002/M $ 2, , ,27 19, D Galvo Mirror System Package Large Beam Diameter Galvo Mirrors and Accessories GVS012 Single- and Dual-Axis for <Ø10 mm Beams Post, Cage, and Stage Mounting Accessories Small Beam and Large Beam Galvo Power Supplies For more details, see page

131 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Scan Lenses for (Page 1 of 2) Features Telecentric Objectives Maintain Uniform Spot Size Over 15 Scan Range >93% Transmission Efficiency from nm Ideal for OCT Applications 1.6X, 3X, 5X, and 10X Magnifications 1315 nm and 850/1050 nm AR Coating Options Thorlabs scan lenses are telecentric objectives ideal for use in laser scanning applications like Optical Coherence Tomography (OCT). These applications benefit from the flat imaging plane that telecentric objectives offer as a laser beam is scanned across the sample. A flat imaging plane minimizes image distortion, which in turn creates geometrically correct images without the need for post-image processing. A telecentric scan lens also maximizes the coupling of the light scattered or emitted from the sample into the detection system. An additional feature of these lenses is that the spot size in the image plane is nearly constant over the entire FOV, resulting in constant image resolution. The LSM02, LSM03, LSM04, and LSM05 are AR coated to minimize back reflections from broadband sources with a central wavelength around 1315 nm; the -BB series is coated for reflection minima centered at 850 and 1050 nm in a single lens. Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets M25 x 0.75 Threading LSM02(-BB) LSM03(-BB) LSM04(-BB) M25 x 0.75 Threading M25 x 0.75 Threading SM2 Threading LSM05(-BB) THORLABS LSMO2 EFL=18 LWD=7.5 Ø33 mm 27.6 m 23.2 mm THORLABS LSMO3 EFL=36 LWD=25.1 Ø34 mm 30 mm 25.5 mm THORLABS LSMO4 EFL=54 LWD= mm 43 mm THORLABS LSMO5-BB EFL= LWD= mm 66.5 mm Ø34 mm Ø59.5 mm % Reflectivity Typical Reflectivity of AR Coatings on BB LSM Scan Lens Elements ± 40 nm 1050 ± 50 nm Wavelength (nm) The -BB scan lenses have an AR coating for the 800 nm to 1100 nm range. See Pages for Visible Wavelength Scan Lenses and Objectives ITEM # LSM02-BB LSM03-BB LSM04-BB LSM05-BB Magnification 10X 5X 3X 1.6X Design Wavelengths 850 nm 1050 nm 850 nm 1050 nm 850 nm 1050 nm 850 nm 1050 nm Wavelength Range ±40 nm ±50 nm ±40 nm ±50 nm ±40 nm ±50 nm ±40 nm ±50 nm Effective Focal Length (EFL)* mm mm mm mm mm mm 110 mm 110 mm Lens Working Distance (LWD) 7.5 mm 25.1 mm 25.0 mm 42.3 mm 42.2 mm 93.7 mm Scanning Distance (SD) (Distance from Pupil Position to Mounting Plane) 16.1 mm 18.9 mm 75.5 mm Pupil Size (1/e 2 ) (EP) 4 mm 8 mm Depth of View (DOV) 0.12 mm 0.58 mm 1.15 mm 1.2 mm Field of View (FOV) 4.7 mm x 4.7 mm 9.4 mm x 9.4 mm 14.1 mm x 14.1 mm 28.9 mm x 28.9 mm Parfocal Distance (PD) 30.7 mm 50.5 mm 80.7 mm mm Mean Spot Size (S) (1/e 2 Beam Diameter in the Field of Focus) 9 µm 11 µm 17 µm 21 µm 24 µm 29 µm 19 µm 29 µm Scan Angle (SA) ±7.5º *Changes in the EFL due to wavelength are not the same as chromatic focal shift. A change in the EFL indicates a change in the location of the principal plane and hence the magnification of the scan lens. Chromatic focal shift is a wavelength dependent axial deviation in the position of the beam waist. 1782

132 Scan Lenses for (Page 2 of 2) 1315 nm Scan Lenses % Reflectance Typical Reflectivity of AR Coating on 1315 nm LSM Scan Lens Elements 1315 ± 65 nm Wavelength (nm) Scanning Distance (SD): The SD is the distance between the galvo mirror pivot point and the back mounting plate of the objective. The galvo mirror pivot point must be located at the back focal plane of the objective to maximize image resolution. Pupil Size (EP): The size of the EP determines the ideal 1/e 2 collimated beam diameter to maximize the resolution of the imaging system. Working Distance (WD or LWD): The distance between the tip of the scan lens housing and the front focal plane of the scan lens is defined as the WD. Depth of View (DOV): The DOV corresponds to the distance between the front focal plane and a parallel plane where the beam spot size has increased by a factor of 2. Field of View (FOV): The FOV is the maximum scan area on the sample that can be imaged with a resolution equal to or better than the stated resolution of the LSM scan lenses. Parfocal Distance (PD): The PD is the distance from the scan lens mounting plane to the front focal plane of the LSM scan lenses. Scan Angle (SA): The SA is the maximum allowed angle between the beam and the optical axis of an LSM scan lenses after being reflected off of the galvo mirror. 850/1050 nm Scan Lenses Additional specifications for our scan lenses are available on our website. The data includes specifications on the chromatic performance of the lens as well as plots that show spot size as a function of scan angle. ITEM # LSM02 LSM03 LSM04 LSM05 Magnification 10X 5X 3X 1.6X Design Wavelength 1315 nm Wavelength Range ±65 nm Effective Focal Length (EFL) mm mm mm 110 mm Lens Working Distance (LWD) 7.5 mm 25.1 mm 42.3 mm 93.7 mm Scanning Distance (SD) (Distance from Pupil Position to Mounting Plane) 15 mm 75.5 mm Pupil Size (1/e 2 ) (EP) 4 mm 8 mm Depth of View (DOV) 0.12 mm 0.58 mm 1.15 mm 1.2 mm Field of View (FOV) 4.7 mm x 4.7 mm 9.4 mm x 9.4 mm 14.1 mm x 14.1 mm 28.9 mm x 28.9 mm Parfocal Distance (PD) 30.7 mm 50.6 mm 80.8 mm mm Mean Spot Size (S) (1/e 2 Beam Diameter in the Field of Focus) 13 µm 25 µm 35 µm 19 µm 23.5 µm Scan Angle (SA) ±7.5º Scanning Distance Objective Length Working Distance Galvo Mirror OCT Scan Lens FOV Parfocal Distance LSM02-BB $ 1, , ,80 12, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 18 mm, AR Coating: nm LSM03-BB $ ,90 7, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 36 mm, AR Coating: nm LSM04-BB $ ,20 7, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 54 mm, AR Coating: nm LSM05-BB $ ,20 7, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 110 mm, AR Coating: nm 1315 nm Scan Lenses LSM02 $ 1, , ,00 11, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 18 mm, Design Wavelength = 1315 ± 65 nm LSM03 $ ,10 7, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 36 mm, Design Wavelength = 1315 ± 65 nm LSM04 $ ,40 7, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 54 mm, Design Wavelength = 1315 ± 65 nm LSM05 $ ,40 7, X OCT Scan Lens, EFL = 110 mm, Design Wavelength = 1315 ± 65 nm OCT Light Sources Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets Dispersion Compensators LSM03DC See next page 1783

133 OCT Light Source Dispersion Compensators for LSM Scan Lenses LSM02DC LSM03DC Features Good Dispersion Compensation up to Second Order AR Coated: nm* Mounted in an Engraved SM1 Series Lens Tube *Thorlabs also offers a Dispersion Compensator AR Coated for the nm Range (See Page 959). Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller LSM04DC LSM05DC Optics Resolution Targets Thorlabs dispersion compensators are single glass compensation blocks whose glass type and thickness were chosen to match the dispersion of the LSM scan lenses. Each compensator is mounted in an engraved 1" long SM1-threaded lens tube and AR coated for the 800 nm to 1400 nm wavelength range (see graph below) Typical Reflectance of AR Coating on LSMxxDC Series Dispersion Compensators 850 ± 40 nm 1050 ± 50 nm 1315 ± 65 nm % Reflectance Wavelength (nm) 1.20" (30.5 mm) ITEM # LSM02DC LSM03DC LSM04DC LSM05DC Material N-SF8 N-SK4 N-BAK1 H-ZF7LA 1.15" (29.2 mm) 1.03" (26.2 mm) Wavelength Range Diameter Clear Aperture Surface Quality nm 1" (25.4 mm) 22.8 mm Scratch-Dig SM1 Thread (1.035"-40) Wavefront Error λ/4 Thickness Tolerance ±0.1 mm Diameter Tolerance +0/-0.2 mm LSM02DC $ , Dispersion Compensating Mirror for LSM02 Scan Lens LSM03DC $ , Dispersion Compensating Mirror for LSM03 Scan Lens LSM04DC $ , Dispersion Compensating Mirror for LSM04 Scan Lens LSM05DC $ , Dispersion Compensating Mirror for LSM05 Scan Lens 1784

134 1310 nm FC/APC Fixed Aspheric Lens Fiber Collimation Packages These FC/APC-connectorized fiber collimation packages are ideal for systems that are sensitive to back reflections. APC connectors utilize a ferrule that has an 8 end face with an ultra PC polish, typically leading to a return loss greater than 60 db. The AD1109F and AD12F adapters allow these collimators to be mounted in an SM05- or SM1-threaded mount or lens tube. Please refer to our website for complete models and drawings. Aspheric Collimator 8.00 mm EFL FC/APC Connector Fiber Optic Cable F240APC Assembly Ø12.0 mm Diameter F240APC Assembly 0.50" (12.7 mm) M12 x 0.5 Thread D OCT Light Sources Aspheric Collimator mm EFL FC/APC Connector Fiber Optic Cable F260APC Assembly Ø11.0 mm Diameter F260APC Assembly 0.75" (19.1 mm) M11 x 0.5 Thread D Aspheric Collimator mm EFL FC/APC Connector Fiber Optic Cable F280APC Assembly Ø11.0 mm Diameter F280APC Assembly 0.87" (22.1 mm) M11 x 0.5 Thread D Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets ITEM # F240APC-C F260APC-C F280APC-C AR Coating* nm (D) Output Waist Diameter** 1.4 mm 2.7 mm 3.3 mm Divergence NA Effective Focal Length Optical specifications for C- coated ( nm) collimators based on SMF-28e+ fiber. *Aspheric lens element positioned for use at 1310 nm **Measured 1/e 2 diameter at 1 focal length from lens See Page 1098 for Our Complete Line of Collimation Packages F240APC-C $ ,13 1, mm EFL Fixed Aspheric FC/APC Fiber Collimator, 1310 nm F260APC-C $ ,95 1, mm EFL Fixed Aspheric FC/APC Fiber Collimator, 1310 nm F280APC-C $ ,95 1, mm EFL Fixed Aspheric FC/APC Fiber Collimator, 1310 nm RC08FC-P01 Reflective Collimator Fiber Collimators F240APC-1550 FC/APC Collimator Fixed and Adjustable Versions Collimator Optic Options GRIN Lens Aspheric Lens Achromatic Doublet Lens Triplet Lens Off-Axis Parabolic Mirrors FC/PC, FC/APC, and SMA Connector Options More than 150 Models Stocked Custom Aligned Versions Available F810FC-1310 FC/PC Collimator Thorlabs manufactures an expansive offering of fiber collimators. We have solutions for almost any application. For more details, see page

135 OCT Light Source Balanced Detectors Interferometers Fiber Polarization Controller Optics Resolution Targets 1951 USAF Resolution Targets Features Determine Resolution of an Optical System 3" x 1" Wheel Pattern Targets for Measuring Resolution Across Image 3" x 3" Targets Offer up to 4.4 µm per Line Pair Resolution Conforms to MIL-S-150A Standard Positive and Negative Patterns Available R3L1S4P Positive Wheel Pattern Thorlabs offers positive and negative resolution test targets that are made from plating chrome on a soda lime glass substrate and measure either 3" x 1" or 3" x 3". A set of six elements (horizontal and vertical line pair) are in one group and ten groups compose the resolution chart. The spacing between the lines in each element is equal to the thickness of the line itself. When the target is imaged, the resolution of an imaging system can be determined by viewing the clarity of the horizontal and vertical lines. The largest set of non-distinguishable horizontal and vertical lines determines the resolving power of the imaging system. R3L3S1N Negative Pattern R3L3S1P Positive Pattern Resolution of USAF 1951 Targets* Element Group Number The 3" x 3" targets have 10 groups (-2 to +7), with 6 elements per group to offer resolution from line pairs per mm (lp/mm) to lp/mm. On the other hand, the 3" x 1" wheel pattern targets have 9 USAF 1951 targets, each with 6 groups (+2 to +7) to also offer a maximum resolution of lp/mm with a minimum of 4.00 lp/mm. * Units are line pairs per millimeter ITEM # $ RMB DESCRIPTION R3L3S1N $ ,20 1, Negative 1951 USAF Test Target, 3" x 3" R3L3S1P $ ,20 1, Positive 1951 USAF Test Target, 3" x 3" R3L1S4N $ ,00 1, Negative 1951 USAF Wheel Pattern, 3" x 1" R3L1S4P $ ,00 1, Positive 1951 USAF Wheel Pattern, 3" x 1" NBS 1963A Resolution Targets NBS 1963A Targets Cycles/mm Cycle Size Cycles/mm Cycle Size mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm R2L2S1N Negative Pattern R2L2S1P Positive Pattern Determine Resolution of an Optical System Frequencies from 1 to 18 cycles/mm 2" x 2" Soda Lime Glass Substrate Positive and Negative Patterns Available Thorlabs offers positive and negative NBS 1963A resolution test targets that are made from plating chrome on a glass substrate and measure 2" x 2". These targets have sets of 5 horizontal and 5 vertical lines. Each set of lines is labeled with a number, which refers to the number of cycles per mm. With a maximum frequency of 18 cycles/mm, the smallest cycles are only mm. The minimum frequency is 1.0 cycle/mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm R2L2S1N $ , Negative NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2" R2L2S1P $ ,00 1, Positive NBS 1963A Resolution Target, 2" x 2" 1786

136 Selection Guide LASER SCANNING MICROSCOPY MICROSCOPY COMPONENTS OCT IMAGING SYSTEMS OCT COMPONENTS ADAPTIVE OPTICS Pages Pages Pages Pages Pages Selection Guide Overview Pages Kits Pages Deformable Mirrors Pages Wavefront Sensors Pages Application Note Pages

137 OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Overview (Page 1 of 2) Applications AO-OCT Ophthalmic Imaging Laser Communications Interferometric Sensing High Contrast Astronomical Imaging Ultrafast Sciences Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors See Page 1798 Introduction Adaptive optics (AO) is a rapidly growing multidisciplinary field encompassing physics, chemistry, electronics, and computer science. AO systems are used to correct (shape) the wavefront of a beam of light. Historically, these systems have their roots in the international astronomy and US defense communities. Astronomers realized that if they could compensate for the aberrations caused by atmospheric turbulence, they would be able to generate higher resolution astronomical images; with sharper images comes an additional gain in contrast, which is also advantageous for astronomers since it means that they can detect fainter objects that would otherwise go unnoticed. While astronomers were trying to overcome the blurring effects of atmospheric turbulence, defense contractors were interested in ensuring that photons from their high-power lasers would be correctly pointed so as to reach their targets. More recently, due to advancements in the sophistication and simplicity of AO components, researchers have utilized these systems to make breakthroughs in the areas of femtosecond pulse shaping, microscopy, laser communication, vision correction, and retinal imaging. Although dramatically different fields, all of these areas benefit from an AO system due to undesirable time-varying optical effects. Typically, an AO system is comprised from three components: (1) a wavefront sensor, which measures these wavefront deviations, (2) a deformable mirror, which can change shape in order to modify a highly distorted optical wavefront, and (3) real-time control software, which uses the information collected by the wavefront sensor to calculate the appropriate shape that the deformable mirror should assume in order to compensate for the distorted wavefront. Together, these three components operate in a closed-loop fashion. By this, we mean that any changes in the system can also be detected and corrected by that system. In principle, this closed-loop system is fundamentally simple; it measures the phase as a function of the position of the optical wavefront under consideration, determines its aberration, computes a correction, reshapes the deformable mirror, observes the consequence of that correction, and then repeats this process over and over again as necessary if the phase aberration varies with time. Through this procedure, the AO system is able to improve optical resolution of an image by removing aberrations from the wavefront of the light being imaged. Aberration Compensation Abilities Aberrations arise from departures from ideal Gaussian theory. When aberrations are present, the peak intensity will be reduced and the image or laser beam propagating to a target will not reach diffraction-limited resolution. Adaptive optics are capable of correcting all types of monochromatic aberrations (e.g., spherical aberration, coma, astigmatism, field curvature, and distortion) from a wavefront. Chromatic aberrations (multiple wavelengths), however, cannot be corrected using adaptive optics. AO Kits See Page 1790 Deformable Mirrors See Page 1796 Breadboard Not Included 1788

138 Overview (Page 2 of 2) Monochromatic Aberrations Overview systems are able to correct all five primary as well as higher order aberrations. The surface of the deformable mirror in an system is adjusted to compensate for all these aberrations. The primary aberrations include: Spherical Coma Astigmatism Field Curvature Distortion OCT Spherical Aberration Coma Overview (a) (b) (c) (d) Spherical aberrations are caused by rays of light incident on the edges of a lens that undergo stronger refraction due to the sharper slope of the lens surfaces at the edges. As a result, the rays on the edges of the lens will converge at a different location than the central rays as shown in frame (c) above. Unlike a perfect lens (refer to frame a), there is not a unique axial focal point for the incoming light. Spherical aberrations degrade resolution by redistributing some light from the central bright spot (shown in frame b) to the concentric rings of the Airy diffraction pattern as shown in frame (d). (a) Coma, or comatic aberration, is associated with off-axis object points. Off-axis light, incident on a lens, undergoes different amounts of refraction depending on where individual rays hit the lens (a). As a result, each annulus of light focuses onto the image plane at different locations with a different spot size, leading to varying transverse magnifications. Coma leads to an asymmetrical, comet-like diffraction pattern, as shown in (b). (b) Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Astigmatism Field Curvature Object Point Tangential Ray Chief Ray (a) Sagittal Plane Sagittal Optical Axis Lens Tangential Plane Object Optical Axis Astigmatism, similar to coma, arises when an object point is moved off axis (a). The incident cone of light will obliquely strike the lens, leading to a refracted wavefront characterized by two principle curvatures that create two different focal planes (b). The amount of astigmatism present dictates the distance between the two foci. Astigmatism leads to two elongated diffraction patterns as shown in frames (c) and (d). (b) Tangential Focus Sagittal Focus (c) (d) (a) The final image of most optical systems is usually projected onto a planar surface. In actuality, a lens creates an image on a curved (Petzval) surface as shown in frame (a). Field curvature arises from forcing a curved image surface onto a flat plane. As a result, only certain regions of a plane will be in focus, such as the central portion (refer to frame b) if the image plane is in location A or the edges if the image plane is moved to location B (refer to frame c). (b) (c) Distortion Pincushion Ideal Barrel (a) (b) (c) Distortion arises from imperfect lenses where different areas of the lens have different focal lengths and therefore magnifications. When transverse magnification increases with axial distance, pincushion distortion occurs (a). When transverse magnification is decreased, barrel distortion occurs (c); an ideal lens will produce zero distortion (b). 1789

139 OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Kits (Page 1 of 6) Overview Thorlabs (AO) Kits are designed to enable easy integration of wavefront correction into research imaging systems. Each kit includes a MEMS-based deformable mirror manufactured by Boston Micromachines Corporation, a Thorlabs Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, all necessary imaging optics and mounting hardware, application software, a full-features software development kit (SDK), and Application Programming Interface (API) documentation for integration of adaptive optics into end-user software. The kit ships as three pre-aligned optomechanical sections that only need to be arranged on a usersupplied breadboard, providing a near out-ofthe-box solution for realtime wavefront analysis and correction. Thorlabs now offers eight variations of AO Kits. Choose from a gold- or aluminum-coated deformable mirror with 140 or 32 actuators and a CCD- or CMOS-based Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor. Details on all eight AO Kit options are outlined below. Kit Breadboard Sold Separately Minimal Assembly Required Features Complete Kit for Wavefront Measurement and Control Includes MEMS-Based Deformable Mirror, Shack Hartmann Wavefront Sensor, and All Required Optics and Mechanics (Partially Pre-Assembled) Control Software for Closed-Loop Operation Software Development Kit Included 2:1 Sampling of Spots-to-Actuators Eliminates Waffle Error MEMs DM Structure Offers a Robust Design and Optimal Performance 3.5 µm Stroke with 14-Bit Control and Zero-Hysteresis, Provides Higher Repeatable Precision Wavefront Control than Other DM Technologies Operating Wavelength nm (Aluminum-Coated DM) nm (Gold-Coated DM) Options CCD- or CMOS-Based Wavefront Sensor 140 (12 x 12 Array) or 32 (6 x 6 Array) Actuator Deformable Mirror Gold- or Aluminum-Coated Deformable Mirror Kit Specifications: Order & Pricing Information on Page 1795 KIT ITEM # AOK2-UM01 AOK2-UP01 AOK4-UM01 AOK4-UP01 AOK1-UM01 AOK1-UP01 AOK3-UM01 AOK3-UP01 Deformable Mirror Item # DM32-35-UM01 DM32-35-UP01 DM32-35-UM01 DM32-35-UP01 DM UM01 DM UP01 DM UM01 DM UP01 Mirror Coating Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Actuator Array 6 x 6 (32 Actuators)* 12 x 12 (140 Actuators)* Actuator Stroke (Max) 3.5 µm (5.5 µm Available Upon Request) 3.5 µm (5.5 µm Available Upon Request) Actuator Pitch 400 µm 400 µm Clear Aperture 2.0 mm x 2.0 mm 4.4 mm x 4.4 mm Average Step Size <1 nm <1 nm Wavefront Sensor WFS150-5C WFS10-5C WFS150-5C WFS10-5C Sensor Type CCD CMOS CCD CMOS Frame Rate (Max) 15 Hz 450 Hz 15 Hz 450 Hz Wavelength Range nm Camera Resolution (Max) 1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable) 640 x 480 Pixels (Selectable) 1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable) 640 x 480 Pixels (Selectable) Pixel Size 4.65 x 4.65 µm 9.9 x 9.9 µm 4.65 x 4.65 µm 9.9 x 9.9 µm Number of Lenslets (Max) 39 x 31 (Selectable) 41 x 29 (Selectable) 39 x 31 (Selectable) 41 x 29 (Selectable) Wavefront Dynamic Range** >100 λ >100 λ Wavefront Sensitivity** λ/50 rms λ/30 rms λ/50 rms λ/30 rms Exposure Range 79 µs - 65 ms 33 µs ms 79 µs - 65 ms 33 µs ms * The 4 corner actuators are inactive. **@ 633 nm 1790

140 Kits (Page 2 of 6) Deformable Mirror Head Deformable Mirror Composition Deformable Mirrors Thorlabs offers four Deformable Mirror (DM) options for the Kits. Two options incorporate Boston Micromachines Corporation s (BMC s) 140 actuator deformable mirror (Multi-DM) while the other two options incorporate BMC s 32 actuator deformable mirror (Mini-DM). Both the Multi-DM and Mini-DM are available with either an aluminum- or gold-coated mirror. All DM s contain a protective 6 wedge in front of the mirror with a broadband AR coating for the nm range (custom AR coatings available upon request). When combined with a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, these kits are designed for use in either the nm (kits with a gold-coated mirror) or the nm (kits with an aluminum-coated mirror) range. Micro-electro-mechanical (MEMS) deformable mirrors are widely used for Membrane Surface wavefront shaping applications mainly due to their versatility and ability to Actuator Post produce sub-nanometer, highresolution wavefront correction. Actuator Surface Actuator Support Unlike piezoelectric mirrors, the electrostatic actuation used with these Electrodes DMs ensures deformation without Silicone Substrate hysteresis. Close up of Deformable Mirror OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO 100 Deformable Mirror Coating Curves 4.0 Reflectivity vs. Wavelength of AR Coating (Normal Incidence) % Reflectivity Unprotected Gold Unprotected Aluminum % Reflectivity Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Contact Tech Support to Inquire about Custom AR Coating Options Deformable Mirror Specifications: Order & Pricing Information on Page 1797 KIT ITEM # AOK2-UM01 AOK2-UP01 AOK4-UM01 AOK4-UP01 AOK1-UM01 AOK1-UP01 AOK3-UM01 AOK3-UP01 Deformable Mirror Item # DM32-35-UM01 DM32-35-UP01 DM32-35-UM01 DM32-35-UP01 DM UM01 DM UP01 DM UM01 DM UP01 Deformable Mirror Mini-DM Multi-DM Mirror Coating Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Actuator Array 6 x 6 12 x 12 Actuator Stroke (Max) 3.5 µm (5.5 µm Available Upon Request) Actuator Pitch 400 µm Clear Aperture 2.0 mm x 2.0 mm 4.4 mm x 4.4 mm Mirror Coating nm nm nm nm nm nm nm nm Frame Rate with Feedback (Max) Average Step Size Resolution Head Dimensions 8 khz (34 khz Burst) <1 nm 14 Bit 4.5" x 2.95" x 2.8" (114.3 mm x 74.9 mm x 71.1 mm) Driver Dimensions 4.0" x 5.25" x 1.25" (102 mm x 133 mm x 32 mm) 9.0" x 7.0" x 2.5" (229 mm x 178 mm x 64 mm) Computer Interface USB

141 OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Kits (Page 3 of 6) Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors The role of the wavefront sensor in an adaptive optics system is to measure the wavefront deviations from a reference wavefront. Thorlabs Kits are available with either the WFS150-5C high-sensitivity or WFS10-5C high-speed wavefront sensor. All of our wavefront sensors use a microlens array with an AR coating for the nm wavelength range. The lenslet array divides an incoming beam into many smaller beams, each of which is imaged onto the camera sensor, which is placed at the focal plane of the lenslet array. If a uniform plane wave is incident on the Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor (see Figure 1), a focused spot is formed along the optical axis of each lenslet, yielding a regularly spaced grid of spots in the focal plane. However, if a distorted wavefront (i.e., any non-flat wavefront) is incident, the focal spots will be displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet. The amount of shift of each spot s centroid is proportional to the local slope (i.e., tilt) of the wavefront at the location of that lenslet. The wavefront phase can then be reconstructed from the spot displacement information obtained. Planar Wavefront Microlens Array CCD Sensor Distorted Wavefront Microlens Array CCD Sensor Displaced Dot Missing Dot Figure 1. When a planar wavefront is incident on the Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor's microlens array, the light imaged on the sensor will display a regularly spaced grid of spots. If, however, the wavefront is aberrated, individual spots will be displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet; if the displacement is large enough, the image spot may even appear to be missing. This information is used to calculate the shape of the wavefront that was incident on the microlens array. WFS150-5C The AOK1-UM01, AOK1-UP01, AOK2-UM01, and AOK2-UP01 utilize the high-sensitivity, high-resolution WFS150-5C wavefront sensor, which operates up to 15 frames per second. For high-speed applications, we have developed the AOK3-UM01, AOK3-UP01, AOK4-UM01, and AOK4-UP01 Kits, which utilize our WFS10-5C high-speed wavefront sensor. The WFS10-5C is able to operate up to 450 frames per second. With Thorlabs Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensors, users can measure the wavefronts of laser sources, characterize the wavefront aberrations caused by optical components, and provide real-time feedback for the control of the deformable mirror. ITEM # AOK2-UM01 AOK2-UP01 AOK4-UM01 AOK4-UP01 AOK1-UM01 AOK1-UP01 AOK3-UM01 AOK3-UP01 Deformable Mirror Mini-DM (32 Actuators) Multi-DM (140 Actuators) Wavefront Sensor WFS150-5C WFS10-5C WFS150-5C WFS10-5C Sensor Type CCD CMOS CCD CMOS Frame Rate (Max) 15 Hz 450 Hz 15 Hz 450 Hz Wavelength Range nm Camera Resolution (Max) 1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable) 640 x 480 Pixels (Selectable) 1280 x 1024 Pixels (Selectable) 640 x 480 Pixels (Selectable) Pixel Size 4.65 µm x 4.65 µm 9.9 µm x 9.9 µm 4.65 µm x 4.65 µm 9.9 µm x 9.9 µm Number of Lenslets (Max) 39 x 31 (Selectable) 41 x 29 (Selectable) 39 x 31 (Selectable) 41 x 29 (Selectable) Lenslet Pitch 150 µm Lenslet Diameter 146 µm Effective Focal Length 3.7 µm Wavefront 633 nm λ/50 rms λ/30 rms λ/50 rms λ/30 rms The Benefits of (a) (a) (b) (b) The deformable mirror s impressive wavefront correction abilities are demonstrated in these images. An incoming distorted wavefront will retain its aberrations upon reflection from a flat mirror (a); in contrast, a DM can modify its surface profile to compensate for aberrations so that the distorted incident wavefront is unaberrated upon reflection (b). Consequently, when using a flat mirror to image an air force target, the image is completely blurred, making it impossible to distinguish any structure (c). However, if a DM is used instead, the smallest lines, which are only separated by 2 µm, are now discernable (d). (c) (c) (d) (d) 1792

142 Kits (Page 4 of 6) Deformable Mirror Control Real-Time Representation of the Deformable Mirror Actuator Displacements (Based on Voltages Applied to the Mirror) Spreadsheet-Like Numerical Interface Provides User-Input of Actuator Deflections Save/Recall Mirror Surface Maps The deformable mirror control shows a graphical plot of the DM surface shape as well a spreadsheet-like numerical interface that allows the user to input actuator deflections (in nanometers). The actuator deflection values may be changed individually or in selected groups. The actual shape of the DM will differ slightly due to a small influence of adjacent actuators. Specific mirror shapes can be loaded and saved from this window, allowing the creation of a library of unique and specialized mirror shapes that can be later recalled at the click of a button. OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors Shack-Hartmann Control Four Tab Displays Wavefront Sensor Spot Field Measured Directly from the Sensor Wavefront Plot (See Example at Right) Contour Wavefront Plot Measured Zernike Coefficients Wavefront Plot is Scalable / Rotatable Easily Access Wavefront Sensor and Display Control Settings in Each Tab Display Display Measured, Reference, or Difference Wavefront Plots Min/Max Threshold Eliminate 'Flickering' Active/Inactive WFS Spots User-Controllable Spot Centroid and Reference Spot Indicators (See Example to the Right) 2P-AO There is a user-adjustable hysteresis setting for the inclusion or exclusion of spots in the wavefront measurements. This setting is primarily used to filter out spots for which the intensity fluctuation has fallen below a low-end cut-off threshold. Once a spot is excluded, it will not be reintroduced into the wavefront measurement until its intensity exceeds a high-end threshold. In the spot field window (bottom right), the camera s exposure time and gain can be controlled. A pupil control allows the user to analyze the wavefront data within a user-defined circular pupil. The camera image of the spots (white spots in inset), spot centroid locations (red X s), reference locations (yellow X s), deviations (white lines between red and yellow X s), and intensity levels may easily be displayed in the spot field window. In addition to the camera controls mentioned above, when viewing the wavefront, the user has the option to display the measured wavefront, target (reference) wavefront, or the difference between these two wavefronts. There are predefined view angles for the wavefront plot, or it can be continuously adjusted by the user. Zernike Wavefront Generator Control User-Controllable Reference Wavefront User-Defined Reference Using First 36 Zernike Terms User-Captured Reference Wavefront 3D Surface Plot or 2D Contour Plot Display The Wavefront Generator control enables the user to create a reference wavefront by combining the first 36 Zernike polynomials in the spreadsheet-like grid. A graphical display of the created wavefront, along with the minimum, maximum, and peak-topeak wavefront deviations are provided. The wavefront generator control window also allows the user to capture the current measured wavefront and set it as the reference wavefront. Reference wavefronts can be saved and later recalled by the user. 1793

143 OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Kits (Page 5 of 6) Software Developement Kit The Kit includes a Software Development Kit (SDK) in the form of a flexible, cross-platform-compatible Dynamic Link Library (DLL) ideal for user-authored applications. The kit additionally includes full-featured Windows application software with easy-to-use Graphical User Interface (GUI) for full system control right out of the box. The SDK is designed to be a conduit for easy integration of AO instrumentation, control, and arithmetic functions into a user system. The application software provides immediate interaction with the AO Kit Deformable Mirror and Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor. This software is ideal for research, development, and educational applications. Additionally, the demo software provides pop-up tooltips containing detailed information pertaining to specific function calls dispatched by the associated GUI control. SDK Memory Management A unique aspect to the SDK is its versatile memory structure. We provide an SDK that is compatible with a broad range of programming environments, including C-based languages, Visual Basic, LabVIEW, and any other language capable of interfacing with standard DLL s. These languages allocate data memory using different methods. In order to maximize performance and cross-platform compatibiity, the SDK employs a flexible memory structure that allows it to transparently use either its own or user software-allocated data space. Features Dynamic Link Library (DLL) Compatible with C/C++, VB, and LabVIEW Direct DM and WFS Control Functions All Data Structures and Data Processing Algorithms Available for User-Authored Applications Calibration, Dynamic Reference Wavefront Creation, and Open- and Closed-Loop Functionalities Example Code Included DLL Features Versatile Memory Structure Comprehensive DLL Application Library Read from and Control the Wavefront Sensor Drive the Deformable Mirror Determine Wavefront Deviations Control Multiple Wavefront Sensors and Deformable Mirrors Simultaneously Expandable to Other Commercially Available Kits Application Software For immediate out-of-the-box operation, the AO Kit comes with a fully functional application that has been built from the SDK DLL library of functions. This demo software is capable of minimizing wavefront aberrations by analyzing the signals from the Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor and then deterministically calculating the deformable mirror surface adjustments necessary to achieve a specific wavefront shape at the exit port s virtual image plane. Users can also monitor the deformable mirror actuator control voltages, wavefront corrections, and intensity distribution in real time. Additionally, user-defined aberrations can be introduced via the demo application, and wavefront deviations can be compared to this new user-defined reference. Since the application software provides full control of the AO Kit, it is an excellent tool for research and development or developing educational packages based on adaptive optics. For users interested in incorporating adaptive optics functionality into their own imaging systems, the Tooltips mode provided in the application can help guide the user to program an application using the SDK library of functions. The AO Kit demo application has a Tooltip mode (top) that enables users to see particular SDK call functions associated with each control (bottom). These Tooltips assist programming of SDK-based user applications. 1794

144 Kits (Page 6 of 6) Assembled Kit Broadband Fold Mirrors Collimated 635 nm Laser Module 30 mm Cage- Compatible U-Bench (Center-Located Pupil Plane for Sample Testing) Relay Optics DM Mounted on a Kinematic DM Pitch-Yaw Platform Imaging OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Pellicle Beamsplitter Mount Open Light Path for Intergration with Other (Breadboard Sold Separately, See Page 3) Kits with High-Resolution Wavefront Sensor AOK1-UM01 $ 23, , ,00 183, AO Kit with Gold-Coated Multi-DM (140 Acutators) and CCD WFS AOK1-UP01 $ 23, , ,00 183, AO Kit with Aluminum-Coated Multi-DM (140 Acutators) and CCD WFS AOK2-UM01 $ 12, , ,00 95, AO Kit with Gold-Coated Mini-DM (32 Acutators) and CCD WFS AOK2-UP01 $ 12, , ,00 95, AO Kit with Aluminum-Coated Mini-DM (32 Acutators) and CCD WFS Kits with High-Speed Wavefront Sensor AOK3-UM01 $ 31, , ,00 247, AO Kit with Gold-Coated Multi-DM (140 Acutators) and CMOS WFS AOK3-UP01 $ 31, , ,00 247, AO Kit with Aluminum-Coated Multi-DM (140 Acutators) and CMOS WFS AOK4-UM01 $ 19, , ,00 155, AO Kit with Gold-Coated Mini-DM (32 Acutators) and CMOS WFS AOK4-UP01 $ 19, , ,00 155, AO Kit with Aluminum-Coated Mini-DM (32 Acutators) and CMOS WFS Complete Line of Cage Thorlabs cage systems are designed to facilitate the alignment of multiple components along a common optical axis. They are available in three sizes (16 mm, 30 mm, or 60 mm) for use with Ø1/2", Ø1", and Ø2" optics, respectively. Adapters are available to switch between different cage standards. In addition, cage systems can be integrated into optical setups using mounting posts and/or lens tubes. For more details, see page

145 OCT Overview Deformable Mirrors (Page 1 of 2) Driver DM UM01 Multi-DM 12 x 12 Actuator Array Head Mirror Composition Membrane Surface Actuator Post Actuator Surface Actuator Support Electrodes Silicone Substrate Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Through our partnership with Boston Micromachines Corporation (BMC), Thorlabs is pleased to offer BMC's Mini- and Multi- Deformable Micro-electro-mechanical systems (MEMS) based mirrors. These deformable mirrors (DMs) are ideal for advanced optical wavefront control; they can correct monochromatic aberrations (spherical, coma, astigmatism, field curvature, or distortion) in a highly distorted incident wavefront. MEMS deformable mirrors are currently the most widely used technology in wavefront shaping applications given their versatility, maturity of technology, and the high resolution wavefront correction capabilities they provide. Thorlabs DMs, fabricated using polysilicon surface micromachining fabrication methods, offer sophisticated aberration compensation in easy-to-use packages. The mirror consists of a mirror membrane that is deformed by either 32 electrostatic actuators (i.e., a 6 x 6 actuator array with four inactive corner actuators for the Mini-DM) or 140 electrostatic actuators (i.e., a 12 x 12 actuator array with four inactive corner actuators for the Multi-DM). These actuators provide 3.5 µm of stroke with zero hysteresis. Both the Mini-DM and Multi-DM are available with either a gold (Au) or aluminum (Al) coated mirror. Each is packaged with a protective 6 wedged window that has a broadband AR coating for the nm range (See the graphs below for coating curves. Please contact our Technical Support Team if you have an interest in a different stroke or coating range). Although the use of DMs in astronomy is well known, these miniature, precision wavefront control devices are also helping researchers to make breakthroughs in beam forming, microscopy, laser communication, and retinal imaging. Features 32 (Mini-DM) or 140 (Multi-DM) Actuator Models Available 3.5 µm Maximum Actuator Displacement High-Speed Operation up to 34 khz 400 µm Center-to-Center Actuator Spacing and Low Inter- Actuator Coupling Result in High Spatial Resolution Zero Hysteresis Actuator Displacement 14-Bit Drive Electronics Yield Sub-Nanometer Repeatability Compact Driver Electronics with Built-In High Voltage Power Supply Suitable for Benchtop or OEM Integration Operating Wavelengths nm for Al-Coated DM nm for Au-Coated DM Protective Window with 6 Wedge and Broadband AR Coating ( nm) Custom Coatings Available Upon Request MEMS Deformable Mirror Chip 100 Deformable Mirror Coating Curves 4.0 Reflectivity vs. Wavelength of Window AR Coating (Normal Incidence) % Reflectivity Gold Aluminum % Reflectivity Wavelength (nm) Wavelength (nm) Typical reflectivity plots for aluminum- and gold-coated surfaces (without the protective window) as well as the AR Coating Curve for the protective 6 wedge. The data for the unprotected aluminum and gold coatings was obtained using unpolarized light incident at

146 Deformable Mirrors (Page 2 of 2) Choosing a DM for Your Application Ideally, the DM needs to assume a surface shape that is conjugate to, but half the amplitude of, the aberration profile to compensate for aberrations and yield a flat wavefront. However, the actual range of wavefronts that can be corrected by a particular DM is limited by the actuator stroke and resolution, the number and distribution of actuators, and the model used to determine the appropriate control signals for the DM; the first two are physical limitations of the deformable mirror itself, whereas the last one is a limitation of the control software. The actuator stroke (i.e., the mechanical dynamic range or the maximum displacement) of the DM is an important performance parameter. Insufficient actuator stroke leads to poor performance and can prevent the convergence of the control loop. The number of actuators determines the number of degrees of freedom for which the mirror can correct. Thorlabs DMs are built with square actuator arrays for easy positioning on a Cartesian coordinate system and mapping on square wavefront sensor arrays. Additionally, the corner actuators of the square array are made inactive for better compensation of circular beams. ITEM # DM32-35-UM01 DM32-35-UP01 DM UM01 DM UP01 Actuator Array 6 x 6 6 x 6 12 x x 12 Mirror Coating Gold Aluminum Gold Aluminum Actuator Stroke (Max) 3.5 µm Actuator Pitch 400 µm Clear Aperture 2.0 mm x 2.0 mm 4.4 mm x 4.4 mm Average Step Size Driver DM32-35-UM01 $ 7, , ,00 59, Mini-DM 6 x 6 Deformable Mirror with Gold Coating DM32-35-UP01 $ 7, , ,00 59, Mini-DM 6 x 6 Deformable Mirror with Aluminum Coating <1 nm Fill Factor >99% Mechanical Response Time <100 µs Surface Quality Head Dimensions (W x D x H) Driver Specifications Frame Rate (Max) Resolution Driver Dimensions (W x D x H) Computer Interface Deformable Mirrors, 6 x 6 Actuator Array Plus Driver <20 nm (RMS) 4.4" x 2.8" x 2.9" (113 mm x 71 mm x 75 mm) 4.0" x 5.25" x 1.25" (102 mm x 133 mm x 32 mm) 8 khz (34 khz Bursts) 14 Bit USB2.0 DM32-35-UM01 Mini-DM 6 x 6 Actuator Array 9.0" x 7.0" x 2.5" (229 mm x 178 mm x 64 mm) Head OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Deformable Mirrors, 12 x 12 Actuator Array Plus Driver DM UM01 $ 17, , ,00 139, Multi-DM 12 x 12 Deformable Mirror with Gold Coating DM UP01 $ 17, , ,00 139, Multi-DM 12 x 12 Deformable Mirror with Aluminum Coating Kits In an effort to bring adaptive optics to more research fields, Thorlabs offers adaptive optics kits. These kits bundle the three primary components for any adaptive optics system: a MEMS-based deformable mirror (either gold- or aluminum-coated), a Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor, and real-time control software. In addition, the kits also include a light source, all collimation/imaging optics, and all mounting hardware necessary. These kits are specifically designed to provide an economical, easy-to-use adaptive optics solution that can be integrated into a research system in hours instead of months. AOK1-UM01 Kit (Breadboard Not Included) For more details, see page

147 OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors (Page 1 of 4) WFS10-14AR High-Speed Wavefront Sensor Introduction A Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, which is designed to measure the wavefront deviation from a reference wavefront, uses a lenslet array to divide an incoming beam into an array of smaller beams, each of which is imaged onto a camera that is placed at the focal plane of the lenslet array (Fig. 1). A uniform plane wave that is incident on a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor normal to the lenslet array forms a focused spot along the optical axis of each lenslet, yielding a regularly spaced grid of spots in the focal plane. A distorted wavefront, however, produces focal spots that are displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet. The amount of shift of each spot s centroid is proportional to the local slope (i.e., tilt) of the wavefront at the location of that lenslet. The wavefront phase can be reconstructed from the spot displacement information obtained (Fig. 2). Four parameters that influence the performance of a Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor are the number of lenslets that cover the camera s active area, Features High Sensitivity Models up to λ/150 RMS High Speed Models up to 450 fps Wavelength Range: nm or nm Real-Time Wavefront and Intensity Distribution Measurements Nearly Diffraction-Limited Spot Size For CW and Pulsed Light Sources Flexible Data Export Options (Text or Excel) Live Data Readout via TCP/IP Planar Wavefront Microlens Array Patent Pending WFS150-5C High-Resolution Wavefront Sensor the dynamic range, the measurement sensitivity, and the lenslet focal length. The number of lenslets restricts the maximum number of Zernike coefficients that a reconstruction algorithm can reliably calculate. See the section on Zernike modes on the next page for more information regarding the number of lenslets and wavefront measurement. Distorted Wavefront Sensor Sensor Missing Dot Figure 1. A planar wavefront incident on the Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor's lenslet array and imaged on the CCD sensor will display a regularly spaced grid of spots. An aberrated wavefront, however, will cause individual spots to be displaced from the optical axis of each lenslet; if the displacement is large enough, the image spot may even appear to be missing. This information is used to calculate the shape of the wavefront that was incident on the microlens array. Microlens Array Displaced Dot (a) (b) Figure 2. Two Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor screen captures are shown: the spot field (a) and the calculated wavefront based on that spot field information (b). 1798

148 Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors (Page 2 of 4) Sensitivity (θ min ) is a function of the minimum detectable spot displacement (δy min ), as described in Fig. 3. This parameter determines the minimum detectable phase. Dynamic Range (θ max ), however, is a measure of the maximum extent of phase that can be measured. A Shack-Hartmann sensor s measurement accuracy (i.e., the minimum wavefront slope that can be measured reliably) depends on its ability to precisely measure the displacement of a focused spot with respect to a reference position. A conventional algorithm will fail to determine the correct centroid of a spot if it partially overlaps another spot or if the focal spot of a lenslet falls outside of the area of the sensor assigned to detect it (i.e., spot crossover). Special algorithms that allow a spot to be followed, even when outside its regular detection area, are implemented into the Thorlabs wavefront sensor software to overcome these limitations and consequently increase the dynamic range of the sensor. The dynamic range of a system can be increased by using a lenslet with either a larger diameter or a shorter focal length. Increasing the dynamic range by increasing the lenslet diameter decreases the number of Zernike coefficients available to represent the wavefront. Conversely, increasing the dynamic range by shortening the lenslet focal length decreases the sensor s sensitivity. Ideally, a lenslet with the longest focal length that meets both the dynamic range and measurement sensitivity requirements should be used. Shack-Hartmann Zernike Modes Thorlabs wavefront sensors (WFS) can fit the measured wavefront to a Zernike polynomial, up to the 10th order (i.e., 66 Zernike modes). In general, the minimum number of Shack-Hartmann spots required to fit a wavefront to a Zernike polynomial is equal to the number of Zernike modes to be fit. Therefore, in addition to the wavefront sensor s specifications, the number of WFS lenslets used must be taken into account to ensure the desired number of Zernike mode coefficients can be calculated. Additionally, when using the wavefront sensor and a deformable mirror for AO control, the ratio of the number of used wavefront sensor lenslets to the number of deformable mirror actuators needs to be considered. Alfred Dubra s paper, Wavefront sensor and wavefront corrector matching in adaptive optics, Optics Min. Diameter (mm) Minimum Pupil and Beam Diameter WFS300x, WFS10-14AR WFS150x, WFS10-5C, WFS10-7AR Calculated Zernike Order Planar Wavefront Microlens (Diameter = d) Δz θ Distorted Wavefront Distorted Wavefront Spot Position Planar Wavefront Spot Position Figure 3. Detail of an individual microlens. The spot positions will only be directly behind the lens (green spot) if the incident wavefront is flat and parallel to the plane of the lenslets. A distorted wavefront will cause a spot to be deviated in X and Y (red spot) so that every spot lies away from the optical axis Z by an angle θ. The equations provided for the measurement sensitivity and the dynamic range below are obtained using the small angle approximation. θ min is the minimum wavefront slope that can be measured by the wavefront sensor; the measurement sensitivity is inversely proportional to this angle. δy min is the minimum detectable spot displacement and is limited by the pixel size, the centroid algorithm, and the signal to noise ratio of the sensor. θ max is the maximum wavefront slope that can be measured by the wavefront sensor, and depends on d, the diameter of the microlens. θ fml Sensor Express, March 2007, 15, No. 6, , is a good reference to better understand this concept. In this paper, Dubra finds that a 1:1 lenslet-to-actuator ratio does not yield the most stable AO control. The results show the performance is significantly improved with a ratio of roughly 2:1. A 1:1 magnification 4F optical relay (two equal focus lenses aligned in a confocal configuration) is used between the DM and the WFS in Thorlabs AO Kits; therefore, the lenslet to actuator ratio is 2.7:1 (i.e., 400 µm / 150 µm). This ensures the AO Kits operate in a regime where stable AO control can be achieved. WFS CAMERA RESOLUTION (PIXELS) WFS CAMERA RESOLUTION (PIXELS) WAVEFRONT SPOTS WFS150-7AR WFS150-14AR WAVEFRONT SPOTS WFS10-5C WFS10-7AR WFS300-14AR WFS10-14AR δy Minimum Slope: δy θ min min = f ML Dynamic Range: δy max d / 2 θmax = = f ML f ML Z APERTURE SIZE 320 x x 7 (49) 3 x 3 (9) 1.49 mm x 1.49 mm 512 x x 13 (169) 5 x 5 (25) 2.38 mm x 2.38 mm 768 x x 21 (441) 9 x 9 (81) 3.57 mm x 3.57 mm 1024 x x 29 (841) 13 x 13 (169) 4.76 mm x 4.76 mm 1280 x x 29 (1073) 17 x 13 (221) 5.95 mm x 4.76 mm APERTURE SIZE 180 x x 9 (81) 3 x 3 (9) 1.78 mm x 1.78 mm 260 x x 15 (225) 7 x 7 (49) 2.57 mm x 2.57 mm 360 x x 21 (441) 9 x 9 (81) 3.56 mm x 3.56 mm 480 x x 29 (841) 13 x 13 (169) 4.75 mm x 4.75 mm 640 x x 29 (1189) 19 x 13 (247) 6.34 mm x 4.75 mm OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Exchange Program: If you own a wavefront sensor from Thorlabs and would like to use a different microlens array, please contact Tech Support for details on our Exchange Program. 1799

149 OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO 1800 Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors (Page 3 of 4) Kits In addition to the base camera unit, which is available with one of three microlens arrays, kits are also offered that combine two microlens arrays, the base CMOS or CCD camera with preloaded calibration data for both arrays, and a pickup tool for interchanging the mounted arrays. The kits are ideal for situations where more than one light source or optical setup needs to be analyzed. Accessories Each Shack-Hartmann sensor and kit comes in a convenient storage and carrying case. Mounting accessories include an external C-Mount to internal SM1 thread (1.035"-40) adapter for mounting Ø1" Lens Tubes and mounted optics such as neutral density filters (see page 827) and a base plate for attaching Ø1/2" posts. Power is supplied to the sensor via a USB 2.0 connection to a PC. Software Features The included software package offers a user-friendly graphical interface with tools for choosing camera setting, calibration, analysis, and display options. The display options include the raw spotfield image, Zernike coefficients, measured and reconstructed 3D wavefront, and the irradiance distribution. Data export options include tabulated output, text or Excel file, and live data readout via TCP/IP or DataSocket Server. Drivers are also included for C Compilers, LabVIEW TM, LabWindows/CVI TM, and.net for integration into custom system control and data collection software. Software screen shots are shown on page Trigger Option For applications where an external trigger is required, cables are available to connect the trigger signal to the wavefront sensor. Please see the trigger specifications in the table below. a For frame rates of 450 Hz, a resolution of 180 x 180 pixels must be used. This PC hardwaredependent speed is achieved without graphical display, assumes a 5th order Zernike fit at the specified camera resolution, and minimum exposure time. b Absolute accuracy using internal reference. Measured for spherical wavefronts with a known radius of curvature. C-Mount to SM1 Adapter Baseplate Each wavefront sensor includes a C-mount to SM1 adapter and a baseplate for attaching the sensor to a Ø1/2" post. FAST WAVEFRONT SENSORS HIGH-RESOLUTION WAVEFRONT SENSORS ITEM # WFS10-5C WFS10-7AR WFS10-14AR WFS150-5C WFS150-7AR WFS300-14AR Camera Specifications Detector Array CMOS CCD Camera Resolution (Max) 640 x 480 Pixels, Software Selectable 1280 x 1024 Pixels, Software Selectable Pixel Size 9.9 µm x 9.9 µm 4.65 µm x 4.65 µm Aperture Size (Max) 6.34 mm x 4.76 mm 5.95 mm x 4.76 mm Frame Rate (Max) 450 Hz a 15 Hz Microlens Array Specifications Wavelength Range nm nm nm nm Effective Focal Length 3.7 mm 5.2 mm 14.2 mm 3.7 mm 5.2 mm 14.2 mm Lenslet Pitch 150 µm 300 µm 150 µm 300 µm Lens Size Ø146 µm 300 µm x 300 µm Ø146 µm 300 µm x 300 µm Coating Chrome Mask Antireflection Chrome Mask Antireflection Substrate Material Fused Silica (Quartz) Fused Silica (Quartz) General Specifications Wavefront 633 nm b λ/10 rms λ/30 rms λ/15 rms λ/50 rms Wavefront 633 nm c λ/30 rms λ/100 rms λ/50 rms λ/150 rms Wavefront Dynamic 633 nm d >100 λ >50 λ >100 λ >50 λ Number of Lenslets (Max) 41 x x x x 13 Local Wavefront Curvature e >7.4 mm >10 mm >40 mm >7.4 mm >10 mm >40 mm Optional External Trigger Specifications Trigger Slope Software Selectable: Low-High or High-Low Software Selectable: Low-High or High-Low Maximum Low Level 1.5 V 2 V Minimum High Level 3.5 V 5 V Input Current (Max) 10 ma Input Impedance >100 kω c Typical relative accuracy with respect to a reference wavefront (user calibration). Reference and each measurement values are averaged over 10 frames. d Over entire aperture of wavefront sensor. e Radius of wavefront curvature over single lenslet aperture.

150 Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors (Page 4 of 4) Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor WFS10-5C $ 4, , ,00 39, WFS10-7AR $ 4, , ,00 39, WFS10-14AR $ 4, , ,00 39, WFS150-5C $ 3, , ,00 30, WFS150-7AR $ 3, , ,00 30, WFS300-14AR $ 3, , ,00 30, Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensor Kits High-Speed Shack-Hartmann WFS, 150 µm Pitch, Chrome Masked, nm High-Speed Shack-Hartmann WFS, 150 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm High-Speed Shack-Hartmann WFS, 300 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm High-Resolution Shack-Hartmann WFS, 150 µm Pitch, Chrome Masked, nm High-Resolution Shack-Hartmann WFS, 150 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm High-Resolution Shack-Hartmann WFS, 300 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm WAVEFRONT MICROLENS MICROLENS ITEM # $ RMB SENSOR TYPE ARRAY 1 ARRAY 2 WFS10-K1 $ 5, , ,00 45, WFS10-K2 $ 5, , ,00 45, WFS-K1 $ 4, , ,00 36, WFS-K2 $ 4, , ,00 36, Shack-Hartmann Sensor Trigger Cables High-Speed (450 Hz) WFS High-Resolution (1.3 Megapixel) WFS 150 µm Pitch, Chrome Masked, nm 150 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm 150 µm Pitch, Chrome Masked, nm 150 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm 300 µm Pitch, AR Coated: nm CAB-WFS10-T1 $ , Trigger Cable for Fast Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors CAB-DCU-T2 $ , USB and Trigger Cable for 1.3 Megapixel Shack-Hartmann Wavefront Sensors OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Exchange Program: If you own a wavefront sensor from Thorlabs and would like to use a different microlens array, please contact Tech Support for details on our Exchange Program. Beam Profilers: Scanning and CCD High Dynamic Range CCD Camera with High Resolution and Low Noise Wavelength Range: nm CW and TTL Triggered Single Pulse Detection Thorlabs CCD-camerabased beam profilers, compared to scanning slit profilers, offer true 2D analysis of the beam's power density distribution. This greater detail allows complex mode patterns to be identified while optimizing laser systems. Scanning Slit Profiler with 4 Models Covering the nm Range Si, Ge, and INGaAs Sensors CW and Pulsed Sources 10 Hz High Dynamic Range Thorlabs Scanning Slit Profilers are highprecision instrument with a dynamic range of 72 db that can analyze the power distribution of laser beams with diameters from 10 µm to 9 mm. See page 1615 See page

151 OCT Overview Kit Two-Photon Microscope with (Page 1 of 2) Features Two-Photon Microscope System with Improved Resolution and Signal Intensity Utilizes for Correction of Wavefront Distortions Induced by the Optical System and Thick Samples Wavefront Sensor-Less Closed-Loop Feedback Built Upon Thorlabs Essentials Kit For updates on the development of the 2P-AO Microscope, please check our website Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO The Two-Photon Microscope is a demonstration of combining Thorlabs Essentials Kit with our Deformable Mirror adaptive optic to correct aberrations that result from imaging deep within a sample. In this article we demonstrate how a Two-Photon (2P-AO) Microscope can be one step towards reaching the goal of better images for microscopy applications. Two-Photon Two-photon, or multiphoton microscopy, is a nonlinear fluorescence imaging technique that enables optical sectioning, potentially up to 1 mm deep, in living samples. In two-photon microscopy, fluorescence excitation and emission only occurs within the focal volume of interest. With two-photon imaging, potential photobleaching or photodamage to the sample is localized to within the focal volume. By minimizing photobleaching/damage, repetitive imaging experiments can be performed in living samples. Additionally, because twophoton emission originates only from within the focal volume region, background noise created from signal generated from outside the focal region is eliminated, making it possible to image deeper within a sample. Although optical systems, such as microscopes, are designed to minimize aberrations, samples themselves can distort wavefronts and induce aberrations not corrected by the microscope. In microscopy, a desired resolution is achieved by the use of high magnification microscope objectives. These objectives are mainly designed for focusing underneath a coverslip or in water/oil immersion conditions. Aberrations that stem from the sample and cause signal degradation and reduced resolution are often ignored because most images are acquired from shallow depths. For applications like two-photon microscopy, where deep sample imaging is performed, these sacrifices cannot be overlooked. is a field that aims to reduce aberrations in optical systems by compensating for wavefront distortions. The main element of an adaptive optics Two-Photon Adaptive Optics Microscope system is a deformable mirror, a thin, reflective surface whose shape is controlled to compensate or reshape a wavefront. Frequently adaptive optics systems incorporated a wavefront sensor to measure the wavefront and provide feedback on image quality. For the 2P-AO microscope, we are developing a sensor-less correction system. This will ensure maximum detection efficiency for the two-photon images. (a) AO Off (b) AO On Here we demonstrate 3D reconstructions of two-photon images taken of fiber structure in paper before (a) and after (b) wavefront correction using adaptive optics. Incorporation of adaptive optics has provided increased resolution and signal intensity. 1802

152 Two-Photon Microscope with (Page 2 of 2) Emission Filter Non-Descanned Detection Module GaAsP PMT GaAsP PMT Secondary Dichroic Mirror/Emission Filters Cube Dichroic Beamsplitter NIR Blocking Filter Scan Head Resonant Scanner Galvo Scanner Schematic Diagram and Beam Path of Essentials Kit Microscope Objective Relay Lenses Polarizing Beamsplitter Scan Lens Tube Lens Primary Dichroic Mirror Cube Sample Fs Laser In λ/4 Wave Plate Deformable Mirror The 2P-AO Microscope incorporates Thorlabs MPM-2PKIT Essentials Kit (see pages for details) and a goldcoated, 140 actuator, Multi-Deformable Mirror (DM UM01, see pages for details). Two-photon excitation light (femtosecond laser) is initially directed towards the deformable mirror via a polarizing beamsplitter and λ/4 wave plate. The excitation light reflects off of the deformable mirror, passes back through the wave plate and beamsplitter, and is coupled to the Scan Head portion of the Essentials Kit. The two-photon emission light from the sample is diverted to a two-channel, non-descanned, detection module. This module incorporates GaAsP PMTs to produce high-sensitivity twophoton images. These images are then used, in a closed-loop feedback fashion, to drive the necessary wavefront correction. The feedback system enables continuous compensation of the wavefront between acquired image frames. OCT Overview Kit Deformable Mirrors Wavefront Sensors 2P-AO Since the 2P-AO Microscope is built upon Thorlabs Essentials Kit and Deformable Mirror, construction of this system is straight forward. The most challenging aspect is developing the control system to optimize the two-photon images. To address this challenge, we developed a wavefront sensor-less, closed-loop feedback system that will correct aberrations induced by both the microscope s optical system and the sample. Through a proprietary algorithm still under development, an image-based metric is calculated to determine the current image quality and degree of wavefront correction necessary to further improve the image. That metric is translated into drive voltages that control the shape of the deformable mirror. This process is performed iteratively. With each iteration, the deformable mirror is further adjusted until the image quality is optimized. The combination of deep imaging via two-photon microscopy and aberration correction by incorporating adaptive optics promises to enable improved imaging deep into live tissue samples. Please contact Thorlabs for updates on the development of this exciting technology. Two-Photon Microscope User Interface Essentials Kit Includes Core to Build a Imaging System Non-Descanned Design Directly Compatible with Thorlabs Cage System Microscope-Less Design Enables Imaging of Large Samples MPM-2PKIT Shown Mounted on an XT66 Series Rail and MB1218 Aluminum Breadboard (Rail and Breadboard are Not Included) For more details, see pages